4957B RF Analyzer

User Manuals

Ceyear Technologies Co., Ltd

The Manual applies to the following series signal generators based on the firmware version of 1.0
and higher.
4957B RF analyzer
Options other than standard accessories are as follows:
User's Manual (English version).
Programming Manual (English version)
Antenna test (software): It is used to test the return loss, standing wave ratio and breakpoints of cables
and feeders.
Vector voltmeter (software): It is used to test the cable phase shift and electrical length of cables.
USB power measurement (software, USB power probe to be equipped separately): It supports the
external USB peak/continuous wave power probe for power measurement.
Interference analysis (software): It provides such functions as waterfall chart and RSSI measurement.
Analog demodulation analysis (software): It realizes the demodulation characteristic analysis of
AM/FM/PM signal.
Field strength measurement (software): It provides such field strength measurement functions as dot
frequency, frequency sweep and list sweep.
Interference map (software): It is used with the GPS positioning option.
Signal analysis (software): It realizes the fast analysis of interference signal, and provides the
functions of audio demodulation and IQ capture.
Power detection (software): It receives the external signal from the spectrum input port to measure the
power of the signal.
GPS option: External antenna, built-in GPS module and software.
Electronic calibration support (software, additional electronic calibration parts are required): It is used
for vector network analysis and calibration of antenna feeder, vector voltmeter, etc.

Version: A Jun 2022, Ceyear Technologies Co., Ltd.

Address: No. 98, Xiangjiang Road, Qingdao Economic & Technological Development Zone, Shandong Province
Service Consultation: 0532-86889847 400-1684191
Technical support: 0532-86880796
Quality Supervision: 0532-86886614
Fax: 0532-86889056
Website: www.ceyear.com
Email: [email protected]
Postal code: 266555
Foreword Product warranty Safety precautions
The product warranty
Thank you for choosing period is 18 months ! Warning
and using the 4957B RF starting from the delivery
analyzer developed and completed. The instrument
produced by Ceyear manufacturer will repair or
Technologies Co., Ltd.! replace the damaged The symbol "Warning"
components according to indicates a hazard. It
With meeting your
the user's requirements reminds the user to pay
requirements as our duty,
and actual conditions attention to a certain
we will provide you with
within the warranty period. operation process,
high-quality instruments
as well as good after-sales For specific maintenance operation method or the
issues, see the contract. like. Failure to observe the
service. Ceyear will insist
rules or incorrect operation
on the consistent tenet of
may cause personal injury.
"high quality and
Proceed to the next step
considerate service‖ and Product quality only after fully
the promise to provide our
users with satisfactory certificate understanding and
meeting the warning
products and services. We guarantee that the conditions indicated.
product can meet the
Manual No. indicator requirement in
the manual upon delivery.
YQ2.732.1032SSCN The calibration and
measurement are
completed by measuring
Version bodies with national Notice
qualification, with relevant
A 2022.6 data to be provided for
Ceyear Technologies Co., reference by users.
The "Notice" symbol
Ltd. indicates some important
Manual Authorization information which will not
Quality/Environmenta cause danger. It reminds
The contents of this l Management the user to pay attention to
manual are subject to a certain operation
change without notice. This product complies with process, operation method
The final right to interpret the quality and or the like. Failure to
the contents and terms environmental observe the rules or
used in this manual management systems operate correctly may
belongs to Ceyear during R&D, cause damage to the
Technologies Co., Ltd. manufacturing and testing. instrument or loss of
Ceyear Technologies Co., important data. Proceed to
The copyright of the Ltd. already has the
manual belongs to Ceyear the next step only after
required qualifications and fully understanding and
Technologies Co., Ltd, no has passed the
modification or alteration meeting the caution
certification of ISO 9001 conditions indicated.
can be made to the and ISO 14001
manual contents by any management systems.
unit or person without
approval of the Institute,
and no reproduction or
propagation of the manual
can be made for profits,
otherwise, Ceyear
Technologies Co., Ltd
retains the right of
pursuing legal
responsibilities from any
infringer.
 Contents
1 MANUAL NAVIGATION ..................................................................................................... 1
1.1. ABOUT THE MANUAL ........................................................................................................................1
1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS .....................................................................................................................2
2 OVERVIEW ........................................................................................................................... 3
2.1 PRODUCT OVERVIEW ........................................................................................................................3
2.2 SAFE OPERATION INSTRUCTIONS ....................................................................................................5
3 OPERATION GUIDE ......................................................................................................... 13
3.1 GET PREPARED ...............................................................................................................................13
3.2 FRONT PANEL AND INTERFACE DESCRIPTION ................................................................................31
4 VECTOR NETWORK ANALYSIS MODE ...................................................................... 36
4.1 INTRODUCTION TO TYPICAL MEASUREMENTS ................................................................................36
4.2 MENU STRUCTURE..........................................................................................................................48
4.3 MENU DESCRIPTION .......................................................................................................................55
5 SPECTRUM ANALYSIS MODE ...................................................................................... 67
5.1 INTRODUCTION TO TYPICAL MEASUREMENTS ................................................................................68
5.2 MENU STRUCTURE..........................................................................................................................95
5.3 MENU DESCRIPTION .....................................................................................................................100
6 CABLE AND ANTENNA FEEDER TEST MODE (OPTIONAL) .............................. 123
6.1 INTRODUCTION TO TYPICAL MEASUREMENTS ..............................................................................123
6.2 MENU STRUCTURE........................................................................................................................129
6.3 MENU DESCRIPTION .....................................................................................................................131
7 VECTOR VOLTMETER MODE (OPTIONAL) ............................................................. 135
7.1 INTRODUCTION TO TYPICAL MEASUREMENTS ..............................................................................135
7.2 MENU STRUCTURE........................................................................................................................140
7.3 MENU DESCRIPTION .....................................................................................................................141
8 USB POWER MEASUREMENT MODE (OPTIONAL) .............................................. 143
8.1 INTRODUCTION TO TYPICAL MEASUREMENT ................................................................................143
8.2 MENU STRUCTURE........................................................................................................................145
8.3 MENU DESCRIPTION .....................................................................................................................146
9 INTERFERENCE ANALYSIS MEASUREMENT MODE (OPTIONAL) .................. 148
9.1 INTRODUCTION TO TYPICAL MEASUREMENT ................................................................................148
9.2 INTERFERENCE ANALYSIS MENU STRUCTURE ............................................................................151
9.3 DESCRIPTION OF INTERFERENCE ANALYSIS MENU ....................................................................153
10 DEMODULATION ANALYSIS MEASUREMENT MODE (OPTIONAL) ............... 160
10.1 INTRODUCTION TO TYPICAL MEASUREMENT..............................................................................160
10.2 DEMODULATION ANALYSIS MENU STRUCTURE ..........................................................................162
10.3 DESCRIPTION OF DEMODULATION ANALYSIS MENU ..................................................................164
11 CHANNEL SWEEP MEASUREMENT MODE (OPTIONAL) ................................. 171
11.1 INTRODUCTION TO TYPICAL MEASUREMENTS ...........................................................................171
11.2 MENU STRUCTURE OF CHANNEL SWEEP ...................................................................................174
11.3 DESCRIPTION OF CHANNEL SWEEP MENU .................................................................................175
12 FIELD STRENGTH MEASUREMENT MODE (OPTIONAL) .................................. 178
12.1 INTRODUCTION TO TYPICAL MEASUREMENTS ...........................................................................178
12.2 MENU STRUCTURE OF FIELD STRENGTH MEASUREMENT .........................................................182
12.3 DESCRIPTION OF FIELD STRENGTH MEASUREMENT MENU .......................................................184
13 LOCATION ANALYZER MODE (OPTIONAL) ......................................................... 189
13.1 INTRODUCTION TO TYPICAL MEASUREMENTS ...........................................................................189
13.2 MENU STRUCTURE OF LOCATION ANALYZER ............................................................................192
13.3 DESCRIPTION OF LOCATION ANALYZER MENU ..........................................................................193
14 SIGNAL ANALYSIS MODE (OPTIONAL)................................................................. 198
14.1 INTRODUCTION TO TYPICAL MEASUREMENTS ...........................................................................198
14.2 SIGNAL ANALYSIS MENU STRUCTURE ........................................................................................201
14.3 DESCRIPTION OF SIGNAL ANALYSIS MENU.................................................................................203
15 TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION ....................................................................................... 212
15.1 W ORKING PRINCIPLES ................................................................................................................212
15.2 DESCRIPTION OF FAULT INFORMATION ......................................................................................214
15.3 REPAIR ........................................................................................................................................215
16 TECHNICAL INDICATORS AND TESTING METHODS ........................................ 216
16.1 VECTOR NETWORK ANALYSIS PERFORMANCE INDICATOR TEST ..............................................216
16.2 SPECTRUM ANALYSIS PERFORMANCE INDICATOR TEST ...........................................................224
APPENDIX A PERFORMANCE AND PROPERTY INSPECTION RESULTS ......... 243
APPENDIX A RECORD SHEET OF 4957B RF ANALYZER...................................................................243
 4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Manual navigation
1 Manual navigation
This chapter introduces the user‘s manual functions, chapter structure and main contents of the
4957B RF analyzer, as well as the instrument-related documents provided to users.
 About the Manual .................................................................................................................... 1
 Related Documents ................................................................................................................. 2

1.1. About the Manual

This manual introduces the basic functions and operation methods of the 4957B RF analyzer
produced by Ceyear Technologies Co., Ltd. It describes such contents as product features, basic
operations, configuration guide, menu description, remote control, maintenance, technical
indicators and testing methods, etc. of the instrument to help users get familiar with and master the
operation method and key points of the instrument as soon as possible. To facilitate your skillful
use of the instruments, please read carefully this manual and follow its instructions for correct
operation.
This manual contains the following chapters:
Overview
This part introduces in general the main performance characteristics, typical application examples
and safety instructions of the 4957B RF analyzer. The purpose is to enable users to have a
preliminary understanding of the main performance characteristics of the instrument and to guide
users to operate the instrument safely.
Quick Start
This chapter introduces the pre-operation inspection, instrument browsing, basic measurement
methods, measurement window instructions and data storage of the 4957B RF analyzer. so that
users can have a preliminary understanding of the instrument itself and its measurement
processes as a preparation for the comprehensive introduction of the measurement operations of
the instrument hereinafter. This section contains some contents consistent with the relevant
sections in the Quick Start.
Operation Guide
It introduces in detail the operation methods of various measurement functions of the instrument,
including configuring the instrument, starting the measurement process and obtaining the
measurement results. This part mainly includes two parts: functional operation guide and
advanced operation guide. For users who are not familiar with the 4957B RF analyzer, the basic
operation guide introduces and enumerates each function systematically and in detail so that
users can understand and master some basic usage of the RF analyzer. The advanced operation
guide introduces relatively complicated testing processes and advanced operation skills for users
who have basic knowledge about using the instrument but are not familiar with some special
usage, and guides them to implement the measurement processes.
Menus
This part introduces the menu structure and menu items according to the functions to facilitate the
users to query for reference.
Troubleshooting and Repair
This part includes the introduction of the working principles of the instrument, troubleshooting,
error information description and repair methods.
1 / 248
4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Manual navigation
Technical indicators and testing methods
This part introduces the product features, main technical indicators and recommended test
methods of the 4957B RF analyzer.
Appendixes
Necessary reference information related to the 4957B RF analyzer is provided, including term
description, program-controlled command quick look-up table, menu quick look-up table, error
information quick look-up table, etc.

1.2 Related Documents

Documents of the 4957B RF analyzer include:
User‘s Manual
Program Control Manual
Quick Start Guide
User’s Manual
This manual describes the functions and operation methods of the instrument in detail, including
configuration, measurement, program control and maintenance, etc. The purpose is to The
purpose is to guide users to fully understand the functional characteristics of the product and
master common testing methods of the instrument. Main chapters include:
Manual Navigation
Overview
Quick Start
Operation Guide
Menus
Remote Control
Troubleshooting and Repair
Technical indicators and testing methods
Appendixes
Program Control Manual
This manual introduces remote programming basics, SCPI basics, SCPI, programming examples
and I/O driver function library in detail. The purpose is to The purpose is to guide users to quickly
and comprehensively master the program control commands and methods of the instrument. Main
chapters include:
Remote Control
Program Control Commands
Programming Examples
Error Description
Appendixes
Quick Start Guide
This manual introduces the basic methods for configuration and start-up measurement of the
instrument to enable users to quickly understand the characteristics of the instrument, and master
the basic settings and basic operation methods. Main chapters include:
Get Prepared
Typical Applications
Get Help

2 / 248
 4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Overview
2 Overview
This chapter introduces the main performance characteristics, main applications and main
technical indicators of the 4957B RF analyzer. It also gives introductions on correct operation the
instrument and precautions such as electrical safety.
 Product Overview…………………………………………………………………….………3
 Safety operation instructions…………………………………………………………..……5

2.1 Product Overview

The 4957B RF analyzer has many advantages, such as high performance indexes, high sweep
speed, many test functions, simple operation, etc. In terms of performance indexes, it has
excellent average noise level, phase noise and high dynamic range. In terms of measurement
modes, in addition to vector network analysis and spectrum analysis, abundant option
measurement function modes are also provided, including cable and antenna feeder test, vector
voltmeter, USB power measurement, interference analysis, demodulation analysis, channel
sweep, field strength measurement, etc. Each measurement mode is provided with a variety of
intelligent measurement functions. It adopts the integrated design of 8.4‖ liquid crystal and
capacitive touch screen to improve the clarity of display and the convenience of operation. It is
handheld, small in size, light in weight, flexible in power supply, easy to operate, and suitable for
field use.
 Product Features…………………………………………………………………………………3
 Typical applications…………………………………………………….…………………………4

2.1.1 Product Features

The 4957B RF Analyzer adopts the design idea of high integration, modularization and
standardization, and has excellent performance.

2.1.1.1 Basic Functions

1) Vector network analysis mode (VNA): For network S-parameter analysis (insertion loss and
gain);
2) Spectrum analysis mode (SA): For basic spectrum analysis of the signal, including field
strength measurement, channel power, occupied bandwidth, adjacent channel power, spurious
template, carrier-to-noise ratio, audio demodulation, IQ capture and other intelligent
measurement functions;
3) Antenna feeder test mode (CAT) (optional): For cable and antenna feeder test (return loss and
failure positioning);
4) Vector voltmeter mode (VVM) (optional): For amplitude, phase, standing wave ratio and
impedance measurement;
5) USB power measurement mode (USB-PM) (optional): For accurate measurement on
continuous wave power via external USB power probe;
6) Interference analysis function (optional): It provides such functions as waterfall chart and RSSI
measurement;
7) Demodulation analysis function (optional): It realizes the demodulation characteristic analysis
of AM/FM/PM signal;

3 / 248
4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Overview
8) Channel sweep function (optional): It can realize the signal power measurement of multiple
channels or frequencies;
9) Field strength measurement function (optional): It can realize the functions of dot frequency
measurement, frequency sweep measurement and list sweep measurement;
10) Directional analysis function (optional): It is mainly used for positioning interference sources or
unknown signal sources, and the direction of interference signals can be quickly positioned by
using external receiving antenna and electronic compass;
11) Signal analysis function (optional): It provides fast analysis of interference signals, and realizes
the display and playback of historical data with the help of the waterfall chart.

2.1.1.2 High Performance

1) Explicit Average Noise Level: Up to -157dBm@1Hz RBW;

2) Phase noise performance: -106dBm/Hz@100kHzfrequency deviation @1GHz carrier;
3) Sweep speed: The minimum sweep time of 1GHz span <20ms;
4) Resolution bandwidth: 1Hz～10MHz;
5) The dynamic range of the system can reach above 95dB;
6) 8.4-inch high-brightness and high-resolution touch screen LCD display, with view of 170°and
sound visuality at direct sunlight conditions.

2.1.1.3 Agility

1) Small size, light weight and built-in lithium battery facilitating field operation;
4) Perfect auto-diagnosis function and status self test;
3) Intelligent power supply management function, with dump energy indication and low capacity
warming;
4) Multiple options to meet different customer‘s requirements
5) Two types of USB2.0 ports available for portable storage device connection and PC
communication respectively;
6) One 10/100Mbps network port for local network establishment and remote control;
7) Various auxiliary test interfaces: 10MHz reference input/output interface, GPS antenna
interface, external trigger input interface, etc.;
8) OI in both Chinese and English, with built-in operation instruction and only help information.

2.1.2 Typical Applications

2.1.2.1 Multiple-field test

1) Filter performance test

Test such indicators of the filter as insertion loss, ripple, and out-of-band suppression.
2) Time domain measurement
Test on cable length and failure positioning via cable and antenna analysis or time domain
function of the vector network analysis mode.
3) Radar and communication system performance test
4) Measure radar network scattering parameter
It can be used in the research and development of all kinds of military and civil radar systems
4 / 248
 4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Overview
and communication systems. It can not only accurately test the frequency, power and phase
noise of all kinds of signals in the process of signal generation, but also test the modulation
characteristics of all kinds of spurious signals, parasitic signals, harmonic distortion and
signals.
5) Spectrum monitoring management
It can be used to manage the airborne radio frequency signal in the control range, and quickly
specify and search various interference signals. For example, it can monitor and manage the
spectrum in such places as the military radio stations, broadcasting stations, communications
equipment, airports, base stations and sensitive areas. It also has the audio demodulation
function, which can be used for radio monitoring.
6) Communication satellite monitoring
It can be used for monitoring the signal spectrum quality, power and power control status of
the communication satellite and discriminating and searching interference signals, ensuring
security, reliability and stability of the communication satellite network.
7) RF identification (RFID) test
It can be used to test the transmitted stray radiation and field intensity of the interrogator,
frequency deviation and occupied bandwidth, and measure the polling and timing of the RF
identification system.
8) Bluetooth field test

2.1.2.2 Test on components, parts and the instrument

It can be used for the DUT S-parameter amplitude, phase and group delay measurement,
featuring efficiency, strong error correction capability, which is widely used in such military and
civilian fields as components, radar, aerospace, electronic jamming and countermeasures,
communications, radio and television.
It can be used for testing such parameters as gain, frequency response, bandwidth, insertion
loss, frequency conversion loss, isolation and distortion of such components and parts as the
cable, connector, amplifier, filter, mixer, attenuator, isolator and coupler.
It can be used to test various instruments and equipment on such performance indicators as the
frequency, power, phase noise, parasitic, harmonic distortion and modulation characteristics
during the R&D, production and maintenance of the signal generator.

2.2 Safe Operation Instructions

Please read carefully and strictly observe the following precautions!
We will spare no effort to ensure that all production processes meet the latest safety standards
and provide users with the highest safety guarantee. The design and testing of our products and
the auxiliary equipment used meet relevant safety standards, and a quality assurance system has
been established to monitor the product quality and ensure the products to always comply with
such standards. In order to keep the equipment in good condition and ensure operation safety,
please observe the precautions mentioned in this manual. If you have any questions, please feel
free to consult us.
In addition, the correct use of this product is also your responsibility. Please read carefully and
observe the safety instructions before starting to use this instrument. This product is suitable for
use in industrial and laboratory environments or field measurement. Always use the product
correctly according to its restrictions to avoid personal injury or property damage. You will be

5 / 248
4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Overview
responsible for problems caused by improper use of the product or noncompliance with the
requirements, and we will not be held responsible. Therefore, in order to prevent personal
injury or property damage caused by dangerous situations, please always observe the
safety instructions. Please keep the basic safety instructions and the product documentation
properly and deliver them to end users.
 Safety signs……………………………………………………………………………...……7
 Operation Status and Locations…………………………………………………….………8
 Electricity safety…………………………………………………………………….…………9
 Operation precautions…………………………………………………………………………10
 Maintenance………………………………………………………………………….…………11
 Battery and power module………………………………………………………………….…11
 Transportation……………………………………………………………………………………12
 Waste Disposal/Environmental Protection………………………………………………..…12

6 / 248
 4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Overview
2.2.1 Safety Signs

2.2.1.1 Product-related Marks

Safety marks on the products are described as follows (Table 2.1):

Table 2.1 Products safety marks

Symbol Meaning Symbol Meaning

Notice, reminding users of
information to be paid Special Turn On/Off the power
Notes to.
It reminds users of the operation
information or instructions to be
paid attention to.

Notice, handling heavy equipment. Standby indication

Danger! Hazard of electric shock. DC

Warning! Hot surface. AC

Protective conductive end DC/AC

Reinforced insulation protection of the

Grounding instrument

Ground terminal EU mark for batteries and accumulators.

Please refer to Item 1 of "2.2.8 Waste
Disposal/Environmental Protection" in this
section for specific instructions.
Notice, please handle classical EU mark for of separate collection of
sensitive devices with care. electronic devices.
Please refer to Item 2 of "2.2.8 Waste
Disposal/Environmental Protection" in this
section for specific instructions.

Warning! Radiation.Please refer to

Item 7 of "2.2.4 Operation
Precautions" in this section for
specific instructions.

7 / 248
4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Overview
2.2.1.2 Manual-related Marks

In order to remind users to operate the instrument safely and pay attention to relevant information,
the following safety warning marks are used in the product manual, which are explained as
follows:

! Danger
Danger mark, personal injury or equipment damage may be caused if not avoided.

! Warning

Warning mark, personal injury or equipment damage may be caused if not avoided.

! Caution

Caution mark, slight or medium personal injury or equipment damage may be caused if not
avoided.

Notice
The "Note" symbol indicates some important information which will not cause danger.

Tips

Tips on information about the instrument and its operation

2.2.2 Operation Status and Locations

Please note before operating the instrument:

1) Unless otherwise stated, the maximum altitude for operating the instrument shall not exceed

4,600m, and the maximum altitude for transporting the instrument shall not exceed 4,500m.
The range of actual supply voltage is ±10% of the marked voltage, and the range of supply
frequency is±5% of the marked frequency.

2) Unless otherwise stated, the instrument has not received any waterproof treatment, do not

place the instrument on surfaces with water, vehicles, cabinets, tables and other objects that
are not fixed and do not meet the load conditions. Please place the instrument securely and
fix it on the surface of a solid object (e.g., an ESD workbench).

3) Do not place the instrument in an environment where mist is easily formed, for example,

Don‘t move the instrument in an environment where cold and heat are in alternation, where
water droplets formed on the instrument may cause electric shock and other hazards.

4) Do not place the instrument on the surface of a heat-dissipating object (e.g., a radiator). The

Operation environment temperature shall not exceed the value specified in the description of
relevant indicators of the product. Overheating of the product will lead to electric shock, fire
and other risks.
8 / 248
 4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Overview
5) Do not insert any object into the instrument through the opening on the instrument casing, or

Cover up any notch or opening on the product, which is used for internal ventilation and
preventing the instrument from getting overheat.

2.2.3 Electrical Safety

Precautions for electrical safety of the instrument:

1) Please adopt the AC-DC adapter delivered along with the instrument to supply power to the
instrument. Improper use of the power adapter will cause damage to the internal hardware of
the instrument.

2) Adopt the 220V AC 3-core stabilized voltage supply for the instrument, so as to avoid any
damage to the internal hardware to the instrument due to high-power peak pulse.

3) Ensure good power supply grounding to avoid any damage to the instrument.

4) If the instrument is powered by batteries or with batteries inside, please replace the battery
with one of the same type or recommended equivalent type. Do not put any object into the
instrument from the opening on the shell of the instrument, or pour any liquid onto or into the
instrument shell or the instrument respectively, so as to avoid any internal short circuit or
electric shock, fire or personal injury.

5) Power off first before wiping the instrument to avoid any electric shock, and use dry or
slightly-wet soft cloth to wipe the instrument surface. Do not try to wipe the internal of the
instrument.

6) Do not use the product with damaged power line. Check regularly the power line for normal
condition. Take proper safety protection measures, and place the power line properly, so as to
ensure it is free of damage and personnel will not be subject to power line tripping or electric
shock.

7) Before the instrument is powered on, the actual supply voltage shall match the required
supply voltage of the instrument.

8) Do not damage the power cord, otherwise electric leakage will be caused, resulting in
damage to the instrument and even injury of the operators. If an external power cord or
extension socket is used, it should be checked before use to ensure electrical safety.

9) If the power supply socket does not provide an on/off switch, to cut the power of the
instrument, you can just directly unplug the instrument, and therefore, it should be ensured
that the power plug can be inserted or drawn conveniently.

10) Do not use damaged power cords. Before connecting the instrument to the power cord, check
the integrity and safety of the power cord, and properly place the power cord to avoid the
impact due to human factors, such as, too long power cord that may trip the operator.

11) Keep the socket clean and tidy, and ensure the plug and the socket in good contact and
reliable engagement.

12) Neither the socket nor the power cord can be overloaded, otherwise fire or electric shock will
be caused.
9 / 248
4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Overview
13) The instrument shall comply with IEC60950-1/EN60950-1 or IEC61010-1/EN 61010-1
standards to connect with PC or IPC.

14) Unless otherwise allowed, do not open the housing of the instrument, which may expose
internal circuits and devices of the instrument and cause unnecessary damage.

15) If the instrument needs to be fixed at the test site, a qualified electrician is required to install
the protective earth wire between the test site and the instrument first.

16) Take appropriate overload protections to prevent overload voltage (caused by lightning, for
instance) from damaging the instrument or causing personal injury.

17) When opening the housing of the instrument, do not place objects not belonging to the interior
of the instrument, otherwise, short circuit, damage to the instrument and even personal injury
may be caused.

18) Unless otherwise stated, the instrument has not received any waterproof treatment, so keep
the instrument from contacting with liquid to prevent damage to the instrument or even
personal injury.

19) Do not place the instrument in an environment where fog is easily formed, for example,
moving the instrument in an environment where cold and heat are in alternation, where water
droplets formed on the instrument may cause electric shock and other hazards.

2.2.4 Operation Precautions

1) Instrument operators need to have certain professional and technical knowledge, good

psychological quality, and certain emergency response capabilities.

2) Before moving or transporting the instrument, please refer to the relevant instructions in "2.2.7
Transportation‖ of this section.

3) The inevitable use of substances (e.g. nickel) in the production process of the instrument may
cause allergy to personnel. If an operator of the instrument has allergic symptoms (e.g. rash,
frequent sneezing, ophthalmia or dyspnea) during the operations, please seek medical care in
time to find out the reason and solve the symptoms.

4) Please refer to the relevant instructions in "2.2.8 Waste Disposal/Environmental Protection‖ of

this section before disassembling this instrument for disposal.

5) RF instruments will generate high electromagnetic radiation, during which period, pregnant
women and operators with cardiac pacemakers need special protection. If the radiation level
is high, corresponding measures may be taken to remove the radiation sources to prevent
personal injury.

6) In case of fire, the damaged instrument will release toxic substances. Therefore, the
operators should wear appropriate protective equipment (e.g. protective masks and exposure
suits) for safety.

7) Laser products shall have different warning signs according to the laser category, because
the radiation characteristics of laser and such equipment have high-intensity electromagnetic
power characteristics, which will cause harm to human body. If the product is integrated with
other laser products (e.g. CD/DVD driver), it will not provide other functions except the
10 / 248
 4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Overview
settings and functions described in the product manual in order to prevent the injury of the
laser beam to the human body.

8) Electromagnetic compatibility level (in accordance with EN 55011/CISPR 11, EN

55022/CISPR 22 and EN 55032/CISPR 32 standards)

Class A equipment:

The equipment can be used except in residential areas and low-voltage power supply
environment.

Note: Class A equipment is suitable for industrial operation environment, because it produces
wireless communication disturbance in residential areas. Therefore, operators need to take
relevant measures to reduce the impact of such disturbance.

Class B equipment:

Equipment need suitable for residential areas and low-voltage power supply environment.

2.2.5 Maintenance
1) Only authorized and specially trained operators are allowed to open the casing of the
instrument. Before such operations, it is required to disconnect the power cord to prevent
damage to the instrument or even personal injury.

2) The repair, replacement and maintenance of the instrument should be performed by

dedicated electronic engineers of the manufacturer, and the parts subject to replacement and
maintenance should receive safety tests to ensure safe use of the product in the future.

2.2.6 Batteries or Power Modules

Before using batteries and power modules, carefully read the relevant information to avoid
explosion, fire and even personal injury. In some cases, disused alkaline batteries (e.g. lithium
batteries) shall be disposed of in accordance with EN 62133 standard. Precautions for use of
batteries include the following:

1) Do not damage the battery.

2) Do not expose batteries and power modules to heat sources such as open fire; avoid direct
sunlight and keep them clean and dry; clean the connection port of the battery or power
module with a clean and dry soft cotton cloth.

3) Do not short circuit the battery or power module. Do not store multiple batteries or power
modules in cartons or drawers because the batteries are likely to cause short circuit due to
being in contact with each other or other conductors; do not remove the original outer
packaging of the battery and power module before use.

4) Batteries and power modules must not be subjected to mechanical impact.

5) If the battery fluid leaks, please do not touch the skin and eyes, otherwise wash it with a large
amount of water and get medical treatment in time.

11 / 248
4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Overview
6) Please use the manufacturer's original batteries and power modules. Any incorrect
replacement and charging of alkaline batteries (such as lithium batteries) is likely to cause an
explosion.

7) Discarded batteries and power modules shall be recycled and disposed of separately from
other wastes. Due to the toxic substances inside the battery, they shall be properly discarded
or recycled according to local regulations.

2.2.7 Transportation
1) If the instrument is heavy, please handle it with care. If necessary, use tools (a crane, for
instance) to move the instrument so as to prevent damaging the body.

2) The handle of the instrument is suitable for personal handling of the instrument and cannot be
fixed on the transportation equipment when during the transportation of the instrument. In
order to prevent property loss and personal injury, please follow the manufacturer's safety
regulations on the transportation of the instrument.

3) When operating the instrument on the vehicle, the driver should drive carefully to ensure
transportation safety, and the manufacturer is not responsible for any emergencies during the
transportation. Therefore, please do not use this instrument during the transportation, and
reinforcement and preventive measures should be taken to ensure the transportation safety of
the product.

2.2.8 Waste Disposal/Environmental Protection

1) Do not dispose of devices marked with batteries or accumulators together with unclassified
waste; Instead, such devices should be collected separately and disposed of in a suitable
collection location or through the customer service center of the manufacturer.

2) Do not dispose of waste electronic devices together with unclassified waste; Instead, such
devices should be collected separately. The manufacturer has the right and responsibility to
help end users dispose of waste products. If necessary, please contact the customer service
center of the manufacturer for corresponding disposal so as not to damage the environment.

3) During mechanical or thermal processing of the product or its internal components, toxic
substances (dust of heavy metals, such as lead, beryllium, and nickel, etc.) may be released.
Therefore, specially trained technicians with relevant experience are required to disassemble
the product to avoid personal injury.

4) During the reprocessing, please refer to the safety operation rules recommended by the
manufacturer to dispose of toxic substances or fuel released from the product with specific
methods to avoid causing personal injury.

12 / 248
 4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Operation Guide
3 Operation Guide
This chapter introduces the pre-operation precautions, front/back panel browsing, basic
measurement methods, and data file management of the 4957B RF analyzer. so that users can
have a preliminary understanding of the instrument itself and its measurement processes. This
section contains some contents consistent with the relevant sections in Quick Start.
 Get prepared ……………………………………………………………………………… 13
 Front panel and interface description……………………………………………………31

3.1 Get Prepared

Necessary preparatory work shall be carried out before the 4957B RF analyzer is ready for use.
 Preparations before operation………………………………………………………………13
 System configuration…………………………………………………………………………24
 Routine maintenance …………………………………………………………29

3.1.1 Preparations before Operation

This section introduces the precautions before first setting and use of the 4957B RF analyzer.

! Warning
Avoid damaging the instrument
Pay attention to the follow to avoid electric shock, fire and personal injury:
Do not open the cabinet arbitrarily.
Do not try to disassemble or refit any part of the instrument not mentioned in the manual.
Otherwise, such consequences as reduced electromagnetic shielding property and internal
component damage can occur, affecting product reliability. In this case, we will not provide any
free maintenance any more even if the product is still in the warranty period.
Please carefully read the relevant contents in "2.2 Safe Operation Guide" of this manual and the
safety precautions therein for operation. Also please pay attention to the requirements for specific
operating environment mentioned in the data page.

Notice
Pay attention to the following when operating the instrument:
Improper operating or measuring position can damage the instrument or the one connected to it.
Pay attention to the following before powering on the instrument:
In order to ensure that the fan blades and heat radiation holes are unobstructed, the instrument
shall be at least 10cm away from the wall, and ensure that all fan vents are unobstructed.
Keep the instrument dry;
Keep the instrument level, and arrange it properly;
Make sure the environment temperature meets with the requirement noted in the data page;
Make sure the port input signal amplitude is within the range specified;
Make sure the signal output port is connected properly, without any overload.
13 / 248
4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Operation Guide

Notice

Electrostatic protection
Take electrostatic protection measures at workplaces to avoid any damage caused by the
instrument. For details, please refer to the relevant contents in "2.2 Safe Operation Guide" of the
manual.

Tips
Effect of electromagnetic interference (EMI)
Since EMI can affect the measurement result, pay attention to the following:
Select appropriate shield cables. For example, to use the double-shielded RF/network connection
cable;
Please close any cable connection port that is enabled but temporarily unused or connect a
matching load to the connection port in time;

Please refer to the EMC level labels in the Data Page.

 Unpacking………………………………………………………………………………………14
 Environmental requirements…………………………………………………………………15
 Turning on/off the power…………………………………………………………………16
 Proper operation of connectors ……………………………………………………… 20
 User inspection…………………………………………………………………………………23

3.1.1.1 Unpacking

1) Visual examination

Step 1. Check whether the outer package and the shockproof packing of the instrument are
damaged. If there is any damage, keep the outer package for standby, and proceed the
inspection as per the steps below.
Step 2. Unpack the instrument and check the instrument and enclosed items for any damage;
Step 3. Carefully check whether the above items for any mistakes according to Table 3.1;
Step 4. In case of any outer package damage, or damage or problem to the instrument or articles
provide in the package, never power the instrument on or start it up! Please contact our
service consultation center according to the service hotline provided on the cover, and
we will repair or change it as soon as possible accordingly.

Notice
Handling: As the instrument is a valuable item, it shall be handled with care during handling.

14 / 248
 4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Operation Guide
2) Model confirmation

Table 3.1 Packing List of 4957B

Name Quantity Function

Mainframe:
4957B
Standard Configuration:
3-core power cord
Power Adapter
CD-ROM (User's Manual)
Quick Start Guide
USB cable
Built-in rechargeable li-ion
battery
Packing list
Product Certificate of
Conformity
Options:
USB Power Meter 1 Power measurement via external USB power
probe

3.1.1.2 Environmental Requirements

In order to ensure the service life of 4957B and the validity and accuracy of measurement, please
carry out the tests under the following environmental conditions:

1) Operating environment

The operating environment should meet the following requirements:

Table 3.2 Operating Environment Requirements of 4957B

Temperature -10°C ~ 50°C, 0°C ~ 45°C (battery powered)

Temperature range 23°C ±5°C (allowable temperature deviation during error
during error adjustment < 1 °C)
adjustment
Humidity Hygrometer measurement range at <+29°C: 20% ~ 80%
(non-condensed)
Elevation 0 ~ 4600 meters (0 ~ 15091 feet)
Vibration Max. 0.21 G, 5 Hz ~ 500 Hz

The
Notice
Above environmental requirements are only applicable to the operating environment factors of the
instrument, and are not with the scope of technical indicators.

15 / 248
4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Operation Guide

! Warning
Since the storage temperature range of the battery equipped with the instrument is -20℃～60℃,
the instrument should not work continuously for a long time when it is equipped with the battery at
high temperature, so as to avoid danger caused by too high internal temperature. It is
recommended to use an adapter for power supply.

2) Heat dissipation requirements

In order to ensure that the working environment temperature of the instrument is within the
temperature range required by the operating environment, the following heat dissipation space
requirements of the instrument shall be met:
Table 3.3 4957B Heat Dissipation Requirements

Instrument part Heat dissipation distance

Back ≥180mm
Left and right sides ≥60mm

3) Electrostatic protection

Static electricity is extremely destructive to electronic components and equipment. Usually we take
two anti-static measures: conductive table mat and wrist strap; conductive floor mat and ankle
strap. Using the above two anti-static measurements at the same time can provide good antistatic
protection. If using one of them, only the former can provide antistatic protection. 1MΩ earth
isolation resistor must be provided for the antistatic components at least for ensuring user safety.
Correctly take the following antistatic measures to techniques to reduce electrostatic damages:
Ensure all instruments are grounded properly, so as to avoid any static electricity;
Let the internal/external conductor of the cable contact the ground shortly before connecting the
coaxial cable with the instrument;
Operators must wear anti-static wrist straps or take other antistatic measures before touching the
joints, core or conducting any assembly.

! Warning
Voltage range
The above-mentioned anti-static measures cannot be applied when the voltage exceeds 500V.

3.1.1.3 Turning On/Off the power

1) Precautions before turning on the power

Pay attention to the following when turning on the power of the instrument:
a) Confirming power supply parameters
The 4957B RF analyzer is provided with the three-core power cord meeting the international

16 / 248
 4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Operation Guide
safety standard. During use, connector the instrument to a suitable power outlet with protective
earthing, so as to connect the housing of the instrument to the ground via the power cord. It is
recommended to use the power cord provided together with the instrument, and replace it with the
same type of 250V/10A power cord if required. 4957B can be powered in three ways:

AC power supply supplies power with an adapter

When adopting AC power supply, the enclosed AC-DC adapter must be used. The input to the
adapter is 220V/50Hz AC.
To avoid overheating, please do not connect the AC-DC adapter to the analyzer when transporting
or carrying it with a backpack. The voltage input range of the AC-DC adapter is wide. Please
ensure that the power supply voltage is within the range required in Table 3.4.
Table 3.4 shows the external power supply requirement for normal operation of the signal
generator.
Table 3.4 Working power parameter requirements of 1443

Power supply
Applications
parameter
Voltage,
frequency 220V±10%，50 ~ 60Hz 110V±10%，50 ~ 60Hz

Rated output
current >1.7A >1.7A

Basic All
Power Basic All
configuratio configurati
consumption configurations configurations
ns ons
(startup)
＜30W ＜50W ＜30W ＜50W
Power
consumption ＜20W ＜20W
(standby)

Tips
Prevent mutual interference of power supplies
To prevent mutual interference among multiple devices through power supplies, especially spike
interference caused by high-power devices which may cause damage to instrument hardware, it is
recommended to use a 220V or 110V AC stabilized power supply when using AC power supply to
supply power with an adapter.

DC power supply

Voltage: 15V

Current: 3A (min.)

Built-in battery power supply

4957B can be powered by rechargeable li-ion batteries. If the battery is left unused for a long time,
it will be discharged by itself, so it must be charged before being used again. See Section III for
details of battery usage. The basic parameters of the enclosed battery are as follows:
17 / 248
4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Operation Guide
Nominal voltage: 10.8V

Nominal capacity: 7800mAh

Notice

Rechargeable batteries should not be exposed to fire and high temperature (higher than 70℃),
thrown into fresh water or salt water or wetted, and should be kept away from children.

Rechargeable batteries can be reused and should be placed in suitable containers to avoid
short-circuit. Heavy metals such as nickel and chromium in batteries will pollute the natural
environment. Waste batteries should not be discarded casually, but should be put into a special
battery recovery bins.
b) Confirming and connecting the power cord

The 4957B RF analyzer adopts three-core power cord interfaces, which conform to national safety
standards. Before turning on the power of the RF analyzer, it is necessary to confirm reliable
grounding of the ground wire in the RF analyzer, either floating ground or poor grounding may
cause damage to the instrument and even cause injury to operators. Using a power cord without
protective grounding is strictly prohibited. When the instrument is connected to a suitable power
outlet, the power cord connects the housing of the instrument to the ground. The rated voltage
value of the power cord should be greater than or
equal to 250V, and the rated current should be greater than or equal to 1.7A.
When connecting the instrument to the power supply:
Step 1. Confirm that the working power cord is not damaged;
Step 2. Connect the power plug of the rear panel of the instrument to a well-grounded three-core
power socket with the power cord.

! Warning
Grounding
Poor or wrong grounding may cause damage of the instrument or personal injury. Before turning
on the power of the spectrum analyzer, make sure that the ground wire is in good contact with the
ground wire of the power supply.
Please use a power outlet with grounding protection. Do not use any external cable, power line or
autotransformer without any protective grounding as the protective grounding line. If an
auto-transformer is necessary, it is required to connect the common terminal to the protective
grounding of the power connector.

c) Battery installation and replacement

The 4957B RF analyzer is provided with a high-capacity rechargeable lithium battery, with a
cruising power of about 3h. Users can buy backup batteries for long-time out-field test, so as to
avoid any test interruption due to insufficient battery capacity. It is recommended to buy a battery
of the same model as the enclosed battery.

18 / 248
 4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Operation Guide

Notice
In order to ensure the battery life, the battery should be taken out of the battery compartment
during transportation and long-term storage. Try not to make the battery power reduce to less than
5%, otherwise the battery may not be recharged.

Battery installation and replacement

The battery installation steps are as follows:
Open the battery cover, put the battery into the battery cartridge, push the battery in, and close the
battery cover.
Checking the battery status
The 4957B RF analyzer is provided with a battery, and its full battery power can achieve a standby
time of about 2.5h.
Users can view the battery status in any of the following ways:
The first way is to check the battery icon on the system status bar and roughly check the battery
power. When the battery icon shows 15% battery power, please change the battery or charge it in
time;
The second way is to remove the battery and press the button at the white point at the end of the
battery, and the indicator lights above the button will go on to indicate the current remaining
battery power. When only one indicator light is on, please charge the battery in time.
Charging the battery

Notice The power indicator light is located inside the yellow power on button.

The battery can be charged when the 4957B RF analyzer is turned off or working. The charging
steps are as follows:
Step 1. First install the battery to be charged in the machine.
Step 2. Use the AC-DC adapter provided alongside to turn on the external power supply.
Step 3. In case of charging in the power-off state, the power indicator light in the lower left corner
of the front panel of the machine is yellow and flashing, indicating that the battery is
being charged, and the indicator light is normally yellow after charging. In case of
charging in the power-on state, the power indicator is green and flashing, indicating that
the battery is being charged, and the indicator light is normally green after charging. At
this time, the battery icon on the right side of the system status bar of the instrument
display screen will show fully charged state.
In addition, for batteries with a battery power of more than 5%, the charging time in the power-off
state is about 4h.

2) Power-on for the first time

Precautions for turning on/off the power of the instrument are as follows:
a) Connecting the power supply

Please confirm the power supply parameters and the power cord before power-on for the first time.
For details, please refer to the Section ―3.1.1.3 Turning on/off the power‖ in the user‘s manual.
Step 1. Connecting the power cord: Connect the AC-DC adapter with the power cord matched
with the RF analyzer in the packing box or the three-core power cord meeting the
requirements, connect the adapter with the external power interface of the RF analyzer
(as shown in Figure 3.1), and connect the other end of the power cord with the AC power

19 / 248
4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Operation Guide
supply meeting the requirements; observe that the power indicator light on the front panel
turns yellow (as shown in Figure 3.2).
Step 2. Turn on the power switch of the front panel: As shown in Figure 3.2, do not connect
any equipment to the RF analyzer. If everything is normal, the instrument can be turned
on, and then the power indicator light on the front panel will turn green.

b) Turning on/off the power

Gently press the yellow power switch key 【 】 on the front panel for more than 3s, observe that
the front panel power indicator light turns green, and the display backlight goes on. You need to
wait for about 30s for the display startup until the startup status interface is displayed. After
warming-up for 10min, there shall be no alarm indication in the display interface. Press the yellow
power switch key 【 】 at the lower left corner of the front panel of the 4957B RF analyzer for
about 3s, and the RF analyzer will exit the measurement application program automatically and
power off.

Note: If the LED "flashes", it indicates that the internal battery is not fully charged and is being
charged.
c) Disconnecting the power supply

In case of emergency, in order to avoid personal injury, the RF analyzer shall be powered off
immediately. At this time, you need to unplug the power cord and remove the battery. Therefore,
reserve sufficient operating space when operating the instrument to facilitate direct shutdown and
battery removal when necessary.

3.1.1.4 Proper operation of Connectors

Connectors are often used in various tests of signal generators. Although the connectors of
calibration pieces, test cables and analyzer measuring ports are designed and manufactured
according to the highest standards, the service life of all these connectors is still limited. Due to the
inevitable wear and tear during normal use, the performance indicators of the connectors will
decrease or even be unable to meet the measurement requirements. Therefore, correct
maintenance and measurement connection of the connectors can not only ensure accurate and
repeatable measurement results, but also prolong the service life of the connectors and reduce the
measurement costs. In actual use, the following aspects should be paid attention to:

1) Connector check

When conducting connector inspection, anti-static wrist band should be worn. It is recommended
to use a magnifier to check the following items:
a) Whether the electroplated surface is worn or not and whether there are deep scratches;
b) Whether the thread is deformed;
c) Whether there are metal particles on the threads and the joint plane of the connector;
d) Whether the inner conductor is bent or broken;
e) Whether the screw sleeve of the connector rotates improperly.

20 / 248
 4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Operation Guide

! Caution
Check the connector to prevent damaging ports of the instrument
Any damaged connector may damage the good connector connected to it even when measuring
the connection for the first time. In order to protect each interface of the signal generator itself, the
connector must be checked before connector operation.

2) Connection method

Before the connection, the connectors should be inspected and cleaned to ensure cleanness and
intactness. Anti-static wrist straps should be worn before connection. The correct connection
method and steps are as follows:
Step1. As shown in Figure 3.4, align the axes of the two interconnecting devices to ensure that the
pin of the male connector slides concentrically into the socket of the female connector.

Figure 3.4 Axes of interconnected devices are in a straight line

Step2. As shown in Figure 3.5, move the two connectors leveled together so that they can be
smoothly engaged. Rotate the screw sleeve of the connector (note, not the rotating
connector itself) until it is tightened, and there can be no relative rotational movement
between the connectors during the connection.

Figure 3.5 Connection method

Step3. As shown in Figure 3.6, tighten the connectors with a torque wrench to complete the
connection. Pay attention that the torque wrench should not exceed the initial folding
point. Use an auxiliary wrench to prevent the connector from rotating.

Keep Still

Figure 3.6 Finishing the connection with a torque wrench

21 / 248
4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Operation Guide
3) Disconnection method

Step1. Support the connectors to prevent any connector from being twisted, shaken or bent;
Step2. An open-ended wrench can be used to prevent the connector body from rotating;
Step3. Loosen the screw sleeve of the connector with another wrench;
Step4. Rotate the screw sleeve of the connector by hand to complete the disconnection;
Step5. Pull the two connectors levelly apart.

4) Usage of a torque wrench

The use of a torque wrench is shown in Figure 3.7. The following points should be paid
attention to when using it:
a) Confirm that the torque of the torque wrench is correct set before use;
b) Ensure that the angle between the torque wrench and another wrench (used to support a
connector or a cable) is within 90o before applying force;
c) Grasp the end of the torque wrench handle gently, and apply force in the direction
perpendicular to the handle until reaching the folding point of the wrench.

Torque
direction

Stop applying force when the

Figure
handle is bent 3.7. Usage of a torque wrench

5) Use and storage of connectors

a) The connectors should be covered by protective sleeves when not in use;

b) Do not mix various connectors, air lines and standard calibration pieces in a box because this
is one of the most common causes of connector damage.
c) Keep the connectors and the analyzer at the same temperature. Holding a connector by hand
or cleaning a connector with compressed air will significantly change its temperature. The
connectors should be calibrated after its temperature is stable.
d) Do not touch the joint plane of the connectors because the grease and dust particles on the
skin are difficult to be removed from the joint plane;
e) Do not put the contact surface of a connector downward on a hard table surface. Contact with
any hard surface may damage the electroplated layer and the joint surface of the connector.
f) Always wear anti-static wrist straps and work on a grounded conductive workbench pad,
which can protect the analyzer and the connectors from electrostatic discharge.

6) Connector cleaning

When cleaning the connectors, always wear antistatic wrist straps and observe the following
steps:
a) Remove loose particles on the thread and joint plane of the connectors with clean
low-pressure air, and thoroughly inspect the connectors. If further cleaning treatment is
required, proceed as follows:
b) Soak (but not thoroughly soak) a lint-free cotton swab with isopropyl alcohol;
22 / 248
 4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Operation Guide
c) Remove the dirt and debris from the joint plane and threads of the connectors with cotton
swabs. When cleaning the inner surface of a connector, be careful not to apply external force
to the central inner conductor and not to leave the fibers of cotton swabs on the central
conductor of the connector.
d) Let the alcohol volatilize, then blow the surface clean with compressed air;
e) Check the connector to make sure that it is free of particles and residues;
f) If any defects of the connector is still obvious after cleaning, it indicates that the connector
may have been damaged and should not be used again. Make clear the cause of the
connector damage before connection.

7) Use of adapters

When the measuring port of the RF analyzer and the connector type used are different, adapters
must be used for the connection before measurement. In addition, even if the measuring port of
the analyzer and the connector type of port of the tested piece are the same, it is also advisable to
use adapters. Both cases can protect the measuring port, prolong its service life and reduce the
maintenance cost. Before connecting an adapter to the measuring port of an analyzer, it is
required to carefully check and clean the adapter. And a high-quality adapter should be used to
reduce the influence of mismatching on measurement accuracy.

8) Joint plane of connectors

An important concept in microwave measurement is reference plane. And an analyzer, it is the

benchmark reference plane for all measurements. During the calibration, the reference plane is
defined as the plane where the measuring port and the calibration standard are engaged. Good
connection and calibration depend on thorough and level contact between the connectors on the
joint plane.

Figure 3.8 Plane calibration

3.1.1.5 User Inspection

After the 4957B RF analyzer is powered on for the first time, it is necessary to check whether the
instrument works normally to ensure subsequent measuring operations.

Tip
Description of front panel hard keys and soft keys on menus
The description form of the front panel hard keys and menu soft keys is as follows:

23 / 248
4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Operation Guide
1) Description form of hard keys: 【XXX】, XXX is the name of the hard key;
2) Description form of soft keys: [XXX], XXX is the name of the soft key.
If the key corresponds to multiple states, an state with the font color of the selected value changed
and the background color darkened is valid. For example: [Sweep Time Man Auto] indicates that
the sweep time manual option is enabled.

Connect the 4957B RF analyzer to the power supply or power it with a battery, and observe that
the power indicator light on the front panel is yellow, indicating that the standby power supply is
working normally. Gently press the yellow power switch key 【 】 on the front panel for more than
3s, observe that the front panel power indicator light turns green, and the display backlight goes on.
You need to wait for about 30s for the display startup until the startup status interface is displayed.
After warming-up for 10min, there shall be no alarm indication in the display interface.
The 4957B instrument is provided with a self test function, which can test the working status and
internal environment temperature of each component in the RF analyzer and provide test
information after the self test program is activated.
Follow the step below to conduct the self test:
a) Press [System]→[Self Test] to enable the self test program. The test result window will pop up
after the self test;
b) Click 【OK】to close the self test result window.

3.1.2 System configuration

This chapter introduces the 4957B RF analyzer, including version serial number, self test, sleep
mode, automatic shutdown, display mode and brightness, GPS function, system language, time
and date, network configuration, factory debugging and reference settings, as well as the menus
and menu description of the system settings.

3.1.2.1 Viewing version serial number

Each 4957B is provided with a unique and fixed serial number and internal software version
information, which is set by the manufacturer upon delivery, cannot be changed the user, and can
be viewed by the following steps:
a) Press [System]→[Version Information] to pop up the instrument serial number window,
display such version information as the product model, serial number, application program
and firmware program.
b) Click 【OK】to close the window.

3.1.2.2 Self Test

The 4957B instrument is provided with a self test function, which can test the working status and
internal environment temperature of each component in the RF analyzer and provide test
information after the self test program is activated.
Follow the step below to conduct the self test:
a) Press [System]→[Self Test] to enable the self test program. The test result window will pop up
after the self test;
b) Click 【OK】to close the self test result window.

24 / 248
 4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Operation Guide
3.1.2.3 Setting sleep mode

The 4957B RF analyzer is provided with the power saving mode (including the auto sleep mode
and auto shutdown mode), so as to prolong the operating time when the power is supplied via the
battery. If no operations are conducted in the sleep time set with the auto sleep mode enabled, the
RF analyzer will enter the sleep status, including such operations as closing the LED display and
cutting off internal module power supply. Press any key to let the RF analyzer exit from the sleep
mode and switch to the normal operation mode.
a) Press [System]→[Power Saver], which is disabled in the sleep mode.
b) Click [Sleep Off] to enable the sleep mode.
c) Enter the sleep time to be set via the number key, and press the time unit to confirm.

3.1.2.4 Setting auto shutdown

When the auto shutdown mode is on, the instrument starts to time it, and shuts down automatically
when the time set for auto shutdown is reached. The instrument will pop up a countdown prompt
10 s before entering the shutdown status and user cancel such shutdown process as per the
prompt. Press [System]→[Power Saver] to enter the setting menu, and the auto shutdown function
is disabled by default.
a) Press the softkey to switch to [Shut Down/Off], and enable the auto shutdown mode to show
current shutdown time.
b) Enter the shutdown time to be set via the number key, and press the time unit to confirm.

3.1.2.5 Display mode and brightness adjustment

The RF analyzer is provided with three screen display modes to facilitate user‘s test in different
conditions, namely, the outdoor, night and normal modes. Users can also adjust the screen
brightness from five manual brightness adjustment levels as required.
a) Press [System]→[Display] to enter the display mode and brightness adjustment menu.
b) Switch current display mode as per corresponding modes.
c) Press [Brightness Auto / Man] to switch to the brightness adjustment mode. If in the manual
mode, the brightness adjustment dialog box will pop up. Drag the scroll bar or use the rotary knob
or up/down key to set the brightness.

3.1.2.6 GPS function

The 4957B instrument is provided with the GPS function for viewing such information as the
receiver status, number of satellites in use, latitude and latitude hemispheres, longitude and
longitude hemispheres, altitude and UTC date/time.
a) Press 【System】→[Positioning System GPS] to open the GPS function menu.
b) Press [GPS Off/On] to switch the GPS status, and enable the GPS function.
c) Press [GPS Info] to view detailed GPS information.

3.1.2.7 System language selection

a) Press [System]→[Language] to enter the language selection interface of the system.

b) Press [Simplified Chinese] or [English] to set current interface operation language.

25 / 248
4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Operation Guide
3.1.2.8 Setting date and time

a) Press [System]→[Configuration]→[Date&Time] to pop up the date setting dialog box.

b) Click corresponding zone in the calendar area to set the date.
c) Click corresponding zone in the time area to enter numerical value for time setting.
d) Press 【OK】 to complete the setting and close the dialog box.

3.1.2.9 Network setting

It is used to set the RF analyzer network, with specific steps shown below:
a) Press [System]→[Configuration]→[Network Setting] to pop up the network configuration
dialog box.
b) Click corresponding zone to enter numerical value for setting.
c) Press 【OK】 to complete the setting and close the dialog box.

3.1.2.10 Factory debugging

The 4957B RF analyzer is provided with a program entry for factory debugging.
a) Press [System]→[Manage] to pop up the ―Enter Password‖ dialog box, and enter the factory
debugging menu after that.

Notice

This function can be used only for factory debugging, and users cannot try to crack the password.
Otherwise, the RF analyzer can be damaged.

3.1.2.11 Setting frequency reference

The 4957B RF analyzer is provided with both the internal frequency reference and external one.
The external reference frequency must be 10MHz±100Hz and amplitude of 0dBm (limit range:
-2dBm~+10dBm). The external reference frequency must be entered from the ―10MHz
input/output‖ port on the cover plate.
a) Press [System]→[Page Down] to set the frequency reference, which is the internal
frequency reference by default.
b) The 4957B RF analyzer can also output the internal reference as follows:
Press [Ref Output Off On] to enable or disable the reference output function.

3.1.2.12 Setting reference output

4957B can provide external device with a reference output of 10MHz via also the ―10MHz
input/output‖ port on the cover plate, with the steps shown below:
a) Press [System]→[Page Down] to set the frequency reference, the reference output function
disabled by default.
b) Press [Ref Output Off/On] again to enable or disable the reference output function.

26 / 248
 4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Operation Guide
3.1.2.13 System menu structure

定位系统 定位系统 系统 节电模式

GPS 显示
GPS 测量模式 > 频谱分析
关 开
默认模式
SBAS 详细信息 版本信息 干扰分析
户外模式
北斗 冷启动 自测试 解调分析
时间同步 夜视模式
QZSS 显示 > 信道扫描
关 开
高斯坐标
GLONASS 定位系统 > 场强测量>
关 开
亮度调节
> 语言 > 自动 手动 信号跟踪
定向分析
亮度设置 关 开
信号跟踪 定位系统
< 返回 配置 > 1 2 3 4 5 信号分析
关 开 GPS >

< 返回 翻页1/2 > < 返回

< 返回

语言 系统
配置 日期时间
频率参考
简体中文
内 外 日期时间 > 年
参考输出
English 节电模式
关 开 网络设置 > 月
自动休眠 风扇
< 返回
关 开 自动 开 关 日
< 返回
休眠时间
节电模式 >
5分钟 网络设置 时
自动关机
错误日志
关 开 上一项 分
关机时间
10分钟 下一项 秒
> 关于
IP设置 < 返回
信号跟踪
< 返回 翻页2/2 >
关 开 掩码设置

网关设置

< 返回

27 / 248
4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Operation Guide
3.1.2.14 System menu description

·[Measurement mode]: Press 【system】→[Measurement Mode]

to select such measurement modes as spectrum analysis, interference
analysis, analog demodulation analysis, interference analysis,
demodulation analysis, channel sweep, field strength measurement,
directional analysis and signal analysis.
系统 ·[Special Notes]: The measurement mode menu exists only in
spectrum analysis mode, but not in other modes.
测量模式 > ·[Version Information]: Press 【System】→[Version Information]
to view the system related information, including machine serial
number, application software version, image customization version and
版本信息 other related information.

·[Self-test]: Press 【System】→[Self Test] to check the operating

自测试 status of each component in the RF analyzer and the internal
environment temperature.

显示 > ·[Display]: Press 【System】→[Display] to set the display mode,

including [Default Mode], [Outdoor Mode], [Night Vision Mode] and
relevant settings of [Brightness Adjustment].
定位系统 ·[Positioning System]: Press 【System】→[Positioning System]
to pop up the soft menus related to the positioning system, including
[GPS Off On], [Details], [Cold Start], [Time Synchronization Off On],
语言 [Gaussian Coordinates Off On], [Positioning System], which are used
to select the positioning system and view the position details, as well
as start the resetting. Special Notes: The positioning system
配置 function is an optional function.

·[Language]: Press 【System】→[Language] to select the

翻页1/2 > language, including [Simplified Chinese] and [English].

·[Configuration]: Press 【System】→[Configuration] to pop up the

soft menus related to the system configuration. [Date&Time] is used for
date and time setting, and [Network Setting] is used for network setting
of the RF analyzer, including such soft menus as [Previous], [Next], [IP
Setting], [Mask Setting] and [Gateway Setting].

28 / 248
 4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Operation Guide
·[Freq Ref Int/Ext]: Press 【System】→[Frequency Reference
系统 Internal External] to select internal frequency reference or external
frequency reference as needed.
频率参考 ·[Ref Output Off/On]: Press 【System】→[Ref Output Off On] to
>
内 外 select whether to turn on the internal reference function as needed
参考输出 when the frequency reference is the internal reference.
>
内 外 • [Fan Auto On/Off]: Press 【System】→[Fan Auto On Off] to set
the fan status, which is automatic by default.
风扇
自动 开 关 ·[Power Saver]]: Press 【System】→[Power Saving Mode] to set
the options of automatic sleep and automatic shutdown.
节电模式 > ·[Error Log]: Press 【System】→[Error Log] to view the relevant
error messages.

错误日志 ·[About]: Press 【System】→[About] to see the software version

of the instrument, the Company's telephone number, E-mail, website
and other information.
关于
·[Manage]: Press【System】 →[Manage] to enter the administrator
password for the relevant management and setting of the system.
管理 ·[Special Notes]: The system management function can be
used only by the factory debugging personnel or technical
supporting personnel rather than users. Otherwise, the
翻页2/2 >
instrument can be damaged.

3.1.3 Routine Maintenance

This section introduces the routine maintenance of the 1443 series vector signal generators.

3.1.3.1 Cleaning

1) Cleaning instrument surface

Please follow the steps below when cleaning the surface of the instrument:
Step 1. Shut down the instrument and disconnect the power cord connected to it;
Step 2. Wipe the surface gently with dry or slightly wet soft cloth, and do not wipe the inside of
the instrument.
Step 3. Do not use chemical cleaners, such as alcohol, acetone or dilutable cleaners.

2) Cleaning the display

After a period of use, the LCD display needs to be cleaned. Please follow the steps below:
Step 1. Shut down the instrument and disconnect the power cord connected to it;
Step 2. Dip a piece of clean and soft cotton cloth into the cleaner and then gently wipe the display
panel;
Step 3. Dry the display with a piece of clean and soft cotton cloth;
Step 4. Connect the power cord only after the cleaner is completely dried.

29 / 248
4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Operation Guide
There is an antistatic coating on the surface of the display. Do not use cleaners containing fluoride,
acid and alkaline. Do not spray the cleaner directly onto the display panel, otherwise it may
penetrate into the instrument and damage the instrument.

3.1.3.2 Input/output port protection

The standard impedance of the RF port of the 4957B RF analyzer is 50Ω, so the test signal shall
be added or appropriate load impedance shall be connected in strict accordance with the port
requirements to prevent damages to the post circuit.

! Warning
There is a maximum allowable input level at the RF input end of the RF analyzer, and it is strictly
prohibited to inject a signal beyond the limit, otherwise it will cause damages to the instrument.

30 / 248
 4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Operation Guide
3.2 Front panel and interface description
This chapter introduces the front panel and interface description and functions of the 4957B RF
analyzer.

3.2.1 Front Panel

The front panel of the 4957B RF analyzer isFigure 3-5 as shown in Figure 3-5.

Figure 3-5 Front panels

In this manual, for primary menus, the keys on the front panel and the
buttons on the bottom of the touch screen are represented by 【XXX】,
Notice
with XXX being the key name, and the menu keys on the right are
represented by [XXX], with XXX being the menu name.

3.2.1.1 Display zone

The 4957B RF analyzer has an 8.4‖ color touch screen. The parameter setting of the instrument
and the display of a large amount of information can be realized at the touch of a finger, which
saves the cumbersome steps of setting the soft and hard key menus and greatly simplifies the
user's operation.
When the instrument performs different functions, the display zone has the following display
functions: Display multiple instrument windows, and display various settings and measurement
data information of the instrument in the window; display the working status information of the
instrument; display the current input data when such parameters as frequency are to be input;
display the current working time of the system; display the menu information corresponding to the
current effective operation of the instrument window; the specific introduction is as shown in Figure
3-6:

31 / 248
4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Operation Guide
Signal GPS Trace display Power
Title Time
Standard information area display

Menu display area

Left information
diaplay

Bottom function area

Bottom information
diaplay

Figure 3-6 Display Zone

The information display zone under the screen display zone of the 4957B RF analyzer displays
various settings for current measurement and instrument status, which can be divided into 5 zones
as per the position on the screen, namely, the top information display zone, measurement data
display zone, left information display zone, soft key menu display zone and bottom function button
zone.

1) Top information display zone

The top information display zone is on top of the screen to display such information as the system
date, time, current power supply type and battery power and GPS status of the RF analyzer from
left to right in sequence.
Setting and change of system date and time: Set through 【System】→[Date&Time].
Change of date format: Set through 【System】→[Date Format].
The signs of the power supply type and battery status indicator on the right of the top information
display zone vary with the situation that whether there is external power supply or the battery
power. Signs corresponding to various power supply statuses of the RF analyzer are shown
below:
a) If the RFanalyzer is not provided with a battery and adopts an external power supply, it shows

;
b) When the RF analyzer is provided with a fully charged battery and isn't connected with an

external power adapter, it shows .

c) When the battery is fully charged and the external power adapter is connected, it shows

. As the battery power decreases gradually due to use, the green zone of the
battery power display will gradually decrease;

32 / 248
 4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Operation Guide
d) When the analyzer is provided with a battery and is connected with an external power adapter,
when the battery power is less than 100%, the battery is in the charging state, and the

charging icon is ;
e) When the RF analyzer is not connected to an external power supply and the battery power is

less than 20%, the battery is in the undervoltage state and it shows .
When such an icon appears, please charge the battery in time. When the battery power is less
than 10%, the RF analyzer can run for another 10min. Please save the measurement results in
time because it will be shut down automatically after the power is used up.

2) Measurement data display zone

The measurement data display area can display the measurement data. The contents displayed
vary with the measurement mode. The trace is displayed in coordinate grid in the vector network
analysis and antenna test modes. Scale values and mark information are displayed in the left and
upper right of the grid respectively. Measurement parameters are displayed on top of the grid, and
the start/stop frequencies displayed at the bottom. The trace is displayed in coordinate grid in the
spectrum analysis mode. The left side of the grid displays the scale values, the top shows the
signal standard and marker information, and the bottom shows the center frequency and span
information.

3) Left information display zone

This information area is located at the upper left of the screen. In the vector network analysis
mode, it displays such information as start frequency, stop frequency, sweep time, sweep points
and intermediate frequency bandwidth of the current measurement; in the spectrum analysis
mode, it displays such information as reference level, attenuator setting, display scale, resolution
bandwidth, video bandwidth and sweep time of the current measurement, each of which can be
set through the corresponding function key; in the antenna feeder test mode, it displays such
information as start frequency, stop frequency, sweep time, sweep points, intermediate frequency
bandwidth of the current measurement; in the vector voltage measurement mode, it displays such
information as current measurement type (reflection by default), measurement port (port 1 by
default) and measurement format (dB by default); in the USB power measurement mode, it
displays such information as zeroing, frequency, offset and relative measurement. You can quickly
set the corresponding parameters by clicking these buttons on the touch screen. The contents
displayed vary with the measurement mode.

4) Soft key menu display zone

In order to improve the operation flexibility of the 4957B RF analyzer and give full play to the
advantages of the touch screen, the 4957B resident software is provided with eight gray touch
keys on the right side, and the corresponding functions of these eight keys are directly displayed in
the corresponding key zones.

5) Bottom function button zone

The function hardkeys on the main menu zone and the front panel are at the same level. For
specific measurement mode, the main menu generally consists of a set of unique menu keys for
supplementing the function hardkeys. It can display different menu names in different
measurement modes to facilitate users to carry out the measurement.

3.2.1.2 Numeric input zone

The numeric input zone includes direction keys, knob, numeric keys, backspace key, cancel key
and OK key. All inputs can be changed through keys and the knob in the input zone. The keys in
33 / 248
4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Operation Guide
the input zone are described in detail below.
a) Direction keys: The up/down key is used to increase or decrease the value, where there are no
left and right keys, and the step value of the up/down key corresponds to the step of each
parameter.
b) Knob: It is used to increase or decrease the value. Turn the knob clockwise to increase the
variable and vice versa. The knob can change the value together with the up/down key, and the
step of the knob is the same as that of the up/down key.
c) Numeric keys: They are used to enter numbers (including the negative sign).
d) Backspace key: It can undo the last input data bit by bit according to the numeric input status.
e) Cancel key: It cancels the currently input data that is not valid.
f) OK key: It confirms the current parameter setting.

3.2.1.3 Function key zone

The function key zone is located at the bottom of the screen, and is used to change the
measurement parameter setting, including six keys:

a) 【Freq】: Set the center frequency, start/stop frequency, span and frequency step for
measurement in the vector network analysis mode and spectrum analysis mode;
b) 【Amplitude】: Set such parameters as the auto scale, reference level, reference position,
scale and output power in the vector network analysis mode. Set the reference level,
attenuator setting, scale display, unit and preamplifier control in the spectrum analysis mode;
c) 【BW】: Set such parameters as the average, smooth and intermediate frequency bandwidth
in the vector network analysis mode. Set such parameters as measurement RBW, VBW,
detector type and average in the spectrum analysis mode;
d) 【Mkr】: Set the specific parameters of the measurement marker in the vector network
analysis mode and spectrum analysis mode;

e) 【Measure】: Select the required S-parameter measurement mode, data format and time
domain in the vector network analysis mode. In the Spectrum Analysis mode, it is used to
select different measurement functions, including field strength measurement, channel
power, OBW, AM/FM DM, ACPR, etc. or set signal source power output.
f) 【Mode】: Set the working mode, including spectrum analysis, vector network analysis, cable
and antenna feeder test, USB power measurement, vector voltmeter, etc.

3.2.1.4 Reset key

Press the 【Reset】 hard key system to perform the function of shutdown and power-on again.

3.2.1.5 Power switch

It is used for turning on and off the RF analyzer. If an external power adapter is used for power
supply, when the instrument is in the "standby" state, the yellow indicator near the power switch is
on; Press and hold the power switch for over 3 seconds, and the green indicator will be on,
indicating that the instrument is in the "working" state. In the working state, press and hold the
power switch for more than 3s to turn off the RF analyzer.

34 / 248
 4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Operation Guide
Note: If the LED "flashes", it indicates that the current battery is not fully charged and is being
charged.

3.2.2 Interface description

The peripheral interfaces of the 4957B are mainly located on the top panel, as shown in Figure 3-7,
which can be divided into three parts: power interface, test ports and digital interfaces.
SA input USB VNA port Trigger GPS VNA port

Mini USB 10MHz Reference

Headphone
LAN input/output
Power supply
SD card

Figure 3-7 Interface Description

3.2.2.1 Power Interface

The power supply interface of the instrument can supply power to the RF analyzer through DC
output of a AC-DC adapter or external DC power supply. The inner conductor of the external
power interface is positive, and the outer conductor is grounded.

3.2.2.2 Test Ports

a) Spectrum input port: It is marked as ―SA RF In‖ and used for the input of the measured signal
in the spectrum analysis mode. The test signal input port of the 4957B RF analyzer is a 50Ω and
N-type female port.
b) Network test port: The two test ports in the vector network analysis mode are two 50Ω and
N-type female ports, which are marked with ―Port 1‖ and ―Port 2‖ respectively, and can be switched
between the RF source and receiver, so as to measure the DUT in both directions.
c) 10MHz input/output port: It is marked as "10MHz In/Out", 50Ω impedance, BNC female
adapter, and can be externally connected with the 10MHz signal of other equipment as the
reference signal of the analyzer; the internal 10MHz reference signal of the RF analyzer can also
be output for use by the external equipment.
d) Trigger input port: It is marked as "Trig In", and the 4957B can be set to the external trigger
mode. The external trigger source is connected with the trigger input port of the RF analyzer, and
the output range of the source shall be-5V~+5V. It can be set by the software whether to adopt the
rising edge trigger or falling edge trigger.
e) GPS antenna interface: It is marked as ―GPS antenna‖ and connected with the GPS antenna
equipment, and can locate the current position of the RF analyzer.

！ Warning
0402
In order to better protect the RF analyzer, the test port of the instrument is provided
with some symbols. When using the RFanalyzer, users must pay attention to the
symbols, so as to avoid permanent damages to the instrument.

35 / 248
4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Operation Guide
3.2.2.3 Digital interfaces

a) Mini USB interface: It is connected with the external PC, which carries out the program control
of or data transmission to the 4957B through the program control instruction or program control
function library.

Install a device driver first before connecting the RF analyzer to the

Notice
PC via the USB for the first time.
b) USB A interface: It is connected with the USB peripherals, e.g. USB storage device, USB
power probe, etc.
c) LAN (network) interface: It is a 10/100Mbps network interface and can be connected through
the network cable with the computer (PC), which carries out the program control of or data
transmission to the 4957B through the program control instruction or program control function
library.
d) SD card slot: Micro SD card slot, which can be used for expanding the storage space of the
instrument.
e) Earphone jack: It is a standard 3.5mm/3-line earphone port for outputting the sound
modulated via FM/AM/SSB. If the port is not connected to the earphone, the sound is output
via the speaker of the RF analyzer; when it is connected to the earphone, the sound output is
switched from the speaker to the earphone automatically.

3.2.2.4 Instrument Symbols

The instrument symbol (warning label) shown in the figure indicates the maximum input power
from the test port and the maximum input DC level. The maximum input power is +27dBm, and the
maximum input DC level is ±25VDC. When using the instrument, do not connect a signal
exceeding this range to the port, otherwise, the instrument may be burnt down!

4 Vector network analysis mode

4.1 Introduction to typical measurements

The vector network analysis mode (VNA) of the 4957B is the basic working mode of this product.
This mode can measure the S parameters of the DUT and display them in such formats as return
loss, standing wave ratio, polar coordinates and group delay, and it can also provide such
functions as time domain measurement and gating.
After startup, press 【Mode】 to pop up a mode selection dialog box, select [Vector Network
Analysis], and press [OK] to enter the vector network analysis mode after the progress bar is
completed.

36 / 248
 4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Vector network analysis mode

Figure 4-1 Main Interface of Vector Network Analysis Mode

All operations in this section are based on the premise of the selected
Notice vector network analysis mode, which will not be described separately
later.

4.1.1 Selection of measurement parameters

The vector network analysis mode of the 4957B RF analyzer mainly measures the S parameters
of the DUT, and you can press the 【Measure】 key to select the measurement parameters:
Press 【Measure】→[S11] or [S12] or [S21] or [S22] to select different S parameters for
measurement;
Press 【Measure】→[Format>] to select different measurement parameters via the soft menu:
[Log], to select the measurement parameter and display it in the log format;
[Linear], to select the measurement parameter and display it in the linear format;
[VSWR], to select the measurement parameter and display it in the VSWR format;
[Phase], to select the measurement parameter and display it in the phase format;
[Smith>], to select the measurement parameter and display it in the Smith circle diagram format;
[Polar], to select the measurement parameter and display it in the polar format;
[Group Delay], to select the measurement parameter and display it in the group delay format;
Press 【Measure】→[Transform] to enter the time domain transform setting menu, and press
relevant menu key to set relevant parameters.
Press 【Measure】→[Gating] to enter the gating function, and press relevant menu key to set
relevant parameters.
Press【Measure】→[Advance>] to select the measurement parameters from A1, B1, R1, A2, B2
and R2.

4.1.2 Calibration
After the measurement parameter and frequency setting, the 4957B RF analyzer must be subject
37 / 248
4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Vector network analysis mode
to calibration first before measurement, so as to eliminate the system errors of the RF analyzer,
and ensure the validity and correctness of the measurements. In case of any change in the
instrument measurement setting (such as the frequency range and sweep points) or port
extension cable added to the test port, recalibration is required.

Calibration is conducted for parameters rather than channels. When a

parameter is selected, the instrument will check the calibration data used
and use the data of such parameter. For example, when conducting B/R
transmission response calibration and S11 single-port calibration on A/R
at the same time, the instrument keeps on calibration and correction for
Notice the parameter displayed. Once a specific parameter or input is
calibrated, such parameter measurement will be calibrated at any
channel provided the incentive value is coupled. Parameter must be
selected first before response and isolation calibration. Parameters will
be selected automatically for other correction processes. In case of any
channel change during calibration, the process executed will be invalid.

4.1.2.1 Error calibration types

The calibration types can be divided into five categories, as shown in Table 4-1, in which the full 2
ports calibration can eliminate reflection tracking error, transmission tracking error, directional
error, source matching error and load matching error, ensure high-precision measurement and
effectively eliminate all 12 correctable system errors.

Notice Correction of all 12 system errors is not required in some measurements

Table 4-1 Error correction classification

Calibration Corresponding Error Standard

Type measurement piece
type
Transmission or Transmission via
reflection thorough method
Freq Resp. measurement Freq Resp. via reflection via
(with low accuracy the open or short
requirement). device
Measure the The transmission With the standard
transmission of frequency isolation piece
Response and the high insertion response and (load) added in
isolation loss device or isolation or addition to the
reflection of the reflection standard piece
high return loss directivity. used for response

38 / 248
 4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Vector network analysis mode
device. The correction
measurement
accuracy is lower
than that of the
single port or full 2
ports.
Reflection
measurement of Directivity, source
Open-circuit
any single-port matching and
S11 single port device, short
piece or frequency
device and load
well-connected response
dual-port piece.
Reflection
measurement of Directivity, source
Open-circuit
any single-port matching and
S22 single port device, short
piece or frequency
device and load
well-connected response
dual-port piece.
Directivity, source
Transmission or matching, load Open-circuit
reflection matching, device, short
measurement of isolation, device, load and
Full 2 Ports
dual-port piece frequency circuit-closer (two
with higher response, and loads adopted for
accuracy. forward and isolation)
reverse directions.

4.1.2.2 Standard calibration kit

Calibration kits are required in the calibration process. It is recommended to buy and use 20201 or
31101 series high-performance coaxial calibration kits developed by Ceyear Technologies Co.,
Ltd. The frequency range and port type of such series calibration kits are as shown in Table 4-2.
Table 4-2 Frequency range and port of such series calibration kits

Model Frequency range Port type

20201 DC～9GHz N-type 50Ω

31101 DC～18GHz N-type 50Ω

4.1.2.3 Frequency response error correction

The frequency response errors of reflection measurement and transmission measurement can be
eliminated by calibration:

39 / 248
4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Vector network analysis mode
1) Frequency response error correction of reflection measurement
a) Select the measurement type in the vector network analysis mode:
b) To measure reflection at port 1 (forward, S11), keep the default settings of the RF analyzer.
c) If reflection measurement is required at port 2 (reverse, S22), press [Measure] →[S22].
d) Set other measurement parameters: Start frequency, stop frequency, output power, sweep
points and intermediate frequency bandwidth.
e) Press [Cal] to open the calibration menu.
f) Press [Cal Kit] to select the correct calibration kit model through the soft menu, and press
[OK].
g) Press [M Cal>]→[Freq Resp>]→[OPEN S11>], and the system will automatically prompt
"Connect OPEN in P1, then press corresp. menu button to start!", then connect the open
circuit device to port 1.
h) After the trace is stable, press [OPEN] to prompt ―Calibrating standard piece measurement...‖
during standard piece measurement, and prompt ―Press [Done] to complete the
measurement!‖ after measurement and error factor calculation. And the software menu will be
underlined to indicate that the project has been tested, such as [OPEN].
i) Press [Done] to complete the error correction of reflection measurement, which allows for
connection and measurement of the DUT.
j) Similarly, repeat step e), select another frequency response error correction function, press
[M Cal>] → [Freq Resp.>] → [SHORT S11>] or [OPEN S22>] or [SHORT S22>], and connect
an open circuit or a short circuit device at the corresponding test port according to different
prompts to perform steps f）g）.

Only one calibration kit is allowed to be measured in case of

Notice calibration. If a wrong calibration kit is selected, return to【Cal】→[M
Cal]→[Freq Resp.] and select the correct standard piece.

For S22 response For S11 response

Open-circuit device Open-circuit device
or or

Short-circuit Short-circuit
device device

RF Analyzer

Figure 4-2 Calibration Kit Connection for Reflection Measurement Response

2) Response error correction of transmission measurement

a) Select the measurement type in the vector network analysis mode:
b) If transmission measurement is required in the positive direction (S21), press 【Measure】
→[S21].
c) If transmission measurement is required in the reverse direction (S12), press 【Measure】
→[S12].
k) Set other measurement parameters: Start frequency, stop frequency, output power, number

40 / 248
 4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Vector network analysis mode
of sweeping points or IF bandwidth.
d) Press [Cal] to open the calibration menu.
e) Select the frequency response error correction function, Press [M Cal>] → [Freq Resp>] →
[THRU S12>] or [THRU S21>], and the system will automatically prompt "Connect Thru cable
between P1 and P2, then press corresp. menu button to start!" Then connect N-type cable
between ports 1 and 2.

All adapters and cables to be used for device measurement shall be

Notice prepared, that is, to connect the standard device to the position for
measurement.
f) After the display trace is stable, press [THRU], the analyzer will display "Cal std measuring..."
during the measurement of the standard piece, and after completing the measurement and
calculating the error coefficient, the measured item will be underlined, e.g., [THRU], with the
soft key [Done] displayed.
g) Press [Done] to complete the transmission measurement error correction, and then connect
the DUT for relevant measurements.

Do not use open circuit device or short circuit device standard

Notice
pieces for transmission response correction.

Cable

Figure 4-3 Calibration Kit Connection for Transmission Measurement Response

3) Error correction of transmission measurement response and isolation

a) Select the measurement type in the vector network analysis mode:
b) If transmission measurement is required in the positive direction (S21), press 【Measure】
→[S21].
c) If transmission measurement is required in the reverse direction (S12), press 【Measure】
→[S12].
d) Set other measurement parameters: Start frequency, stop frequency, output power, number
of sweeping points or IF bandwidth.
e) Open the calibration menu and press [Cal].
f) Select the frequency response error correction function, press [M Cal>]→[Resp.& Iso S12]
or[Resp.& Iso S21] to pop up a prompt automatically ―Connect Thru cable between P1 and P2,
then press corresp. menu button to start!‖, then perform cable connection at the point where
you want to measure the DUT.

41 / 248
4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Vector network analysis mode
All adapters and cables to be used for device measurement shall be
Notice prepared, that is, to connect the standard device to the position for
measurement.

g) After the trace is stable, press [THRU] to prompt ―Calibrating standard piece measurement...‖
during standard piece measurement, and show underline (for example, [THRU]) indicating
item test completion after measurement and error factor calculation and prompt ―Connect the
load to P1 and P2, then press corresp. menu button to start!‖. ‖.
h) then connect the impedance matching load to port 1 and port 2 of the analyzer.
i) After the trace display is stable, press [ISO] to prompt ―Calibrating standard piece
measurement...‖ during standard piece measurement, and show underline (for example, [ISO])
indicating item test completion after measurement and error factor calculation and prompt
―Press [Done] to complete the measurement!‖. [Done] is displayed at the same time.
j) Press [Done], the system will calculate the isolation error coefficient, and the RF analyzer will
display the corrected data record line, indicating that the data of this channel is enabled.
k) In this way, you complete the response and isolation correction of the transmission
measurement, and then connect the DUT for relevant measurements.

For isolation
For response Load Load

THR

RF Analyzer RF Analyzer

Figure 4-4 Calibration Kit Connection for Transmission Measurement Response and Isolation

4.1.2.4 One port reflection error correction

a) Eliminate directional error during test component assembling

b) Eliminate source matching error during test component assembling
c) Eliminate frequency response during test component assembling
d) Carry out single-port correction to the S11 or S22 measurement of the RF analyzer.
a) Select the measurement type in the vector network analysis mode:
To measure reflection at port 1 (forward, S11), keep the default settings of the RF analyzer.To
measure reflection at port 2 (reverse, S22), press 【Meas】→[S22].
b) Set other measurement parameters: Start frequency, stop frequency, output power, number
of sweeping points or IF bandwidth.
c) Open the calibration menu, and press 【Calibrate】.
【Cal】→[Cal Kit], and press the corresponding soft key to select the correct calibration kit
model. Press [Back] to return to 【Cal】 menu bar, press [M Cal>] and select the type to be
corrected.
d) To measure reflection at port 1, press [S11 One Port].
e) To measure reflection at port 2 , press [S22 One Port].
f) At port 1, the system will prompt automatically ―Connect OPEN in P1,then press corresp.
42 / 248
 4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Vector network analysis mode
menu button to start!‖ At this time, connect the standard connector of the open-circuit device
to the port to be used as the test port (P1 for S11, and P2 for S22).

All adapters and cables to be used for device measurement shall be

Notice prepared, that is, to connect the standard device to the position for
measurement.

g) After the display trace is stable, to measure the standard piece, press [OPEN], the RF
analyzer will display "Cal std measuring..." during the measurement of the standard piece,
and after completing the measurement and calculating the error coefficient, it will display the
prompt "Connect SHORT in P1, then press corresp. menu button to start!" And the software
menu will be underlined to indicate that the project has been tested, such as [OPEN].
h) To test the standard piece after the trace is stable, press [Short-circuit Device] to show
―Measuring...‖ during standard piece measurement, and ―P1 short-circuit device
measurement is finished. Connect load at P1, and press ‗Load‘‖ after measurement and error
factor calculation. Connect LOAD in P1, press ‗LOAD‘‖, and the software menu will be
underlined to indicate that the project has been tested, such as [Short-circuit Device].
i) Disconnect the short-circuit device, and connect the load to the test port.
j) To test the standard piece after the trace is stable, press [SHORT] to show ―Calibrating
standard piece measurement...‖ during standard piece measurement, and ―Connect LOAD in
P1,, then press corresp. menu button to start!‖ after measurement and error factor calculation.
And the software menu will be underlined to indicate that the project has been tested, such as
[SHORT].
k) After the trace is stable, press [LOAD] to prompt ―Calibrating standard piece measurement...‖
during standard piece measurement, and prompt ―Press [Done] to complete the
measurement!‖ after measurement and error factor calculation. At this time, underline of the
menu indicates the item is tested completely, for example, [LOAD].
l) Record the error factor, and press [Done]to show the corrected data trace, indicating the
correction is activated.
m) That is to complete the single port calibration for reflected measurement. The DUT can be
connected and measured at this time.

The open-circuit device, short-circuit device and load can be

Notice
measured in any sequence regardless that mentioned here.

For S22 response For S11 response

Open-circuit device Open-circuit device

Load
Load

Short-circuit
Short-circuit
device
device

RF Analyzer

43 / 248
4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Vector network analysis mode
Figure 4-5 Single-port Reflection Calibration Kit Connection

4.1.2.5 Full 2 ports error correction

Full 2 ports error correction allows for correction of 12 error terms such as positive and reverse
directivity, source matching, load matching, frequency response and isolation, etc.
·Eliminate directional error during test component assembling in the forward and reverse
directions
·Eliminate source matching error during test component assembling in the forward and reverse
directions
·Eliminate load matching error during test component assembling in the forward and reverse
directions
·Eliminate isolation error during test component assembling in the forward and reverse directions
·Remove the frequency response of the test component assembly in the forward and reverse
directions
This is a relatively accurate error correction process. The
instrument updates the measurement trace once via forward and
Notice
reverse sweep, which takes more time compared with other
correction process.

a) Set other measurement parameters: Start frequency, stop frequency, output power, number
of sweeping points or IF bandwidth.
b) Open the calibration menu and press 【Calibrate】 .
c) Press [Cal Kit], and press corresponding soft key to select the correct calibration kit model.
d) Press [Back] and return to the 【Calibrate】 menu bar, press [M Cal] , select the type to be
corrected, press [Full 2 Ports] , the system will prompt to ―press [Reflect] to start the
corresponding measurement! ‖.
e) To start reflection measurement, press [Reflect>] to prompt ―Connect OPEN in P1,then press
corresp. menu button to start!‖. connect the open circuit device to test port 1 according to the
diagram, and after the display trace is stable, press [P1 OPEN], the analyzer will display "Cal
std measuring..." during the measurement of the standard piece, and after completing the
measurement, it will display the prompt "Connect SHORT in P1, then press corresp. menu
button to start!" And the software menu will be underlined to indicate that the project has been
tested, such as [P1 OPEN].
f) Disconnect the open-circuit device, and connect the short-circuit device to test port 1. After
the display trace is stable, to measure the standard piece, press [P1 SHORT], the RF
analyzer will display "calibration standard measurement …" during the measurement of the
standard piece, and after completing the measurement, it will display the prompt "Port 1 Short
Measure Done. Connect LOAD in P1, press ‗P1 LOAD‘‖, and the software menu will be
underlined to indicate that the project has been tested, such as [P1 SHORT].
g) Disconnect the short-circuit device, connect the load to test port 1, and press [P1 LOAD]
after the trace is stable to prompt ―Calibrating standard piece measurement...‖ during
standard piece measurement, and prompt ―Connect the load to Port 1, then press corresp.
menu button to start!‖ after measurement. At this time, underline of the menu indicates the
item is tested completely, for example, [P1 LOAD].
h) Disconnect the load from P1, connect the open-circuit device, short-circuit device and load to
P2 as per the same standard method with P1 in sequence, and complete the measurement
on such standard pieces as S22 OPEN, SHORT and LOAD.
i) After reflection calibration on P1 and P2, the prompt ―Press [Done] to complete the

44 / 248
 4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Vector network analysis mode
measurement.‖ Press [Done], and the system will calculate the reflection factor automatically.
j) Return to previous menu for transmission calibration. Press [Tr>] to prompt ―Connect Thru
cable between P1 and P2, then press corresp. menu button to start!‖ connect test port 1 and
test port 2 with cables. You can press [Auto Meas], and the system can automatically
complete four transmission calibration tasks in turn, or press [Pos Match], [Pos Trans], [Rev
Match] and [Rev Trans] in turn to complete each calibration task individually. When all four
tasks are completed, the full 2 ports transmission calibration is completed.
k) Press [Back] to return to previous menu, and press [ISO] for isolation calibration.
l) For isolation measurement, press [ISO] to prompt ―Connect LOADs in P1 and P2, then press
corresp. menu button to start!‖. Connect the load to test port 1 and test port 2 respectively,
press [Auto Meas] to complete isolation calibration on the two items automatically in turn, or
press [Pos Iso] and [Rev Iso] to complete each isolation calibration independently. Or you can
press [Ignore Iso] directly to ignore isolation calibration.
m) Press [Done] to finish the full 2 ports calibration. After that, the prompt ―Calibration Off/On‖
shows in the prompt zone. Connect with the DUT for measurement.

For reflection For transmission For isolation

For S22 response For S11 response

Open-circuit device Open-circuit device

Load Load
Load Load
Short-circuit Short-circuit THRU
device device

RF Analyzer RF Analyzer RF Analyzer

Figure 4-6 Standard piece correction for Full 2 ports error correction

4.1.3 Marker function

The 4957B RF analyzer is provided with up to eight markers to facilitate users to track the
measurement results.
Select the currently displayed marker by pressing 【Mkr】→[Sel Mkr]→[Mkr 1], [Mkr 2] ... [Mkr 6] or
[More Mkrs>]→[Mkr 7], [Mkr 8].
Each marker has two operating modes, namely, normal and delta.
Press 【Mkr】→[Max] or [Min] to let the RF analyzer search the max/min value of the measurement
trace, and press 【Peak】 to search the marker peak value, including 【Mkr】, [Sub Peak], [Right
Peak] and [Left Peak]. You can also move the marker with the [↑] /[↓] keys and the roller, or
position the marker by setting the standard answer according to the pop-up marker position and
inputting the numerical value when pressing [Normal Mkr] and [Delta Mkr].

4.1.4 Storage and recalling function

The RF analyzer can save the setting status and measurement data to the internal memory,
external USB or SD card, and recall the setting status and measurement data of the instrument
from the internal memory, external USB or SD card. The specific operation is as follows:

45 / 248
4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Vector network analysis mode
Press 【File】→[Storage State] to save the current instrument status in the memory;
Press 【File】→[Recall State>]→[State File>], and a list of state files will pop up to display all state
files saved in the memory. Select corresponding file for quick setting of the instrument. Press【File】
→[Recall State>]→[Last State] or [Default State] to select the last setting state before starting or
the default state of the system;
Press [File] → [Save Trace >] , press the menu item to select the corresponding trace storage
format (trace, s1p data, s2p data, csv data), enter the file name in the pop-up dialog box, Press
[OK] to save the current sweep track data into the memory;
Press [File]→[Recall Trace>] to pop up a data list showing all data files saved in the storage (trace
format), and select relevant data file to recall the data from the data file to the memory for display
and comparison.
Press [File]→[Print Screen] to save the display area on the screen into jpg file format. Edit and
enter the name of the file to be saved, and press OK to complete the saving.
Press 【File】→[File Mgmnt] to perform file copy or file deletion.
Press [File] → [Location Int >] and select the storage medium as internal FLASH, external USB
disk or SD card.

4.1.5 Measurement optimization

The dynamic range refers to the delta between the max. power and min. measurable power (noise
base) that can be entered to the RF analyzer. To lower the measurement uncertainty, the dynamic
range of the RF analyzer shall be larger than the response range of the DUT. The measurement
accuracy can be improved effectively only when the signal under test is 10dB higher than the
noise base. In order to increase the dynamic range of the RF analyzer, the following methods are
usually used for measurement optimization:

4.1.5.1 Increasing the input power of the DUT

Increasing the DUT input power can help the analyzer to detect the output power of the DUT with
higher accuracy. But note that too high input of the RF analyzer can cause compression distortion
or even damage the receiver.
Press 【Amplitude】→[Power High>] to adjust the output power.

Max. input level is marked on the panel of the RF analyzer, and the
high output power of the RF analyzer can reach 0dBm at certain
Notice
point. If the DUT has gains, use proper source power to prevent the
input power from exceeding the max. input level.

4.1.5.2 Decreasing the receiver noise base

Random noise on the RF analyzer's receive path reduces measurement accuracy. ―Sweep
average‖ and ―reducing intermediate frequency bandwidth‖ can be adopted to reduce trace noise,
reduce noise base and obtain more accurate measurement results.

1) Sweep Average
Sweep average reduces the impact of random noise on the measurement, and the RF analyzer
calculates each measurement value by averaging the same measurement point through multiple
sweeps. The setting of the average factor determines the number of consecutive sweeps. The
larger the average factor, the more effectively the effect of noise on the measurement can be
reduced.
Trace averaging is applied to all measurement traces in the channel, and the channel that turns on
the averaging function displays an average counter.

46 / 248
 4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Vector network analysis mode
If the sweep average is turned on, the average counter shows the average number of sweeps that
have been performed, helping to select the appropriate average factor by observing the change in
the trace and average number of times that have been performed.
Sweeping average and reducing the IF bandwidth can reduce the noise. If you want to get very
low noise, it is recommended to use the sweep average. In normal case, the sweep average is
used to reduce the noise but the time required to reduce the IF bandwidth is longer, especially the
average number of times is large.
Steps for setting sweep averaging are as follow.
Press [BW] → [Avg Off On] , enter the average number of times with the numeric keys.

2) Reduce IF bandwidth
The RF analyzer converts the received response signal to the intermediate frequency signal for
processing. The bandwidth of the intermediate frequency band pass filter is called the
intermediate frequency bandwidth, and the RF analyzer supports the variable bandwidth IF filter,
wherein the intermediate frequency bandwidth is set from 100kHz to 1Hz and changes in steps of
1, 3 and 10. Reducing the IF bandwidth can lower the impact of the random noise on the
measurements (reducing 10 times of the IF bandwidth can lower the noise base by 10dB), but it
can prolong the sweep time. The effect of intermediate frequency bandwidth on measurements is
shown in Figure 4-7:

47 / 248
4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Vector network analysis mode

Figure 4-7 Effect of Intermediate Frequency Bandwidth on Measurement Results

Follow the steps below to set the IF bandwidth:
a) Press 【BW】 → [IF Band] ；
b) Press the [↑] [↓] key to move the marker bar to change the IF bandwidth value.

Sweeping average and reducing the IF bandwidth can reduce the

noise. If you want to get very low noise, it is recommended to use
Notice the sweep average. In normal case, the sweep average is used to
reduce the noise but the time required to reduce the IF bandwidth is
longer, especially the average number of times is large.

4.2 Menu Structure

The vector network analysis mode mainly includes 10 groups of primary menus, i.e. "Frequency",
"Amplitude", "Bandwidth", "Marker", "Measure", "Sweep", "Calibrate", "Trace", "Peak" and "File".
The "System" menu refers to the system settings of the machine in the Basic Operations of
Chapter III, and the other menu structures are as follows:

48 / 248
 4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Vector network analysis mode

测量 测量格式 史密斯 时域变换 模式

线性 时域变换 带通
S11 对数幅度
关 开

线性幅度 对数 起始时间 低通阶跃

S12
0.000ns

驻波比 复数对 终止时间 低通冲激

S21
7.547ns

相位 R+jX
S22 模式

史密斯 设置频率
测量格式 G+jB 返回
低通

极坐标
时域变换 窗函数

群延时
门选通 返回 下一页

返回
高级 返回 窗函数

最大值

高 级
门选通 门形状
正常值
A1 门选通
关 开 最大
最小值
B1 门起始
0.000ns 宽
脉冲宽度
R1 门终止
7.547ns 标准

β参数
A2 门类型
带通 带阻 最小

B2 门形状
门形状

返回

R2 返回

返回

返回

Figure 4-8 Structure of Measure Menu

49 / 248
4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Vector network analysis mode

频率 幅度 输出功率 带宽

平均
起始频率 顶部 高功率
关 开

终止频率 底部 低功率 平均因子

16

手动 平滑孔径(%)
中心频率 自动比例
-18.00 dBm 10.00

射频输出
扫宽 默认刻度
关 开

参考值 返回 中频带宽

参考位置

刻度/格

输出功率

光标 选择光标 选择光标 峰值

选择光标
光标 1 光标 7 峰值
[1]

标准光标 光标 2 光标 8 次峰值

差值光标 光标 3 右邻峰值

关闭 光标 4 返回 左邻峰值

全部关闭 光标 5 最大值

最大值 光标 6 最小值

跟 踪
最小值 更多光标
关 开

关 联
返回 返回
数据 存储

Figure 4-9 Structure of Frequency, Amplitude, Bandwidth, Marker and Peak Menus

50 / 248
 4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Vector network analysis mode

迹线 选择迹线 迹线数目 运算 运算

选择迹线 迹线1 源匹配

1 × 1 数据→存储
[1]

迹线数目 迹线2 1 × 2 数据
1 × 1

运算 迹线3 1 × 3 存储 返回

极限 迹线4 2 × 1 数据&存储

3 × 1 数据-存储

返回 返回
4 × 1 数据+存储

返回 数据/存储

下一页

极 限

极 限
关 开

报 警
关 开

清除

编辑

存储

调用

返回

Figure 4-10 Structure of Trace Menu

51 / 248
4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Vector network analysis mode

扫描
编辑列表

扫描方式
连续 单次 增加段

单次扫描
删除段

扫描时间
自动 手动 删除全部

扫描点数
201

扫描类型
线性 列表 返回

编辑列表 >

运行/保持
[运行中]

Figure 4-11 Structure of Sweep Menu

52 / 248
 4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Vector network analysis mode

校准 机械校准 单端口Sxx 校准 开路

校准
单端口S11 开路器 开路S11 开路
关 开

校准件 单端口S22 短路器 短路S11 完成

机械校准 全二端口 负载 开路S22

短路

频率响应 短路S22
短路

响应与隔离
继续校准 完成 直通S12
S12
完成

响应与隔离
响应与隔离 直通S21
S21
直通
直通
返回 返回
直通

隔离

完成

完成

全二端口 反射 传输 隔离

反射 P1开路 正向传输 正向隔离

传输 P1短路 正向匹配 反向隔离

隔离 P1负载 反向传输 自动测量

P2开路 反向匹配 完成

完成 P2短路 自动测量

P2负载 忽略隔离

完成 返回 返回

返回

Figure 4-12 Structure of Calibrate Menu

53 / 248
4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Vector network analysis mode

文 件 调用状态 调 用 存储迹线

存储状态 状态文件 上一页 迹线

调用状态 上次状态 下一页 数据

(.csv)

调用迹线 默认状态 调 用

存储迹线 删 除 返回

屏幕截图 返回 删除全部

文件管理

存储位置 返回

存储位置 文件管理

SD 卡 选择
源文件

USB 选择
目的路径

内 部 开始拷贝
00

删除
源文件

返回

返回

Figure 4-13 Structure of File Menu

54 / 248
 4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Vector network analysis mode
4.3 Menu Description
In the subsequent description, the primary menu is the menu name
Notice + "【】", e.g. 【Freq】, and the remaining submenus are the menu
name + "[]", e.g. [M Cal].

4.3.1 Frequency menu

Frequency range refers to the measurement frequency span. In the VNA mode, the 4957B RF
analyzer must be set with proper measurement frequency range first before measurement and
calibration regardless any measurement parameter is selected. Frequency range can be set in the
following two methods:
a) Specify the start frequency and stop frequency
b) Specify the center frequency and span
·[Start Freq]: Press 【Freq】→[Start Freq], use the numeric keys on
the front panel, select the frequency unit, or use the 【↑】
【↓】 keys and
the knob for setting.
频率 ·[Stop Freq]: Press【Freq】→[Stop Freq], use the numeric keys on the
front panel, select the frequency unit, or use the 【↑】
【↓】 keys and the
knob for setting.
起始频率 ·[Center Freq]: Press 【Freq】→[Center Freq], use the numeric keys
on the front panel, select [GHz], [MHz], [kHz] and [Hz] in the frequency
unit menu, or use the 【↑】【↓】 keys and the knob for setting.
·[Special Notes]: When using the 【↑】 【↓】 keys and the knob, the
终止频率 size of the frequency step is the same as the set value of the [Step
Freq Auto/Man]. After pressing [Step Freq Auto/Man] to switch to
[Step Freq Auto/Man], you can use the numeric keys or the 【↑】
【↓】 keys and the knob to set the step frequency value.
中心频率 ·[Span]: Press 【Freq】→[Span] to activate the span submenu. You
can use the numeric keys, and then select the frequency unit to
change. You can also use the 【↑】【↓】 keys and the knob to change

扫宽 the span. For the detailed information, please refer to the description of
the [Span] menu.
·[Special Notes]: Use the 【↑】【↓】 keys and the knob to change
the span with a step of 1-2-5.

55 / 248
4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Vector network analysis mode
4.3.2 Amplitude menu
·[Top]: Press 【Amplitude】→[Top] to set the maximum scale in the top
幅度 position of the vertical part of the display grid within the range of
-499.9dB - +500dB.
·[Bottom]: Press 【Amplitude】→[Bottom] to set the maximum scale in
顶部
the bottom position of the vertical part of the display grid within the
range of -500dB- +499.9dB.
底部 ·[Auto Scale]: Press 【Amplitude】→[Auto Scale] to display the trace
in the scale most suitable for the screen,
自动比例 ·[Special Notes]: which is only valid in Cartesian coordinates.
·[Default Scale]: Press 【Amplitude】→[Default Scale] to indicate that
all options related to amplitude setting in the rectangular coordinate
默认刻度 format are the default startup values.
·[Ref Value]: Press 【Amplitude】→[Ref Value], and use the numeric
参考值 keys on the front panel or the 【↑】【↓】 keys and the knob to set the
reference level unit to dBm.
·[Special Notes]: When the 【↑】
【↓】 keys and the knob are used, the
参考位置 step is 10dB.
·[Ref Pos]: Press 【Amplitude】→[Ref Pos], and use the numeric keys
刻度/格 or the 【↑】【↓】 keys and the knob to change the reference position.
·[Scale]: Press 【Amplitude】→[Scale], and use the numeric keys or
the 【↑】 【↓】 keys and the knob to set the scale within the setting range
输出功率 >
of 0.1dB - 20dB.
·[Output Power]: It has three modes, i.e. high power, low power and
manually set power.

4.3.3 Output power menu

·[High Power]: Press [Output Power]→[High Power], and select [High
输出功率 Power] on the touch screen to set the output power to the high power
state.
高功率 ·[Low Power]: Press [Output Power]→[Low Power], and select [Low
Power] on the touch screen to set the output power to the low power
state.
低功率 ·[Manual]: Press [Output Power]→[Manual], and the range is -35dB-
-10dBm. Enter the numbers with the numeric keys or use the knob or
手动 press 【↑】【↓】 to adjust the manual power.
-35~-10dBm ·[RF Output]: Press [Output Power]→[RF Output Off On] to manually
switch the RF output switch.
射频输出
·[Special Notes]: The manual power menu display range
关 开 is-35~-10dBm, in order to ensure the setting range of power flatness
index, the actual range can be set to -45 - 5dBm. If it is set to a value
< 返回 outside the range displayed by the menu item, there is a certain
deviation in the power output at some frequency points.

56 / 248
 4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Vector network analysis mode
4.3.4 Bandwidth menu
·[Ave Off On]: Press 【BW】→[Ave Off On] to set it to on or off, and
带宽
switch it via the touchscreen manually.
平均 ·[Avg Factor]: Press 【BW】→[Avg Factor 16] and use the numeric
关 开 keys or the 【↑】【↓】 keys and the knob to set the specific number.
·[Smooth Off On]: Press【BW】 →[Smooth On/Off] to set it to on or off,
平均因子 and switch it via the touchscreen manually.
·[Smooth Aperture (%)]: Press 【BW】→[Aperture (%) 10.00] to select
平滑 the aperture percentage, and press the number key to set it, with the
关开 aperture range of 0.01%～20%.
平滑孔径 ·[IF BW]: Press 【BW】→[IF BW], select from the touchscreen or press
（%） 【↑】/【↓】 to change the IF BW value, and press [OK] to end it.
·[Special Notes]: Use the 【↑】【↓】 keys and the knob to change the
中频带宽 span, and set the bandwidth down from 100kHz to 1Hz, with a step of
1, 3 and 10.

4.3.5 Marker menu

·[Mkr 1]: Press 【Mkr】→[Sel Mkr [1]]→[Mkr 1], [Mkr 2], [Mkr 3], [Mkr 4],
光标 [Mkr 5], [Mkr 6] or [More Mkrs>]→[Mkr 7] and [Mkr 8] to select the marker
displayed currently;
选择光标
> ·[Normal Mkr]: Press 【Mkr】→[Normal Mkr], the marker is in the normal
[1]
mode, which can be moved via the knob, step key or numeric key;
标准光标 ·[Delta Mkr]: Press 【Mkr】→[Delta Mkr] to set the marker activated
currently to the delta mode with amplitude difference and frequency
差值光标 difference between the delta marker and reference marker shown in the
marker display area on the screen, enter the frequency value of the delta
关闭 marker directly via the number key, or move it via the rotary knob or step
key;
·[Off]: Press 【Mkr】→[Off] to turn off the currently activated marker.
全部关闭
·[All Off]: Press 【Mkr】→[All Off] to turn off all markers that have been
turned on.
最大值
·[Max]: Press 【Mkr】→[Max] to search for the maximum value of the
marker;
最小值 ·[Min]: Press 【Mkr】→[Min] to search for the minimum value of the
关联 marker;
数据 存储 ·[Link Data Mem]: Press 【Mkr】→[Link] to select the data or memory,
and switch it via the touchscreen manually.

57 / 248
4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Vector network analysis mode
4.3.6 Measure Menu
·[S11]: Press 【Measure】→[S11] to set the measurement parameter
测量 to S11.
·[S12]: Press 【Measure】→[S12] to set the measurement parameter
S11 to S12.
·[S21]: Press 【Measure】→[S21] to set the measurement parameter
S12 to S21.
·[S22]: Press 【Measure】→[S22] to set the measurement parameter
to S22.
S21 ·[Meas Format]: Press 【Measure】→[Meas Format] to select the
measurement format, including [Log Amp], [Linear Amp], [VSWR],
S22 [Phase], [Smith], [Polar], [Group Delay], etc.
·[Special Notes]: The measurement format submenu is just a
测量格式 > difference in the way it is displayed and is not specifically introduced.
·[Transform]: Press 【Measure】→[Transform] to set the transform
related parameters, including:
时域变换 > [Transform Off On], [Start Time], [Stop Time], [Mode], [Set Freq
Lowpass], [Window], [Velocity] and [Unit m ft].
门选通 > ·[Gating]: Press 【Measure】→[Gating] to set the gating related
parameters, including:
[Gating (Off On)] selection, [Gate Start Time], [Gate Stop Time] and
高级 >
[Gate Type (Pass-Band Stop-Band)] selection. The gate shape options
include maximum, wide, standard and minimum.
·[Advance]: Press 【 Measure 】 →[Advance>] to select the
measurement parameters from [A1], [B1], [R1], [A2], [B2] and [R2].

58 / 248
 4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Vector network analysis mode
4.3.7 Sweep/setting menu
·[Swp Type Cont Single]: Press 【Swp】→[Swp Type Cont Single],
and two sweep modes are provided in the vector network analyzer
mode: Continuous sweep and sweep once. The underline marks the
current state. The sweep mode setting determines how the analyzer
sweeps and when it stops to enter into the hold state.
·[Swp Once]: Press 【Swp】→[Swp Once], the sweep type is a single
扫描
sweep, that is, the sweep is stopped after a single sweep.
·[Swp Time Auto Man]: Press 【Swp】→[Swp Time Auto Man] to
扫描类型
switch the sweep time between Auto and Manual. The underline
连续 单次 marks the current state. If the sweep time is automatic, the RF
analyzer automatically sets the sweep time to the fastest according to
单次扫描 the current instrument status, and the screen displays the fastest
sweep time under the current setting. If the sweep time is manually
set, the sweep time value can be input at this time. Use the numeric
扫描时间
keys to enter the sweep time value and select the time unit by
自动 手动 pressing corresponding soft key to complete the setting.
·[Swp Points]: Press 【Swp】→[Swp Points], and use the numeric
扫描点数 keys on the front panel or the 【↑】【↓】 keys and the knob to set the
201 sweep points.
·[Special Notes]: The number of sweep points in the vector network
扫描类型 analysis mode can be set from 11 to 10001.
线性 列表 ·[Swp Mode Lin List]: Press 【Swp】→[Swp Mode Lin List], and
select the sweep mode to be linear or list via the touchscreen. When
编辑列表> the sweep mode is list sweep, you can edit the list to add and delete
segments.
·[Edit List]: Press 【Swp】→[Edit List>] to add or delete segments via
运行/保持 the touchscreen, edit the start frequency, stop frequency, sweep
points and intermediate frequency bandwidth of the segment, and
enter the parameter value via the numeric key. See the description of
the [Swp Mode Lin List] menu for details.
·[Special Notes]: When you press [Edit List], the sweep mode
changes to list sweep by default.
·[Run/Hold]: Press 【Swp】→[Run/Hold]. When you switch to run, the
marker moves as per the sweep point, and when you switch to hold,
the marker pauses at the current sweep point.

59 / 248
4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Vector network analysis mode
4.3.8 Edit list menu
·[Add Seg]: Press [Edit List>]→[Add Seg] to select the start frequency,
stop frequency, sweep points and intermediate frequency bandwidth of
编辑列表
the segment to be edited via the touchscreen, enter the parameter
value via the numeric key, and select the corresponding unit via the
增加段 > touchscreen.
·[Del Seg]: Press [Edit List>]→[Del Seg] to click on any position of the
删除段 > segment to be deleted via the touchscreen, and then press [Del Seg]
to delete it.
·[Del All]: Press [Edit List>]→[Del All] to delete all the segments in the
删除全部
list.
·[Save List]: Press [Edit List>]→[Save List] to save the segments in
存储列表 the list, and click to pop up a dialog box, enter the file name and press
OK to save the list file +.
调用列表 ·[Recall List]: Press [Edit List>]→[Recall List] to click on the list file to
be recalled via the touchscreen, and click OK.
·[Special Notes]: When the list is not saved, clicking [Recall List] will
返回
not display any list files.
·[Back]: Press [Edit List>]→[Back] to return to the previous menu.

4.3.9 Calibration menu

·[Cal Off On]: Press【Cal】→[Cal Off On] to turn the error correction
on or off, and the calibration can only be turned on when the
corresponding calibration is completed.
校准 ·[Cal Kit]: Press 【Cal】→[Cal Kit] to enter the calibration kit selection
dialog box, and select the calibration kit type.
校准
·[Special Notes]: The mechanical calibration kit types include
关 开 31101A 31101B 31121 31123
·[M Cal]: Press 【Cal】→[M Cal] to complete the relevant calibration
校准件 according to the calibration steps, including one port S11, one port
S22, full 2 ports, frequency response, response and isolation S12,
response and isolation S21.
机械校准 >
·[E Cal]: Press 【Cal】→[E Cal] to enter the electronic calibration
dialog box, and click the down arrow on the touchscreen to select the
电子校准 [Cal Port]: One port P1, one port P2, full 2 ports; click [Start],
[Interrupt] and [Exit] for relevant operations of electronic calibration.
·[Cal Cont]: Press 【Cal】→[Cal Cont], the submenu type is the same
继续校准 > as the mechanical calibration, and the color invert is mainly
completed. If the calibration is interrupted due to another menu is
opened, press [Cal Cont] in the calibration menu to continue the
calibration.

60 / 248
 4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Vector network analysis mode
4.3.10 Mechanical calibration menu
·[One Port S11]: Press [M Cal]→[One Port S11] to connect the
circuit breaker, short circuiter and load according to the prompts in
the dialog box, so as to complete the calibration of one port S11.
机械校准 ·[One Port S22]: Press [M Cal]→[One Port S22] to select [OPEN],
[SHORT] and [LOAD].
单端口S11 ·[Full 2 Ports]: Press [M Cal]→[Full 2 Ports] to complete the
relevant calibration according to the calibration steps, including one
单端口S22 port S11, one port S22, full 2 ports, frequency response, response
and isolation S12, response and isolation S21.
·[Freq Resp.]: Press [M Cal]→[Freq Resp.], open circuit S11, short
全二端口
circuit S11, open circuit S22, short circuit S22, straight through S12,
straight through S21. Press [Back] to return to the previous
频率响应 > submenu.
·[Resp.&Iso@S12]: Press [M Cal]→[Resp.&Iso@S12] to select the
响应与隔离 response and isolation calibration.
S12 ·[Resp.&Iso@S21]: Press [M Cal]→[Resp.&Iso@S21] to select the
response and isolation calibration.
响应与隔离 ·[Special Notes]: The measurement sequence for several different
S21 standard pieces to be measured at the same time can be ignored,
for example, an open-circuit device, a short-circuit device and a
返回 load. Any standard piece can be remeasured before [OK] is pressed.
Change in standard piece is normal during measurement. In case of
a standard piece subjected to multiple measurement, correction
shall be conducted on the latest measurement data.

4.3.11 One port S11 menu

·[OPEN]: Press [One Port S11]→[OPEN] to select the calibration
standard of OPEN.
·[SHORT]: Press [One Port S11]→[SHORT] to select the calibration
单端口S11 standard of SHORT.
·[LOAD]: Press [One Port S11]→[LOAD] to select the calibration
standard of LOAD.
开路
·[Special Notes]: The measurement sequence for several different
standard pieces to be measured at the same time can be ignored, for
example, an open-circuit device, a short-circuit device and a load.
短路 Any standard piece can be remeasured before [OK] is pressed.
Change in standard piece is normal during measurement. In case of
a standard piece subjected to multiple measurement, correction shall
负载 be conducted on the latest measurement data.

61 / 248
4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Vector network analysis mode
4.3.12 One port S22 menu
It is the same as the [One Port S11] menu.

4.3.13 Full 2 ports menu

·[Reflect]: Press [Full 2 Ports]→[Reflect] to set the reflection
全二端口 measurement for calibration of full 2 ports. It includes 6 sub-options:
[P1 OPEN], [P1 SHORT], [P1 LOAD], [P2 OPEN],
反射 [P2 SHORT], [P2 LOAD]
·[Special Notes]: P1 stands for one port and P2 for two ports.
·[Tr]: Press [Full 2 Ports]→[Tr] to set the transmission measurement
传输
for calibration of full 2 ports. It includes [Pos Match], [Pos Trans],
[Rev Match], [Rev Trans] and [Auto Meas].
隔离
·[Iso]: Press [Full 2 Ports]→[Iso] to set the isolation measurement for

calibration of full 2 ports.[Pos Iso], [Rev Iso], [Auto Meas] and [Ignore

Iso].

4.3.14 Frequency response menu

·[Special Notes]: In case of frequency response error calibration,
the errors of reflection measurement and transmission measurement
频率响应 can be calibrated, open circuit and short circuit are selected in
reflection measurement, and straight through is selected in
开路S11 transmission measurement.
·[OPEN S11]: Press [Freq Resp.]→[OPEN S11] to select the
calibration standard of S11 OPEN.
短路S11 ·[SHORT S11]: Press [Freq Resp.]→[SHORT S11] to select the
calibration standard of S11 SHORT.
·[OPEN S22]: Press [Freq Resp.]→[OPEN S22] to select the
开路S22
calibration standard of S22 OPEN.
·[SHORT S22]: Press [Freq Resp.]→[SHORT S22] to select the
短路S22 calibration standard of S22 SHORT.
·[THRU S12]: Press [Freq Resp.]→[THRU S12] to select the
calibration standard of S12 THRU.
直通S12 ·[THRU S21]: Press [Freq Resp.]→[THRU S21] to select the
calibration standard of S21 THRU.
·[Special Notes]: After selecting the above menu, there will be a
直通S21
prompt on the interface: ―Please connect the circuit breaker (short
circuiter) to the port, and press the corresponding menu key to start
the measurement‖

4.3.15 Calibration continue menu

It completes the remaining calibration steps, and is the same as the calibration menu.

62 / 248
 4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Vector network analysis mode
4.3.16 Trace menu
This menu is used to set the trace display mode, trace math and limit function. The memory must
be saved with a trace first before conducting any trace calculation, and trace calculation is
conducted via vector calculation on previous complex number data displayed in formatting.
·[Select Trace]: Press 【Trace】→[Select Trace] to select the trace.
迹线 The vector network analyzer provides 1, 2, 3 and 4 tracks, and the
selected track sequence number and its status menu item will be
选择迹线 displayed directly.
[1] ·[Trace Num]: Press 【Trace】→[Trace Num 1×1>]→[1×1], [1×2],
[1×3], [2×1], [3×1] or [4×1] to select the window number and trace
迹线数目 number in the window;
·[Trace Math]: Press 【Trace】→[Trace Math] to open the math menu
of the trace.
运算
·[Special Notes]: The memory must be saved with a trace first before
conducting any trace calculation, and trace calculation is conducted via
极限 vector calculation on previous complex number data displayed in
formatting.
·[Limit]: Press 【Trace】→[Limit] to edit and display the limit line and
带宽搜索 test to see if it is passed.
·[Bandwidth Search]: Press【Trace】→[Bandwidth Search]:
统计 ·[Stats Off On]: Press【Trace】→[Stats Off On] to turn on or off the
关 开 statistics, and switch it manually.

4.3.17 Math menu

·[Data→Mem]: Press [Trace Math]→[Data→Mem] to save current
measurement trace data to the memory;
运算
·[Data]: Press [Trace Math]→[Data] to display only the trace
数据→存储 corresponding to the measurement data;
·[Save]: Press [Trace Math]→[Save] to display only the trace
corresponding to the saved data.
数据
·[Data&Mem]: Press [Trace Math]→[Data&Mem] to display the trace
corresponding to both the measurement data and saved data at the
存储
same time.
·[Data-Mem]: Press [Trace Math]→[Data-Mem] to display the trace
数据&存储 corresponding to the measurement data minus the saved data.
·[Data/Mem]: Press [Trace Math]→[Data/Mem] to display the trace
数据-存储 corresponding to the measurement data divided by the saved data.
·[Data+Mem]: Press [Trace Math]→[Data+Mem] to display the trace
数据/存储 corresponding to the measurement data plus the saved data.

数据+存储>

63 / 248
4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Vector network analysis mode

4.3.18 Limit menu

·[Limit Off On]: Press [Limit]→[Limit Off On] to choose whether to turn
on the limit function.
·[Alarm Off On]: Press [Limit]→[Audio Alarm Off On] to set audio
极限 alarm On/Off. If the audio alarm is on and the upper and lower limit line
test is on, the function is effective. If the limit is out of range when the
极限 upper and lower limit lines are swept on the current screen, the buzzer
关 开 will give a short sound.
·[Clear]: Clear the edited limit line displayed currently;
报警 ·[Edit]: Press [Limit]→[Edit]→[Sel Point] to switch the limit point on the
关 开 current limit;
·[Edit]: Press [Limit]→[Edit]→[Value] to set current limit point
frequency, enter the number via the numeric key, and select the
清除 frequency unit for completion;
·[Edit]: Press [Limit]→[Edit]→[Add]to add the limit point on the current
limit line;
编辑 > ·[Edit]: Press [Limit]→[Edit]→[Delete] to delete the limit point
displayed on the current limit;
·[Edit]: Press [Limit]→[Edit]→[Clear]to clear all limit points saved on
存储 the current limit;
·[Save]: Press [Limit>]→[Save], enter the name via the number key,
调用 and save the limit line edited just now to the system, which can be
recalled by pressing [Limit>]→[Recall>], selecting such limit line via the
touchscreen manually, and pressing [OK] for recalling when
返回 conducting the same test next time, avoiding repeated editing;
·[Recall]: Press [Limit>] → [Recall] , manually select the limit line file
with the touch screen and press [OK] to complete the loading. If the
number of limit line storage files is large, press [Limit>] → [Recall>] →
[Page Up] , [Page Up] and find the limit line file to be loaded by page,
and press [Limit>] → [Load>] → [Delete] , [Del All] to delete the single
and all currently selected and stored limit line files.

64 / 248
 4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Spectrum analysis mode
4.3.19 Peak menu
·[Max Peak]: Press【Peak】→[Max Peak] to place a frequency marker
at the highest point of the trace and display the frequency and
峰值 amplitude of the frequency marker in the upper right corner of the
screen.
最大峰值 ·[Sub Peak]: Press 【 Peak 】 →[Sub Peak] to move the active
frequency marker to the next highest peak point on the trace that is
associated with the current frequency marker position. Press the key
次峰值
again, and the user can find the lower peak point quickly.
·[Right Peak]: Press 【Peak】→[Right Peak] to find the next peak to
右邻峰值 the right of the current frequency marker position.
·[Left Peak]: Press 【Peak】→[Left Peak] to find the next peak to the
left of the current frequency marker position.
左邻峰值 ·[Max]: Press 【Peak】→[Max] to place a marker at the highest point of
the trace and display the frequency and amplitude of the marker in the
最大值 upper right corner of the screen.
·Min Peak] Press 【Peak】→[Min] to place a marker at the lowest point
of the trace and display the frequency and amplitude of the marker in
最小值 the upper right corner of the screen.
·[Peak Tracking Off On]: Press 【Peak】→[Peak Tracking Off On],
峰值跟踪 and when peak tracking is on, the current marker will perform a peak
关 开 search operation after each sweep. If peak tracking is off, no operation
will be performed.
高级 ·[Advance]: Press 【Peak】→[Advance] to pop up the marker search
dialog box, which determines the peak value by setting the marker,
search type and specific frequency band.

65 / 248
4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Vector network analysis mode
4.3.20 File menu

·[StoreStateFile]: Press 【File】→[Save State] to save the current

sweep status parameters.

·[Recall Status]: Press 【File】→[Advance] to pop up the [Status File]

文件 list, and such soft menus as [Page Up], [Page Down], [Recall], [Delete]
and [Delete All] are used to read the existing status file and recall the
存储状态 corresponding state parameters to the current sweep. You can also
select such operations as [Last State] and [Default State].
·[Special Notes]: Select [Default State] to restore the factory setting
调用状态 > state.

·[StoreTraceFile]: Press 【File】→[Save Data] to save the trace data.

存储迹线
·[Recall Trace]: Press 【File】→[Recall Status] to pop up the data file
list, and such soft menus as [Page Up], [Page Down], [Immediate
调用迹线 > Recall], [Delete] and [Delete All] are used to read the existing status file
and recall the corresponding data to the current sweep.

·[Print Screen]: Press【File】→[Print Screen] to capture the current

屏幕截图
screen image.

·[File Mgmnt]: Press 【File】→[File Mgmnt] to pop up the file

文件管理 > management menu, including [Source File], [Target File], [Start
Copying], [Delete Files] and other relevant soft menus to copy and
存储位置 delete files.
>
[内部] ·[Storage location]: Press 【File】→[Storage Location] to select the
storage location, the interior is the internal memory of the instrument,
and the other optional locations are the memory and SD card of the
USB interface. After the security feature option is selected, the internal
memory cannot be selected.

4.3.21 Storage location menu

·[Internal]: Press 【File】→[Storage Location]→[Internal], the [Internal]

is in a gray state and cannot be saved internally.
存储位置
·[SDCard]: Press 【File】→[Storage Location]→[SD card], and select
内部
Store Data to the SD card.
SD卡
·[USB]: Press【File】→[Storage Location] →[USB]and select Store Data
USB to USB.

< 返回

66 / 248
 4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Spectrum analysis mode
5 Spectrum analysis mode
This chapter mainly introduces the relevant contents of 4957B spectrum analysis mode, including
some typical measurement functions and methods in the spectrum analysis mode. After reading
this section, users using this instrument for the first time can have a general understanding of
some typical applications of the spectrum analysis mode and the testing operation process, and
are familiar with the use of the spectrum analysis mode.

All operations in this section are based on the premise of the selected
Notice
spectrum analysis mode, which will not be described separately later.

4957B spectrum analysis mode has rich measurement functions, so it contains many and complex
parameters. In addition to the most basic functional parameters, such as frequency parameters,
amplitude parameters, bandwidth average parameters, trace parameters, sweep parameters,
marker parameters, etc., it also has other characteristic function parameters, including signal
tracking, noise marker, peak tracking, counter, list sweep, trigger, limit line, field strength
measurement, channel power, occupied bandwidth, adjacent channel power, carrier-to-noise ratio,
spurious template, IQ capture, audio monitoring, etc.
a) Signal tracking
If the measured signal is a drift signal, the activated marker is placed on the peak point of the
signal using the signal tracking function of the spectrum analyzer, and the peak value of the
marker will always be displayed on the center frequency of the spectrum analyzer, which can be
easily measured.
b) Noise marker
The noise marker displays the noise power near the activation marker that is normalized to the 1
Hz bandwidth. Turn on the noise marker and set the detector to the RMS detection mode. If the
logarithmic mode (dBm, dBmV, dBuV, dBW, dBV, dBA, dBmA/dBuA) is selected as the amplitude
unit, the unit of the mark reading will be automatically switched to dBm/Hz. If V is selected as the
amplitude unit, the unit of the reading will be automatically switched to V/(Hz)1/2. If A is selected,
the unit of the reading will be automatically switched to A/(Hz)1/2. If W is selected, the unit of the
reading will be automatically switched to W/(Hz)1/2.
c) Peak tracking
If the peak tracking function is enabled, the marker will perform a peak search operation after each
sweeping.
d) Counter
If the frequency counter function is enabled, the frequency counter function will make the reading
of the marker more accurate, which is conducive to improving the accuracy of frequency
measurement. The measurement accuracy can reach Hz level, and the error is less than 10Hz.
e) List sweep
In the list sweep mode, users can edit the sweeping frequency band, and the spectrum analyzer
sweeps based on the frequency range and other parameters set by the edited list.
f) Trigger
Select the trigger modes of sweeping or measurement, including [freerun], [video trigger], [external
trigger], [trigger polarity], [trigger delay]. The user can select the mode based on the actual
demand. If the freerun is set after the last continuous sweeping or single sweeping, a new sweep
or measurement will be started. Set the trigger mode to video trigger. As long as the positive slope
of the input trigger signal passes the video trigger level set by the [trigger polarity plus/minus]
command, sweeping will be triggered. In the external trigger mode, select sweeping and
measurement to synchronize with the next voltage cycle.
g) Limit line
The limit line function is used to monitor the signal in a certain frequency band. The spectrum
analyzer provides upper and lower limit lines, and the user can set the limit. If the amplitude of a

67 / 248
4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Spectrum analysis mode
signal in a certain frequency band exceeds the set upper limit or is less than the set lower limit, the
spectrum analyzer will send out a audio alarm signal.
h) Field strength test
The spectrum analyzer provides the function of field strength measurement, including} [Field
Strength Off On], [Recall Antenna], [Edit Antenna], [Save Antenna] and other related soft menus.
With the corresponding test antenna, the field strength test can be carried out quickly.
i) Carrier to noise ratio
The carrier to noise ratio function is to measure the ratio of carrier power to noise power, including
carrier bandwidth, noise bandwidth, offset frequency, sweep width, carrier power, noise power,
carrier to noise ratio and other parameters.
j) Stray template
The function of stray template is to call the limit line as a template to measure whether the signal
power is limited by the template. The template parameter is a limit line and assigned by recalling
the limit line. The template can move up and down left and right according to the center frequency
and reference power. The template always moves the center point of the limit line left and right to
the center frequency, and moves the center point up and down to the reference power point
according to the calculated reference power. The reference power is divided into peak power and
channel power, and which one is selected depends on the reference power type.
k) IQ capture
IQ capture function is to capture IQ data and store them in the instrument through the capture time,
sampling rate, capture mode and other parameters set by the user.
l) Audio monitoring
The spectrum analyzer has audio demodulation function used for radio monitoring. If the
demodulation sound is poor, the sound effect can be improved by adjusting the resolution
bandwidth. In the demodulation mode, the resolution bandwidth is set in the range of 300kHz ~
30kHz, which will bring the optimum effect.

5.1 Introduction to typical measurements

The spectrum analysis mode of 4957B is the basic working mode. After startup, press 【Mode】, a
mode selection dialog box pops up. Then select [Spectrum Analysis Mode] in the box, and press
[OK] to enter the spectrum analysis mode after completing the progress bar.
This section will introduce some advanced typical measurement functions and methods of
spectrum analysis mode of 4957B, including the following:
a) Measurement of channel power.
b) Occupied bandwidth measurement.
c) Measurement of adjacent channel power.
d) TOI measurement.
e) Drift signal measurement.
f) Noise signal measurement.
g) Distortion measurement.
h) Pulsed RF signal measurement.
i) Signal generation measurement (option).
j) Interference map (option).
Press the 【Reset】 key on the front panel, and the RF analyzer will run

Notice again. In the following examples, unless otherwise specified, first press
the 【Reset】 key.

5.1.1 Measurement of channel power

This Section illustrates how to use the channel power measurement function of the spectrum
68 / 248
 4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Spectrum analysis mode
analysis mode of 4957B to measure the signal channel power by taking the application of
measurement of channel power of the FM signal as an example.

5.1.1.1 Definition of channel power

Channel power measurement is one of the most common measurements in RF transmission

systems. Therefore, channel power is defined as the power transmitted by a signal over a range of
frequencies at a specified time interval. In the test of the power amplifier and the filter circuit, the
system is faulty if the specific power is not measured. The communication transmitter is evaluated
by measurement of channel power, and its quality of the RF transmission is determined by
comparing it to specific communication protocol. The spectrum analysis mode of 4957B can be
used to measure the channel power of FM signal. Since the FM signal and continuous wave signal
differ in many respects, an accurate setting can make the measured FM signal more accurate.

5.1.1.2 Measurement steps

The steps of using the spectrum analysis mode of 4957B to measure the FM signal channel power
are as follows:
a) Set the signal generator to output the FM signal:
b) Generate an FM signal with a signal generator, set the frequency to 1GHz, the power to -
10dBm, the FM deviation to 500KHz and the modulation rate to 10kHz. Connect the output of
the signal generator to the RF input end of the spectrum analyzer via a cable, as shown in
Figure 5-1. Turn on the modulation output switch and the RF switch.

2.4mm cable
Adapter

Signal Generator Adapter RF Analyzer

Figure 5-1 Connection Between Signal Generator and Spectrum Analyzer

c) Reset the spectrum analyzer to the default state:
d) Press 【Reset】.
e) Turn on the channel power measurement function:
Press [Measure], [Ch Power >], [Ch Power Off On]. Enable the channel power measurement
function.
a) Set center frequency:
b) Press 【Measure】, [Channel Power] and [Center Freq] and set the center frequency with the
number keys. The center frequency of the spectrum analyzer is set to the frequency of the
measured signal, i.e., 1GHz.
c) Set the channel power bandwidth:
d) Press 【Measure】, [Channel Power] and [Channel Bandwidth] and set the channel power
bandwidth with the number keys to 1MHz.
e) Set the span of channel power:
f) Press【Measure】, [Channel Power] and [Channel Span] and set the channel power span with
the number keys to 2 MHz.
g) Set the resolution bandwidth and video bandwidth with a spectrum analyzer:
69 / 248
4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Spectrum analysis mode
h) Press 【BW】, [RBW Auto Man], set the resolution bandwidth to 30kHz;
i) Press 【BW】, [VBW Auto Man] to set the video bandwidth to 30kHz or less.

The channel power bandwidth is a frequency width of the power

displayed by the spectrum analyzer within this bandwidth, while the
channel power span is the frequency range over which the spectrum
Notice analyzer sweeps. The channel power span should be set to be greater
than or equal to the channel power bandwidth. Otherwise, the spectrum
analyzer will automatically set the channel span equal to the channel
power bandwidth. The ratio of channel power span to channel power
bandwidth remains constant (maximum: 10; minimum: 1) This ratio
remains constant as the channel power bandwidth changes. Changing
the channel power span can change this ratio. For example, when the
channel power bandwidth is doubled, the spectrum analyzer will also
increase the channel power span by the same factor.
j) Enable the averaging function:
Press 【BW】 and [Avg Off On], set the average number of times to 16 and enable the averaging
function.
After the channel power measurement function is enabled, if the detection mode is automatic, it
will be set to the root mean square detection mode. The two vertical white lines displayed on the
screen indicate the bandwidth of the channel power. The measurement results are displayed at
the bottom of the screen. See Figure 5-2 for the channel power measurement interface.

Figure 5-2 FM Signal Channel Power Measurement

5.1.2 Occupied bandwidth measurement.

This Section illustrates how to use the occupied bandwidth measurement function of the spectrum
analysis mode of 4957B to measure the signal occupied bandwidth by taking the application of
measurement of occupied bandwidth of the FM signal as an example.

70 / 248
 4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Spectrum analysis mode
5.1.2.1 Definition of occupied bandwidth

The occupied bandwidth refers to the frequency bandwidth corresponding to the total transmit
power of a certain ratio of the energy, which is centered as the center frequency of the specified
channel. The occupied bandwidth measurement of the spectrum analysis mode of 4957B can
present the measurement results in a quick, clear and accurate manner. There are two methods
for calculating the occupied bandwidth depending on the modulation method:
a) Power percentage method:
The occupied bandwidth of the signal is obtained by calculating the bandwidth of the portion
of the frequency containing a certain percentage of the total transmitted signal power, and the
percentage of power can be set by the user.
b) Power drop XdB method:
This calculation method defines the occupied bandwidth as: the distance between the two
frequency points when the signal power drops by XdB on both sides of the frequency point
where the peak power of the signal is located. The XdB of the signal power drop is set by the
user.

5.1.2.2 Test steps

Steps for measuring the occupied bandwidth in the spectrum analysis mode of 4957B are as
follows:
a) Set the signal generator to output the FM signal:
Use the signal generator to generate a frequency modulation signal, and set the frequency to
1GHz, the power to -10dBm, the frequency modulation offset to 500kHz and the modulation
rate to 10kHz. Connect the output of the signal generator to the RF input of the spectrum
analyzer by cable, as shown in Figure 5-1. Turn on the modulation output switch and the RF
switch.
b) Reset the spectrum analyzer to the default state:
Press 【Reset】.
c) Set center frequency:
Press 【Freq】 and [Center Freq] and set the center frequency with the number keys. The
center frequency of the spectrum analyzer is set to the frequency of the measured signal, i.e.,
1GHz.
d) Set resolution bandwidth:
e) Press [BW], [RBW Auto Man] to set the resolution bandwidth to the appropriate value.
f) Set video bandwidth:
g) Press [BW], [VBW Auto Man] to set the video bandwidth to the appropriate value.
In order to improve measurement accuracy, it is recommended that the ratio of resolution
bandwidth to video bandwidth be greater than 10. Press [RBW/VBW] to change the ratio of
resolution bandwidth to video bandwidth.
h) Switch the spectrum analyzer to the occupied bandwidth measurement mode:
i) Press [Measure], [OBW] , [OBW Off On].
After the occupied bandwidth measurement function is enabled, the spectrum analyzer
switches to the occupied bandwidth measurement interface, and the measurement result is
displayed at the bottom of the screen. See Figure 5-3 for the occupied bandwidth
measurement. The two vertical white lines on the screen visually indicate the frequency range
of occupied bandwidth. If the detection mode of the spectrum analyzer is automatic after the
occupied bandwidth measurement function is enabled, it will automatically switch to the root
mean square detection mode. Users can change the measurement method, occupied
bandwidth, span and other parameters through the corresponding menu to get more accurate
measurement results.

71 / 248
4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Spectrum analysis mode
j) Select measurement method:
k) Press 【Measure】, [Occupied Bandwidth] and [Measurement Method % XdB] to select the
measurement method for occupied bandwidth. The measurement method can be set to the
power percentage method, or the power drop XdB method, the underline marks the currently
selected mode, and the default is the percentage method.

Figure 5-3 Occupied Bandwidth Measurement

l) Change percentage:
If the measurement method is selected as the percentage method, press 【Measure】,
[Occupied Bandwidth] and [% 99%] and use the numeric keys, up and down keys or the knob
to change the percentage value. The percentage setting range is 10% to 99.99%, the
minimum step is 0.01%, and the default is 99%.
m) Change X dB:
If the measurement method is selected as XdB method, press 【Measure】, [Occupied
Bandwidth] and [XdB - 3.00dB], use the numeric keys, up and down keys or the knob to
change the value of XdB. The range of XdB value is set from -0.1dB to -100dB, the minimum
step is 0.01dB, and the default is -3dB.
n) Change the occupied bandwidth span:
Press 【Measure】, [Occupied Bandwidth] and [Channel Span], input the occupied bandwidth
span with the numeric keys and press the corresponding soft key input unit. The default value
is 3MHz.
o) Disable occupied bandwidth measurement:
Press 【Measure】, [Occupied Bandwidth] and [OBW Off On], select Off to exit the occupied
bandwidth measurement, and the interface switches back to the spectrum measurement
interface.

5.1.3 Measurement of adjacent channel power

This Section illustrates the operation method of the adjacent channel power ratio measurement
with the 4957B spectrum analyzer by taking the measurement of the adjacent channel power ratio
of the FM signal as an example.

5.1.3.1 Definition of adjacent channel power ratio

The adjacent channel power ratio (ACPR), also called the adjacent channel leakage power ratio
(ACLR), is the ratio of the transmit power of a channel to the radiated power of its adjacent
channel. It is usually expressed by the ratio of the power in the specified bandwidth to the total

72 / 248
 4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Spectrum analysis mode
channel power at different frequency offsets of adjacent channels. The size of adjacent channel
power mainly depends on the extension of the edge band and noise of the transmitter.
The measurement method for adjacent channel power ratio can replace the traditional two-tone
intermodulation distortion measurement method applied to the nonlinear system test, and the
adjacent channel power ratio measurement result can be expressed as two different ways of
power ratio or power density.

5.1.3.2 Measurement steps

In traditional measurements, for narrowband signals, two-tone intermodulation measurements are

commonly used to evaluate the distortion performance of the transmitter. Wideband modulated
signal that not only has very tight spectral components, but also has a very high peak signal
(called a crest factor). These intermodulation products from the spectral components of the signal
will locate around the spectrum. Since the intermodulation measurement of WBFM signals is very
complicated, and the adjacent channel power ratio (ACPR) is closely related to intermodulation
products caused by nonlinear distortion, the adjacent channel power ratio (ACPR) is a better
method to measure the nonlinear distortion of WBFM signals.
Steps for measuring the adjacent channel power ratio of the WBFM signal using the adjacent
channel power ratio measurement function of 4957B spectrum analyzer are as follows:
a) Set the output frequency of the signal generator:
Use the signal generator to generate a frequency modulation signal, and set the frequency to
1GHz, the power to -10dBm, the frequency modulation offset to 500kHz and the modulation
rate to 10kHz. Connect the output of the signal generator to the RF input of the spectrum
analyzer by cable, as shown in Figure 5-1. Turn on the modulation output switch and the RF
switch.
b) Reset the spectrum analyzer to the default state:
Press 【Reset】.
c) Set the reference level of the spectrum analyzer:
Press 【Amplitude】, [Ref Level] and -10 [dBm];
Press 【Amplitude】and [Scale/Div] to set the scale to 10dB/div.
d) Set the resolution bandwidth and video bandwidth:
Press 【BW】, [RBW Auto Man], set the resolution bandwidth to 30kHz;
Press 【BW】, [VBW Auto Man] to set the video bandwidth to 30kHz or less.
e) Switch to adjacent channel power ratio measurement:
Press 【Measure】, [Adjacent Channel Power] and [ACPR Off On] to switch to the
measurement interface of adjacent channel power ratio.
f) Set the center frequency of the main channel:
Press [Center Freq] and set the center frequency of the main channel with the numeric keys
to 1GHz.
g) Set the main channel bandwidth:
Press [Main Ch BW] and set the bandwidth of the main channel with the numeric keys to
1MHz.
h) h) Set the adjacent channel bandwidth:
Press [Adj Ch BW] and set the required adjacent channel bandwidth with the numeric keys to
2MHz.
i) Set the channel offset:
Press [Ch Offset], set the desired channel offset with the numeric keys, and enter 1MHz.
j) Turn on the adjacent channel power ratio test:
Press [Adj Ch Power OFF ON], and the measurement results will be displayed at the bottom
of the screen. See Figure 5-4 for the measurement of ACPR.

73 / 248
4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Spectrum analysis mode

Figure 5-4 Measurement of ACPR

k) Threshold setting:
The threshold test function will facilitate the user to observe whether the adjacent channel
power exceeds the set range. Press 【Measure】, [Adjacent Channel Power] and [Page Down
1/2] to enter the ACPR threshold test setting menu.
Press [Upper Ch Threshold] and use the numeric keys to enter the upper adjacent channel
threshold;
Press [Down Ch Threshold] and use the numeric keys to enter the lower adjacent channel
threshold.
l) Open the threshold test function:
Press [Threshold Test Off On] to open the threshold test function. If the adjacent channel
power ratio exceeds the set threshold, the screen will be marked with a red background.

5.1.4 TOI measurement

5.1.4.1 Definition of TOI

In the crowded environment of the communication system, the mutual interference between
devices is a common problem. For example, the problem of second-order and third-order
intermodulation distortion is often encountered in the narrowband system. If a system has two
signals (F1 and F2), both signals mix with the generated second harmonic distortion signals
(2F1and 2F2) to generate TOI products 2F2-F1 and 2F1-F2 close to the original signal. High order
intermodulation distortion will also occur. Most of these distortion products are produced by
amplifiers and mixers in the system.
The following describes how to measure the TOI, including illustrating how to display two signals
simultaneously on the spectrum analyzer screen, and introducing how to set the resolution
bandwidth, mixer level and reference level, as well as the use of some marker functions.

5.1.4.2 Measurement steps

a) Connect the tested instrument with the spectrum analyzer as shown in Figure 5-5:
In this example, a 6dB directional coupler and two signal generators set to 1GHz and 1.001ghz
respectively are used. Of course, the frequency of the signal generator may also be other
values, but in this example, the frequency interval must be maintained at about 1MHz.

74 / 248
 4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Spectrum analysis mode

Signal Generator

50Ω RF Input

1GHz

Signal Generator Directional

Coupler
Spectrum Analyzer

1.001GHz

Figure 5-5 Connecting TOI Measurement System

Set the output frequency of one signal generator to 1GHz and the output frequency of the
other signal generator to 1.001GHz to keep 1MHz frequency interval between the two signals
input to the spectrum analyzer.
Set the output amplitude of the two signal generators to be equal (- 20dBm in this example).
b) Set the spectrum analyzer to keep two signals displayed on the spectrum analyzer screen
simultaneously:
Press 【Reset】.
Press 【Freq】, [Center Freq] and 1.001[GHz].
Press 【Frep】, [Span], 5 [MHz].
The user can see two signals in the center of the screen, as shown in Figure 5-6. If the
frequency interval used is different from that used in this example, a span greater than three
times the frequency interval of the signal generator should be selected.
c) Reduce the resolution bandwidth until the distortion product is visual:
Press 【BW】 and use the step key 【↓】 to reduce the resolution bandwidth:
d) Adjust the two signal generators to ensure that the input signal amplitude is equal:
Press 【Mkr】, [Difference Mode], 【Peak】, [Sub Peak], or [Left Peak] or [Right Peak]. Adjust
the signal generator corresponding to the marker until the amplitude difference reading is zero.
If necessary, reduce the video bandwidth.

Figure 5-6 Signal in the Center of Spectrum Analyzer Display

75 / 248
4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Spectrum analysis mode
e) Set the reference level and place the signal peak at the reference level:
Press 【Peak】 and [Max Peak] to read the power value of the peak.
Press 【Amplitude】, [Ref Level].
In order to obtain the best measurement accuracy, the generator should be set at the
reference level as shown in Figure 5-7.

Figure 5-7 Set the Signal Peak at the Reference Level:

f) Set the second marker and measure the distortion product:
Once the marker is activated, the difference marker function can generate a second marker
and the difference between the two markers will be displayed. At this time, the relative
measurement can be carried out conveniently.
Press the 【Peak】 key to activate the marker 1.
Press 【Mkr】[difference mode] to activate the marker 2.
Press 【Peak】, and then press [Left Peak] or [Right Peak] to set the marker 2 on the peak
point of distortion product next to the signal of signal generator. The frequency and amplitude
differences of the two markers are displayed in the marker display area, as shown in Figure
5-8, and the marker amplitude difference is the measured value of TOI.

76 / 248
 4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Spectrum analysis mode

Figure 5-8 Relative Measurement of Internal Modulation Distortion

g) Calculation method of TOI:
The ratio of distortion component level to signal level (expressed in dB) specifies the distortion
of the system, which is not significant, unless the signal level is also specified. The concept of
TOI can be used to specify and preestimate the distortion level of the system. The difference
between the TOI component level and the fundamental wave signal level is twice that
between the fundamental wave signal level and the TOI. Therefore, the TOI can be calculated
by the following formula:
dB im3
T OI  Lin 
2
Where:Lin: two input signal levels, in dBm.
dB
im 3 ： the difference between the third-order intermodulation product and the input

signal level, in dB.

As shown in Figure 5-7, if the difference marker reading is -61.62dB and the signal level is
-20.24dBm, the input TOI is:
TOI= -20.24- (-61.62/2)=10.57(dBm)

5.1.5 Measurement of drift signal

5.1.5.1 Definition of drift signal

If the measured signal is a drift signal, it can only be observed by changing the center frequency at
different times when measured with a spectrum analyzer. If the signal tracking function of the
spectrum analyzer is used, the marker peak will always be displayed on the center frequency of
the spectrum analyzer for measurement.
This part will introduce how to measure the drift signal, and use the signal tracking, marker
function and maximum hold function of the spectrum analyzer to observe the amplitude track and
occupied bandwidth of the drift signal.

77 / 248
4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Spectrum analysis mode
5.1.5.2 Measure the frequency drift of the signal generator

The spectrum analyzer can measure the short-term and long-term stability of the signal generator.
With the maximum track hold function, the spectrum analyzer can display the maximum peak
amplitude and frequency drift of the input signal. If you want to measure the occupied bandwidth of
the signal, you can also use the maximum track hold function.
In this example, the signal tracking function of the spectrum analyzer is used to keep the drift
signal always displayed in the center, and the maximum track hold function of the spectrum
analyzer is used to capture the drift.
a) Set the signal generator to output the signal:
Set the frequency of the signal generator to 300MHz and the amplitude to -80dBm. Connect
the output of the signal generator to the input port of the spectrum analyzer, as shown in
Figure 5-1, and enable its RF output.
b) Set the center frequency, span and reference level of the spectrum analyzer:
Press 【Reset】.
Press [Frep], [Center Freq], 300 [MHz].
Press 【Freq】, [Span] and 10 [MHz].
Press 【Amplitude】, [Ref Level], -10[dBm].
c) Put the marker at the signal peak position, and enable the signal tracking function:
Press 【Peak】 and [Peak Tracking Off On].
Press 【Freq】 and [Signal Tracking Off On].
d) Reduce the span:
Press 【Freq】, [Span] and 500[kHz] to see that the signal remains in the center all the time.
e) Turn off the signal tracking function:
a) Press[Frequency] and [Signal Tracking Off On].
f) Measure signal drift using the maximum hold function:
Press [Trace] , [Max Hold] .
If the signal changes, the maximum hold function will maintain the maximum response to the
input signal.
g) Activate trace 2 and set it to continuous refresh mode:
Press 【Trace】, [Trace 1 2 3] and [Refresh Trace].
h) Change the output frequency of the signal generator:
Slowly change the output frequency of the signal generator to keep it step by 1kHz and
change at ±50kHz. The display of the spectrum analyzer is shown in Figure 5-9.

78 / 248
 4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Spectrum analysis mode

Figure 5-9 Observe the Drift Signal Using the Maximum Hold Function

5.1.6 Noise signal measurement

5.1.6.1 Definition of noise signal

In communication system, the signal-to-noise ratio is usually used to characterize the noise. If the
noise level added to the system is much larger, the signal-to-noise ratio will be worse, resulting in
more difficult in demodulating the modulated signal. In a communication system, the signal to
noise ratio measurement also normally refers to the ratio measurement of carrier to noise.
The following illustrates how to use the marker function of 4957B spectrum analyzer to measure
the SNR and noise. The measurement of SNR when the signal (carrier) is in a single frequency
point is described in the example. If the system under test is a modulation signal, the test process
shall be modified to correct the level of the modulation signal.

5.1.6.2 Measure SNR

a) Set the signal generator to output the signal:

Set the frequency of the signal generator to 1GHz and the power to -10dBm, connect the
signal generator output to the input port of the spectrum analyzer, as shown in Figure 5-1, and
turn on the RF switch.
b) Set the center frequency, span, reference level and attenuator.
Press 【Reset】.
Press [Frep], [Center Freq], 1 [GHz].
Press 【Frep】, [Span], 5 [MHz].
Press 【Amplitude】, [Ref Level], -10[dBm].
Press 【Amplitude】, [Attenuator Auto Man], 40[dB] (the maximum attenuation value of
4957BA/B/C is 30dB, and only 30dB attenuation is set).
c) Place the marker at the peak position of the signal, then place the difference marker at the
noise position with a frequency offset of 200 kHz:
Press 【Peak】 and [Max. Peak].
Press 【Mkr】, [Difference Mode] and 200[kHz].
d) Enable the noise marker function to view the SNR:
79 / 248
4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Spectrum analysis mode
Press [Mkr], [Noise Mkr Off On]. as shown in Figure 5-10.
The reading of SNR is expressed in dB/Hz because the noise value is a value of noise
bandwidth normalized to 1Hz. The ratio is decreased by 10 × log (BW). If it is desired to obtain
noise values at different channel bandwidths, the measurement results will be corrected
according to the current bandwidth. For example, if the data read by the spectrum analyzer is
-85dB/Hz, and the channel bandwidth is 30kHz at this time, the signal-to-noise ratio is:
S/N=85dB/Hz - 10×log（30kHz）=40.2dB/(30kHz)

At this time, if the difference marker is less than a quarter of the signal peak-to-response edge
distance, there is a potential error in the noise measurement.

Figure 5-10 Measure SNR

5.1.6.3 Measure noise with noise marker function

The noise with a 1Hz bandwidth is measured with the noise marker function in the example, and
1GHz external signal is used for measurement.
a) Set the signal generator to output the signal:
Set the frequency of the signal generator to 1GHz and the power to -10dBm. Connect the
output of the signal generator to the input port of the spectrum analyzer, and turn on the RF
switch.
b) Set the center frequency, span, reference level and attenuator.
Press 【Reset】.
Press 【Freq】, [Center Freq] and 999.98[MHz].
Press 【Freq】, [Span] and 1 [MHz].
Press 【Amplitude】, [Ref Level], -10[dBm].
Press 【Amplitude】, [Attenuator Auto Man], 40[dB] (the maximum attenuation value of
4957BA/B/C is 30dB, and only 30dB attenuation is set).
c) Activate the noise marker:
Press 【Mkr】 -> [Noise Mk Off On] -> [Peak] -> [Max] ,
Note that the detection mode at this time will be automatically set to the root mean square
detection mode. If you want to get the noise power values under different bandwidths, such

80 / 248
 4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Spectrum analysis mode
values will be corrected with the current bandwidth of 10×log (BW). For example, if you want
to get the noise power in the 1 kHz band, please add 10 × log (1000) or 30 dB to the read
data.
d) Reduce the measurement error by increasing the sweep time.
Press【BW】, [RBW Auto Man] and 100[kHz].
Press【Swp】, [Swp Time Auto Man] and 3[s].
If average detection is used, increase the sweep time to make the trace data average in a
longer time interval and further reduce the measurement error.
e) Move the marker to 1GHz.
Press【Mkr】and turn the knob in the front panel to make the noise marker readout 1GHz.
The noise marker value is calculated based on 5% of the entire sweep track points which are
centered on the marker position. The position of the noise marker is not located at the peak
point of the signal. Since the peak position of the signal does not have enough track points to
calculate, so when the resolution bandwidth is narrow, the noise marker will also average the
track point below the signal peak. as shown in Figure 5-11.

Figure 5-11 Measure Noise with Noise Marker Function

f) Set the span of the spectrum analyzer to zero with the marker position as the center.
Press 【Peak】and [Mkr→Center Freq].
Press [Frep], [Span], [Span Zero].
Press 【Mkr】 .
At this point the amplitude reading of the noise marker is correct because the average of all points
is based on the same frequency and is not affected by the shape of the resolution bandwidth filter.
The noise marker is calculated based on the average of the interested frequency points. When
performing power measurements at discrete frequency points, it should first tune the spectrum
analyzer to the interested frequency point and then measure the power at zero span.

5.1.7 Distortion measurement

In the crowded environment of the communication system, the mutual interference between
devices is a common problem. For example, the problem of second-order and third-order
intermodulation distortion is often encountered in the narrowband system. If a system has two
signals (F1 and F2), both signals mix with the generated second harmonic distortion signals
(2F1and 2F2) to generate TOI products 2F2-F1 and 2F1-F2 close to the original signal. High order
intermodulation distortion will also occur. Most of these distortion products are produced by
amplifiers and mixers in the system. Most transmission devices and signal generators contain
harmonics, and the harmonic components often need to be measured.

81 / 248
4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Spectrum analysis mode
5.1.7.1 Identify the distortion generated by the spectrum analyzer

The spectrum analyzer inputs a large signal, which will cause distortion of the spectrum analyzer
and further affect the distortion measurement results of the real signal. Through the attenuator
setting, you can determine which signal is the distorted signal generated inside the spectrum
analyzer. In this example, the input signal generated by the signal generator will be used to explain
whether the spectrum analyzer generate harmonic distortion.
a) Set the signal generator to output the signal:
Set the frequency of the signal generator to 200MHz and the power to 0dBm. Connect the
output of the signal generator to the input port of the spectrum analyzer, as shown in Figure
5-12, and turn on the RF switch.
b) Set the center frequency and span of the spectrum analyzer:
Press 【Reset】.
Press 【Freq】, [Center Freq] and 400[MHz].
Press 【Freq】, [Span] and 500 [MHz].
It can be seen from the track of the spectrum analyzer that the harmonic distortion generated
by the signal has 200MHz frequency offset from the original 200MHz signal, as shown in
Figure 5-12.
c) Set the center frequency of the spectrum analyzer to the position of the first harmonic
distortion.
Press 【Peak】and [Sub Peak].
Press 【Peak】and [Mkr→Center Freq].
d) Set the span to 50MHz and reset the center frequency.
Press 【Freq】, [Span] and 50 [MHz].
Press 【Mkr→】and [Mkr→Center Freq].
e) Set the attenuator to 0dB.
Press 【Amp】， [Atten Auto/Man] and 0[dB].
Press 【Peak】 and [Peak Tracking Off On].
Press 【Mkr】and [Difference Mode].

Figure 5-12 Observed Harmonic Distortion

f) Increase the attenuator setting to 10dB:
Press 【Amp】， [Atten Auto/Man] and 10[dB].
82 / 248
 4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Spectrum analysis mode
Observe the reading of the difference marker, as shown in Figure 5-13. This reading is the
distortion difference generated by the attenuator at 0dB and 10dB. When the attenuator
changes, if the difference frequency marker reading is greater than or equal to 1dB, it
indicates that the spectrum analyzer has produced certain distortion. If the difference marker
reading is unobvious, the attenuation can also be increased.

Figure 5-13 Set the Attenuator to 10dB

The amplitude reading of the difference marker comes from two sources: First, the increase of RF
attenuation will reduce the signal-to-noise ratio, making the reading positive; Second, the
harmonic distortion generated by the spectrum analyzer circuit is reduced, which will make the
reading to be negative. The larger the reading, the greater the measurement error. The absolute
amplitude of the difference marker reading can be reduced by changing the attenuator.

5.1.7.2 Fast harmonic measurement method

The harmonic component of the signal with the frequency of 1GHz and power of -10dBm
generated by the signal generator is measured in this example.
a) Set the signal generator to output the signal:
Set the frequency of the signal generator to 1GHz and the power to -10dBm, connect the
signal generator output to the input port of the spectrum analyzer, as shown in Figure 5-1, and
turn on the RF switch.
b) Set the start and stop frequencies of the spectrum analyzer.
Press 【Reset】 key.
Press 【Reset】, [Start Freq], 800 [MHz], [Stop Freq], 2.5 [GHz].
The fundamental wave and second harmonic wave are displayed on the screen, as shown in
Figure 5-14.

83 / 248
4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Spectrum analysis mode

Figure 5-14 Input Signals and Harmonics

c) Set video bandwidth and smooth noise to improve resolution.
Press 【BW】, [VBW Auto Man] to enable the manual mode.
Use the step decrement key 【↓】 to reduce the video bandwidth.
d) Set the fundamental wave peak level as the reference level to improve the measurement
accuracy.
Press 【Peak】, [Max Peak] to read the peak power.
Press 【Amplitude】, [Ref Level] to set to the peak power. The results are shown in Figure
5-15.

Figure 5-15 Set the Signal Peak at the Reference Level to Obtain the Maximum
Accuracy
e) Activate the marker 2.
Press 【Mkr】[Difference Mode] and 【Peak】[Sub Peak].
At this time, the fixed marker is marked on the fundamental wave, and the active marker
is located on the peak point of the second harmonic, as shown in Figure 5-16.

84 / 248
 4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Spectrum analysis mode

Figure 5-16 Measure the Second Harmonic with marker difference

f) Measure harmonic distortion (method 1).
The figure shows that the amplitude difference between the fundamental wave and the
second harmonic is about - 60dB, or the harmonic distortion is 0.1%. (see Figure 5-17).

－60

－50
失真幅度 (单位 dBc)

－40

－30

－20

－10

0.1 1.0 10.0 100 谐波失真百分比％

Figure 5-17 Harmonic Distortion Amplitude Percentage Change

To measure the third harmonic, press the [Right Peak] key again and continue reading
the amplitude ratio of other harmonics to the fundamental wave.

g) Measure harmonic distortion (method 2).

Press 【Amp】, [Amp Unit] and [Volt].
At the moment, the difference marker unit automatically changes to volt. An easy way to
determine the distortion percentage is to change the unit to volt. Move the decimal point of the
scale shown by the difference marker to the right by two digits to get the distortion
percentage. The minimum scale displayed is 0.01 or one percent.

85 / 248
4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Spectrum analysis mode
5.1.7.3 Accurate harmonic measurement method

The steps of this method are slightly tedious, but because each signal is measured within a small
sweep width and resolution bandwidth, the signal-to-noise ratio is improved, and the measurement
result is more accurate. The following describes how to measure the harmonic of 1GHz signal.
a) Set the signal generator to output the signal:
Set the frequency of the signal generator to 1GHz and the power to -10dBm, connect the
signal generator output to the input port of the spectrum analyzer, as shown in Figure 5-1, and
turn on the RF switch.
b) Set the start and stop frequencies of the spectrum analyzer:
Press 【Reset】 key.
Press 【Reset】, [Start Freq], 800 [MHz], [Stop Freq], 2.5 [GHz].
c) Set video bandwidth and smooth noise to improve resolution:
Press 【BW】, [VBW Auto Man] to enable the manual mode.
Use the step decrement key 【↓】 to reduce the video bandwidth.
d) Reduce the span by using the signal tracking function:
Press 【peak】 key to activate the marker to search for the signal peak.
Press 【Freq】 and [Signal Tracking Off On].
Press 【Freq】, [Span] and 100 [kHz].
e) Turn off signal tracking.
Press 【Freq】 and [Signal Tracking Off On].
f) The best amplitude measurement accuracy can be obtained by moving the signal peak to the
top line.
Press 【Peak】, [Max Peak] to read the peak power.
Press 【Amplitude】, [Ref Level] to set to the peak power. The results are shown in Figure
5-18.

Figure 5-18 Input Signal displayed within 100kHz Span

g) Set the center frequency step as the fundamental wave signal frequency value.
Press 【Freq】, [Step Freq Auto Man] and 1[GHz].
h) Measure the second harmonic.
Press 【Mkr】, [Mkr→], [Mkr→Center Freq] and step key 【↑】. The central frequency of the

86 / 248
 4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Spectrum analysis mode
spectrum analyzer is shifted to the second harmonic by step operation. Press 【Peak】, [Max
Peak] to read the peak power.
Press 【Amplitude】, [Ref Level] to set to the peak power. Adjust the harmonic peak to the
reference level, and the second harmonic amplitude is shown in Figure 5-19.

Figure 5-19 Second Harmonic Amplitude

i) Calculate harmonic distortion.
The change in percent of distortion between the second harmonic and the fundamental
wave is shown in Figure 5-17. The unit can be converted into volt to read out the voltage ratio
of the two signals.
j) Measure other harmonics.
Repeat steps (i) to (j) for other harmonics to be measured. Calculate the percentage of each
harmonic distortion.
The total harmonic distortion percentage of the signal is also a parameter that is to be tested
often. To test this parameter, the amplitude of each harmonic must be measured in linear
units (such as volt), instead of relative unit dBc. Press 【Amp】, [Amp Unit] and [Volt] The
amplitude unit is volt. The measured signal amplitude value is used to calculate the total
harmonic distortion in the following equation:

THD 
100  A 
2
2
 A3       An 
2 2

%
A1
Where:

A1 —— fundamental wave amplitude, unit: volt

A2 —— second harmonic amplitude, unit: volt
A3 —— third harmonic amplitude, unit: volt
An —— Nth harmonic amplitude, unit: volt
If the signal amplitude can be measured carefully in the steps in the previous example, the
harmonic distortion percentage measured in this process is very accurate.

87 / 248
4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Spectrum analysis mode
5.1.8 Pulsed RF signal measurement

5.1.8.1 Definition of pulsed RF signal

Pulsed RF signal is a series of RF pulses with the same repetition frequency, constant pulse width,
constant shape and amplitude. Several methods for measuring the parameters of pulsed RF
signals will be illustrated in this section. Such methods will explain how to measure the center
frequency, pulse width and pulse repetition frequency. In addition, the measurement of peak pulse
power will also discussed.
The resolution bandwidth has a great influence on the measurement of pulsed RF signal. The
relationship between resolution bandwidth and pulse repetition frequency must be understood. If
the resolution bandwidth is narrower than the pulse repetition frequency, only individual frequency
components of the pulsed RF signal are displayed on the screen, which is called as narrowband
mode. If the resolution bandwidth is wider than the pulse repetition frequency, it is called as the
broadband mode. At the moment, the spectrum envelope drawn by the pulse burst divided by the
pulse repetition frequency can be seen.

5.1.8.2 Measurement of center frequency, SLR and pulse width of pulsed RF signal

a) Set the signal generator to output the signal:

Set the frequency of the signal generator to 1GHz and the power to -20dBm. Connect the
output of the signal generator to the input port of the spectrum analyzer, as shown in Figure
5-1. The pulse modulation is set to the repetition frequency of 1kHz and the pulse width of
900ns. Enable the pulse modulation and the RF output.
b) Set the spectrum analyzer:
The pulsed RF signal is generally measured in broadband mode. In order to ensure that the
video filter does not interfere with the measurement results, the video bandwidth is set to
3MHz.
Press 【Reset】 key.
Press [Frep], [Center Freq], 1 [GHz].
Press 【Freq】, [Span], 10[MHz], 【Swp】and [Swp Time Auto Man] 60[ms].
Press【BW】, [RBW Auto Man], 100[kHz], [VBW Auto Man] and 100[kHz].
Press 【BW】, [Detection] and [Positive peak] to activate positive peak detection.
Select the center frequency function and adjust the span so that the center side lobe and at
least one pair of side lobes are displayed on the screen, as shown in Figure 5-20.

88 / 248
 4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Spectrum analysis mode

Figure 5-20 Main and Side Lobes

Increase the sweep time (sweeping slows down) until the figure is filled and becomes a solid
line, as shown in Figure 5-21. If the spectral line isn‘t filled in, the instrument is not in
broadband mode. In this case, the following measurement steps for side lobe ratio, pulse
width and peak pulse power are not applicable, and the resolution bandwidth has to be set to
greater than 1kHz.

Figure 5-21 Track Displayed in a Solid Line

c) Read out the pulse center frequency and main lobe amplitude:
Press [peak];
At this time, the marker reading is the pulse center frequency and main lobe amplitude.
d) when the marker is at the center frequency of the main lobe, measure the side lobe ratio:
Press 【Peak】,【Mkr】, [Difference Mode] 【Peak】and [Sub Peak].
The amplitude difference between the main lobe and the side lobe is the side lobe ratio, as

89 / 248
4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Spectrum analysis mode
shown in Figure 5-22.

Figure 5-22 The Marker Displays the Side Lobe Ratio

e) Measure the pulse width, which is equal to the reciprocal of the frequency difference between
the peak points of the two side lobe envelopes:
Press 【Mkr】, [Difference Mode], 【Peak】[Right Peak] and [Right Peak].
At the moment, the reciprocal of the frequency difference of the difference marker is the pulse
width, as shown in Figure 5-23. To obtain the most accurate pulse width value, you can
manually adjust the marker position and measure the distance between two adjacent side
lobes crossing the zero point. If the resolution bandwidth is reduced to make the zero crossing
sharper, the measurement accuracy is higher.

Figure 5-23 The Marker Displays the Pulse Width

5.1.8.3 PRF measurement

Pulse repetition interval (PRI) is the time interval between any two adjacent pulse responses.
a) Set the signal generator to output the signal:
Set the frequency of the signal generator to 1GHz and the power to -20dBm. Connect the
90 / 248
 4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Spectrum analysis mode
output of the signal generator to the input port of the spectrum analyzer. Set the pulse
modulation to the repetition frequency of 1kHz and the pulse width of 900ns. Open the pulse
modulation and the RF output.
b) Set the spectrum analyzer:
Press 【Reset】 key.
Press 【Freq】and 1[GHz].
Press 【Freq】, [Span], 10[MHz], 【Swp】and [Swp Time Auto Man] 1.705[s].
Press【BW】, [RBW Auto Man] and 1[kHz].
Press 【BW】, [VBW Auto Man] and 3[MHz].
Press 【BW】, [Detection] and [Positive Peak] to activate positive peak detection.
Adjust the span so that the main lobe and at least one pair of side lobes are displayed on the
screen.
Readjust the output amplitude of the signal generator to keep it on the screen, and reduce the
sweep time (i.e. speed up the sweep speed) until the display is similar to Figure 5-24.
c) Measure the pulse repetition interval (PRI).
Select 【Swp】and [Swp Type Cont Single].
Press 【Peak】【 , Mkr】, [Difference Mode], 【Peak】and [Sub Peak]. The displayed difference
between the two markers is equal to the pulse repetition interval (PRI), and its reciprocal is the
pulse repetition frequency (PRF).

Figure5-24 Measure the Pulse Repetition Frequency (PRF)

5.1.8.4 Peak pulse power measurement

Now that the main lobe amplitude and pulse width are given, and the resolution bandwidth of the
spectrum analyzer can be easily got, thus the peak pulse power can be obtained from these
parameters.
If the spectrum analyzer is in broadband measurement mode:
a) Peak pulse power = (main lobe amplitude) -（20 log Teff×BW i）
Where:
b) Teff - pulse width, unit: Second
c) BW i——Impact bandwidth, Hertz (resolution bandwidth used to measure pulse width when
91 / 248
4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Spectrum analysis mode
the value is 1.5)
If the spectrum analyzer is in narrowband measurement mode:

d) Peak pulse power = (main lobe amplitude) -(20 log Teff/T)

Where:
e) Teff - pulse width, unit: Second
T——pulse repetition frequency
The phenomenon that the peak pulse power is not equal to the amplitude of the main lobe is called
pulse desensitization. The pulse signal will not reduce the sensitivity of the spectrum analyzer.
Specifically, the apparent desensitization is due to the fact that the power of the pulse modulated
continuous wave (CW) carrier is allocated to a large number of spectrum components (i.e. carrier
and sideband). Therefore, each spectrum component contains only a part of the total power.

For measuring the main lobe amplitude, change the attenuator of

the spectrum analyzer and verify that the main lobe amplitude does not
Notice change with it. If the change exceeds 1dB, the spectrum analyzer is in
the gain compression state, and the attenuation of the attenuator must
be increased.

5.1.9 Signal generation measurement (option)

The generation and measurement mode of signal source is independent source mode, and the
independent source mode is point frequency source mode, which can realize the signal output of
single frequency point and fixed power.

5.1.9.1 Signal generation measurement

In the signal generation measurement mode, the fixed frequency signal is output in the following
steps:
a) Press【Measure】→[Page Down 1/2]→[Signal Generation]→[Signal Generation Off On],
and in the default state, select the point frequency source 3.25GHz output after the signal
source switch is turned on.
b) Press【Measure】→[Page Down 1/2]→[Signal Generation]→[Freq 3.25GHz] and set the
frequency of the output signal.
c) Press【Measure】→[Page Down 1/2]→[Signal Generation]→[High Power] to set the power of
the output signal to high power output.
d) Press【Measure】→[Page Down 1/2]→[Signal Generation]→[Low Power] to set the power of
the output signal to low power output.
e) Press【Measure】→[Page Down 1/2]→[Signal Generation]→[Manual Power -18dBm] to set
the power of the desired output signal power according to the needs of users.The signal with
output frequency of 1GHz and output power of 0dBm is shown in Figure 5-25 below:

92 / 248
 4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Spectrum analysis mode

Figure 5-25 Point Frequency Source Output Signal

5.1.10 Interference map (option)

The interference map option can be used for RSSI test and ACPR test, and the test results can be
marked on the map in real time according to time or distance. The test results on the map can be
saved in the instrument for future recalling. Because the offline map is too large, the map stored
internally when the instrument leaves the factory is the map of the user's province or country.
Maps of other provinces or countries can be downloaded from the external network disk or the
Company's website, and the downloaded maps are placed in the offline map folder of the
instrument or SD card.

5.1.10.1 RSSI measurement

RSSI measurements are set as follows:

a) Press 【Measure】→[Interference Map]→[Interference Map Off On]. By default, when the
interference map switch is turned on, the measurement mode is RSSI measurement;
b) Press 【Measure】→[Center Freq] to set the frequency of the signal to be measured.
c) Press【Measure】→[Inference Map]→[Measure] →[RSSI] to set the colors marked on the map
for different powers of the received signal.
d) Press 【Measure】 →[Interference Map] →[Distance Time] → [Repetition Type Time Distance]
to set the method according to time interval or moving distance when marking information on
the map.
e) Press【Measure】→[Interference Map] →[Distance Time] → [Repetition Time] to set the time
interval of data marking on the map.
f) Press 【Measure】 →[Interference Map] →[Distance Time] → [Repetition Time] to set the
distance of data marking on the map.
g) Press 【Measure】 →[Interference Map]→[Start Acquisition] to start RSSI test and mark the
test results on the map.

5.1.10.2 Adjacent channel power ratio (ACPR) measurement

ACPR measurements are set as follows:

a) Press 【Measure】→[Interference Map]→[Interference Map Off On]. By default, when the
93 / 248
4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Spectrum analysis mode
interference map switch is turned on, the measurement mode is RSSI measurement;
b) Press 【Measure】→[Center Freq] to set the frequency of the signal to be measured.
c) Press【Measure】 →[Interference Map]→ [Measure]→[ACPR] to set the adjacent channel
power ratio measurement.
d) Press【Measure】 →[Interference Map]→ [Measure]→[ACPR] →[Main CHBW] to set the main
channel bandwidth.
e) Press【Measure】 →[Interference Map]→ [Measure]→[ACPR] →[Adj CHBW] to set the
adjacent channel bandwidth.
f) Press【Measure】 →[Interference Map]→ [Measure]→[ACPR] →[Ch Space] to set the
channel space.
g) Press 【Measure】 →[Interference Map] →[Distance/Time] → [Repetition Type Time Distance]
to set the method according to time interval or moving distance when marking information on
the map.
h) Press 【Measure】 →[Interference Map] →[Distance/Time] → [Repetition Time] to set the
time interval of data marking on the map.
i) Press 【Measure】 →[Interference Map] →[Distance/Time] → [Repetition Time] to set the
distance of data marking on the map.
j) Press 【Measure】 →[Interference Map]→[Start Acquisition] to start ACPR test and mark the
test results on the map.

94 / 248
 4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Spectrum analysis mode
5.2 Menu Structure
频率 扫宽 幅度 幅度单位 幅度单位

中心频率 频率 扫宽 参考电平 dBW

信号标准 dBm
0.0dBm
信号跟踪
表头 扫宽 > 关 开 全扫宽 参考位置 dBmV dBV

起始频率 信号搜索 零扫宽 衰减器

表尾 dBuV dBA
自动 手动

终止频率 > 上次扫宽 刻度/格

上一页 Volt dBmA
10.0dB
步进频率 翻页2/2 刻度类型
下一页 > Watt dBuA
自动 手动 对数 线性
信号标准 幅度单位
立即调用 > < 返回 > A >
-- dBm
信道号 前置放大器
翻页1/2 翻页2/2
-- 关 开

取消 翻页1/2 < 返回 < 返回

带宽 检波 光标 光标->

分辨率带宽 光标 光标->
自动
自动 手动 123456 中心频率
视频带宽 光标->
标准 普通模式
自动 手动 步进频率
视频类型 光标->
正峰值 差值模式
线性 对数 起始频率
平均 噪声光标 光标->
负峰值
关 开 关 开 终止频率
SPAN/RBW 计数器
取样 >
100 关 开
RBW/VBW 均值 < 返回
光标-> >
1
检波 均方根 光标关闭
>
自动

> < 返回 全部关闭

Figure 5-28 Structure of Frequency, Amplitude, Bandwidth and Marker Menu

95 / 248
4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Spectrum analysis mode
触发 触发 扫描 扫描点数 编辑列表 扫描
扫描时间 扫描模式
自由触发 默认 201 增加段
自动 手动 线性 列表
扫描类型
视频触发 快速 501 删除段 编辑列表 >
连续 单次
外部触发
> 重新扫描 1001 清空列表 存储列表
1.50V
触发极性 扫描方式
< 返回 > 2001 > 调用列表 > A
正 负 [默认]
触发延时 触发
> 4001 完成编辑
1.000us [自由触发]
扫描点数
> > < 返回 取消编辑
[1001]
翻页
< 返回 >
1/2

频率
迹线 极限 编辑极限 A
迹线 极限
中心频率 频率 表头
1 2 3 上 下

刷新迹线
扫宽 > 极限
幅度 表尾
关 开

起始频率
最大保持 测试
增加点 上一页
关 开

终止频率
最小保持 编辑极限 > 删除点 下一页

步进频率 偏移
保持迹线 上一点 立即调用
自动 手动 0.0dB
信号跟踪 声音报警
隐藏迹线 终止频率 下一点 删除
关 开 关 开
步进频率
存储极限 设为默认 全部删除
自动 手动
信号跟踪
调用极限 > A < 返回 取消
关 开

Figure 5-29 Structure of Sweep, Trace and Limit Menu

96 / 248
 4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Spectrum analysis mode

频率
峰值 文件 文件管理 存储位置

存储状态 选择源文件 内部
中心频率
最大峰值
选择目标文
调用状态> A SD卡
次峰值
扫宽 > 件

存储数据 开始拷贝 USB

起始频率
左邻峰值
调用数据> A 删除文件
终止频率
右邻峰值
存储图片 >
步进频率
最大值 信号跟踪
自动 手动 默认状态 < 返回
关 开
信号跟踪
最小值 文件管理>
关 开
峰值跟踪
信号标准 存储位置
>
关 -- 开 [内部]
光标->
信道号
中心频率
--

Figure 5-30 Structure of Peak and File Menu

97 / 248
4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Spectrum analysis mode

测量 场强 A
通道功率 场强
场强测量 > 编辑天线
占用带宽 通道功率 关 开
占用带宽 关 开
通道功率 > 调用天线 > 增加编辑点
关 开
中心频率
占用带宽 > 测量方法
编辑天线 > 删除编辑点
百分比 XdB
通道带宽
邻道功率 > 百分比 保存天线 清空所有点
99.00%
通道扫宽
杂散模板 > XdB > >
-3.00dB
>
终止频率
载噪比 > 通道扫宽 < 返回 完成编辑
< 返回
步进频率
关闭测量 > 取消编辑 >
自动 手动
信号跟踪
翻页1/2 > < 返回
关 开

IQ捕获 载噪比 杂散模板 邻道功率

IQ捕获 载噪比 杂散模板 邻道功率

测量
关 开 关 开 关 开 关 开

音频解调 > 参考通道带宽

开始捕获 中心频率 中心频率
1.000MHz

捕获时间 IQ捕获 > 载波带宽 调用极限 主信道带宽

> A
1.000ms 3.000MHz 文件到模板 3.000MHz
捕获模式 B 干扰地图 > 噪声带宽 参考功率 邻道带宽
单次 连续 3.000MHz 峰值 通道 3.000MHz
采样率 信号发生 > 频率偏移 峰值光标 信道偏移
C
5.000MHz 3.000MHz 关 开 3.000MHz
触发
> 终止频率
上页信息
[自由触发] >
存储名称 关闭测量 步进频率
< 返回 下页信息 翻页1/2 >
[IQCapt...] 自动 手动

翻页2/2 信号跟踪
< 返回 < 返回 < 返回
关 开

触发 音频解调 解调类型 邻道功率

音频解调 门限测试
自由触发 调频
关 开 关 开
外部触发 解调类型 上邻道门限
> 调幅
1.50V 调频 0.0dB
触发极性 解调时间 上边带 下邻道门限
正 负 100.00ms 0.0dB
触发延时 解调模式
下边带
1.000us 间歇 连续
音量 >
> 翻页2/2
95
信号跟踪
< 返回 > < 返回 < 返回
关 开
信号跟踪
< 返回
关 开

Figure 5-31 Measure Menu Structure

98 / 248
 4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Spectrum analysis mode
RSSI B 干扰地图 C 信号发生
优秀:≥ 干扰地图 信号发生
0.0dBm
> 关 开 关 开

很好:≥ 测量 频率
-20.0dBm
> 存储调用 > 存储调用 3.25GHz
RSSI >
好:≥ 保存采集数据
-40.0dBm
测量 > 高功率
邻道功率比 >
一般:≥ 保存CSV文件
-60.0dBm
距离时间 > 低功率
中心频率
差:˂ 保存BMP文件 手动功率
开始采集
-60.0dBm -18.0 dBm
分辨率带宽
调用采集数据
< 返回 放大 >
检波
自动
>
< 返回
检波 缩小 < 返回

< 返回
自动
< 返回

邻道功率比
标准
主信道带宽 距离时间
3.000MHz
正峰值 重复类型
时间 距离
邻信道带宽
3.000MHz
负峰值 重复时间
10.000s
信道间隔
3.000MHz
取样 重复距离
100m
邻道门限
0.0dB
均值 全部删除
好:≥
0.0dBm
均方根
差:˂
0.0dBm
< 返回
<
< 返回

Figure 5-32 Measure Menu Structure

99 / 248
4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Spectrum analysis mode

5.3 Menu Description

5.3.1 Frequency menu 1/2

·[Center frequency]: Press 【Freq】 → [Center Frequency], select

[GHz], [MHz], [kHz] and [Hz] in the frequency unit menu with the
numeric keys on the front panel, or use the 【↑】【↓】keys and the knob
to set the center frequency value.
频率
·[Span]: Press【Freq】→[Sweep] and open the span setting submenu.

中心频率 For details, please refer to the description of the [Span] menu.
·[Start frequency]: Press 【Freq】→ [Start Frequency] to select [GHz],
[MHz], [kHz] and [Hz] in the frequency unit menu with the numeric keys
扫宽 > on the front panel, or use the【↑】【↓】keys and the knob to set the start
frequency value.
起始频率 ·[Stop Frequency]: Press 【Freq】→ [Stop Frequency] to select [GHz],
[MHz], [kHz] and [Hz] in the frequency unit menu with the numeric keys
on the front panel, or use the【↑】【↓】keys and the knob to set the stop
终止频率
frequency value.

步进频率 ·[Step Frequency]: Press 【Freq】→ [Step Frequency] to select [GHz],

[MHz], [kHz] and [Hz] in the frequency unit menu with the numeric keys
自动 手动
on the front panel, or use the【↑】【↓】keys and the knob to set the step
信号标准 frequency value.
>
-- ·[Signal Standard]: Click this menu to pop up the signal standard
信道号 menu, including[Header],[Footer],[Page Up],[Page Down],[Recall
-- Immediately]and other soft menus, press [Recall Immediately]to select
the required signal standard file.

翻页1/2 ·[Channel No.]: Click the menu to display the content and number of
the selected signal standard.

·[Special Notes]: The setting of the channel number shall be carried

out under the premise of loading the signal standard, otherwise a
prompt that it cannot be set will pop up.

100 / 248
 4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Spectrum analysis mode
5.3.2 Frequency menu 2/2

·[Signal Tracking Off On]: Click this menu, and select whether to
频率 track the signal. After each sweep, the signal tracking function will
place the activated marker on the peak point of the signal and set the
peak frequency as the center frequency. Enable [Signal Tracking On
信号跟踪 Off] to automatically keep the slowly drifting signal in the center of the
display screen.
关 开 ·[Signal Search]: Click this menu, the menu will search for the signal
within the current span, and place the activated marker on the peak
point of the signal. In case of no signal within the current span, the
信号搜索 prompt of search failure will be given.
·[Channel No.]: Click the menu to display the content and number of
the selected signal standard.
翻页2/2 ·[Special Notes]: The setting of the channel number shall be carried
out under the premise of loading the signal standard, otherwise a
prompt that it cannot be set will pop up.

5.3.3 Sweep menu

·[Span]: Press 【Freq】 → [Span] to set the span value in the current
扫宽
state. Then select [GHz], [MHz], [kHz] and [Hz] in the frequency unit
menu with the numeric keys on the front panel, or press the [↑], [↓]
扫宽 keys and the knob to set the span. The span is stepped by1,2and5.

·[Full Span]: Press 【Freq】 → [Span] →[Full Span] to set the span
全扫宽 in the current measurement state as the maximum span value.

·[Zero Span]: Press 【Freq】 → [Span] →[Zero Span] to set the span
零扫宽 in the current measurement state as the minimum span value and set
the full span value as 0Hz.
上次扫宽 ·[Last Span]: Press【Freq】 → [Span] → [Last Span], and set the
span in the current measurement state as the span value set last time.
> ·[Special Notes]: Full and zero span functions are invalid when
some measurement functions are enabled.
< 返回

101 / 248
4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Spectrum analysis mode
5.3.4 Amplitude menu

·[Ref Level]: Press [Amplitude] → [Ref Level], and then select [dBuV],
[-dBuV], [mV] and [uV] in the frequency unit menu with the numeric
keys on the front panel, or use the 【↑】
【↓】keys and the knob to set it.

·[Ref Pos]: Press【Amplitude】→ [Ref Pos], and select the position of

幅度 the reference line in the rectangular coordinate graph by clicking the
corresponding numeric key.
参考电平
·[Atten Auto/Man]: Press 【Amplitude】→[Atten Auto Man] to adjust
0.0dBm
the input attenuation of the spectrum analyzer. In the automatic mode,
the input attenuator is associated with the reference level. In the
参考位置 manual mode, the attenuation of the attenuator can be adjusted by
numeric keys, step key or knob. The attenuation range is 0dB ~ 50dB.
衰减器
·[Scale/Div]: Press 【Amplitude】→[Scale/Div] to adjust the size of the
自动 手动
screen grid line. Then select the frequency unit with the numeric keys
刻度/格 on the front panel, or use the 【↑】【↓】 keys and the rotating knob to set
10.0dB it. Select between 0.1dB/div and 20dB/div. The default value is
10dB/div.
刻度类型
对数 线性 ·[Scale Log Line]: Press【Amplitude】→[Scale Log Line] to select the
vertical axis scale type of log or linear. Log scale is generally in dBm,
幅度单位 and linear scale is generally in mV by default.
>
dBm
·[Amp Unit] Press【Amplitude】→[Amp Unit], and select the units of the
前置放大器 vertical axis, including [dBm], [dBmV], [dBuV], [Volt], and [Watt].
关 开 ·[Pre Amp Off On]: This function is used to control the On/Off state of
the preamplifier. Such function will be activated only when the
reference level is less than-40dBm.
·[Special Notes]: When the preamplifier is opened, don‘t input the
signal of>+13dbm, otherwise the instrument will be damaged.

102 / 248
 4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Spectrum analysis mode
5.3.5 Bandwidth menu

·[RBW Auto Man]: Press 【BW】, [RBW Auto Man], and set the
resolution bandwidth from 1Hz to 10MHz. In manual mode, the
resolution bandwidth can be changed in steps of 1, 3 and 10with
numeric keys, step key or knob. In automatic mode, it changes with the
span at the SPAN/RBW ratio. The 10 MHz resolution bandwidth is not
带宽 automatically associated with the span and needs to be set manually.

·[VBW Auto Man]: Press 【BW】 → [VBW Auto Man]to adjust the
分辨率带宽 video bandwidth displayed in the active function zone. Adjust the video
自动 手动 bandwidth with the range from 1Hz to 10MHz. In manual mode, use
the numeric keys, step keys or knob to change the video bandwidth in
视频带宽 steps of 1, 3, and 10. In the automatic mode, the RBW/VBW ratio
changes with resolution bandwidth.
自动 手动
·[Ave Off On]: Press 【BW】 → [Ava Off/On] to select the averaging
平均 function. This function continuously averages the traces to achieve a
smooth trace.
关 开
·[SPAN/RBW]: press 【BW】→ [SPAN/RBW] to set the ratio of current
SPAN/RBW frequency bandwidth to resolution bandwidth and display it in the input
100 area. The default value is 100. This ratio is used in the correlation
mode of resolution bandwidth.

RBW/VBW ·[RBW/VBW]: press 【BW】→[RBW/VBW] to set the ratio of current

1 video bandwidth to resolution bandwidth. The default value is 1. If the
resolution bandwidth changes, the video bandwidth will automatically
检波 change to meet the ratio when it is automatic. The ratio is displayed in
> the input zone and used in the association mode of two bandwidths. If
自动 a new ratio is selected, the video bandwidth is changed to meet the
new ratio, while the resolution bandwidth remains unchanged.

·[Detection]: press 【BW】 → [Detection] to pop up the soft menu of

setting detection mode. For details, please refer to the description
of[Detection]menu.

103 / 248
4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Spectrum analysis mode
5.3.6 Detection menu

·[Auto]: Enter the detection menu, and it will automatically default to

the normal mode.
·[Normal] In this mode, when noise is detected, the measurement
results of positive and negative peaks are displayed simultaneously to
检波 achieve a similar display effect to the analog instrument. However, only
positive peak is displayed when the signal is detected. This is the most
自动 common method of detector. The signal and noise base can be seen
simultaneously without losing any signal.
·[PosPeak]: Select the positive peak detection mode. Make sure that
标准 no peak signals are missed, which is suitable for measuring signals
that are very close to the noise base. Select the positive peak detector
when [Max Hold].
正峰值
·[NegPeak]: Select the negative peak detection mode. This mode
enables the trace to display a negative peak level. In most cases, it is
负峰值 used in self-tests of the broadband millimeter wave spectrum analyzer
and is rarely used in measurements. It can fully reproduce the
modulation envelope of the AM signal. Select the negative peak
取样
detector when [Min Hold].
·[Sample]: Set the detector to sample detection mode. It is suitable for
均值 measuring noise signals and can measure noise better than normal
detection methods. It is usually used for video averaging and noise
frequency marker functions.
均方根
·[Ave]: Set the detector to average detection mode. The average of
the sampled data of the trace in each sampling interval is displayed in
< 返回 the average detection mode.
·[Rms]: Set the detector to Rms detection mode. The average of the
sampled data of the trace in each sampling interval is displayed in the
Rms detection mode.
·[Back]: return to the previous menu.

104 / 248
 4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Spectrum analysis mode
5.3.7 Marker menu

·[Marker 1 2 3 4 5 6]: Press【Mkr】→ [Marker 1 2 3 4 5 6] to select

different frequency markers, activate a single frequency marker, place
the frequency marker in the center of the trace, and display these
values in the frequency marker display area in the upper right corner of
the screen.

·[Normal Mode]: Press【Mkr】→[Normal Mode] to display the

光标 frequency and amplitude of the frequency marker. Use the knob, step
key or numeric key to move the active frequency marker. The
光标 displayed amplitude difference is in dBby default.
123456 ·[Difference Mode]: Press 【Mkr】→[Difference Mode] to display the
amplitude difference and frequency difference between the two
普通模式 frequency markers (time difference in case of zero bandwidth). Use the
knob, step key or numeric key to move the active frequency marker.
The displayed amplitude difference is in dB by default.
差值模式
·[Noise Mkr Off On]: Press【Mkr】→[Noise Mkr Off On] and select
noise marker ON/OFF. When the menu is on, activate the noise
噪声光标 marker. The noise marker will read noise power near the activated
关 开 marker that is normalized to the 1 Hz bandwidth. At this time, the
detector is in the Rms detection mode.
计数器
关 开 ·[Counter Off On]: Press 【Mkr】 →[Counter Off On] to open or close the
frequency marker count function. If the frequency marker is not
光标-> > currently activated, an active frequency marker will be activated in the
middle of the screen when the frequency marker count function is
enabled.
光标关闭 ·[Mkr]: By pressing【Mkr】→[Mkr→], soft menus related to the marker
function pop up, which are related to whether the frequency, bandwidth
and frequency marker of the spectrum analyzer are in normal or
全部关闭
difference frequency marker mode. These marker functions allow the
user to change the settings of the spectrum analyzer with the marker
as a reference.

·[Marker Off]: Press 【Mkr】 → [Mkr Off] to close the currently

selected marker and its related functions, such as: [Noise marker].

·[All Off]: Press 【Mkr】 → [All Off] to close all markers and their
related functions, such as: [Noise marker].

105 / 248
4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Spectrum analysis mode
·[Mkr→Center Freq]: Press 【Mkr】→[Mkr→]→[Mkr→Center Freq],
the marker will move to the center frequency, and the reading at the
光标-> center frequency is displayed on the screen.

·[Mkr →Step Freq]: Press 【Mkr】→[Mkr→]→[Mkr→Step Freq] to set

光标-> the stepping amount of the center frequency, that is, the value of the
中心频率 frequency step is equal to the marker frequency. If the difference
marker function is activated, the frequency step value is equal to the
光标-> frequency of the difference marker.

步进频率 ·[Mkr →Start Freq]: Press 【Mkr】→[Mkr→]→[Mkr→Start Freq] to set

the start frequency equal to the marker frequency.
光标-> ·[Mkr →Stop Freq]: Press 【Mkr】→[Mkr→]→[Mkr→Stop Freq] to set
起始频率 the stop frequency equal to the marker frequency.
·[Back]: Return to the previous menu
光标->
终止频率

< 返回

106 / 248
 4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Spectrum analysis mode
5.3.8 Measurement menu

·[Field Strength Meter]: Press 【Measure】→[Field Strength

Measurement], select the field strength measurement function, and
call out the relevant function menu. For details, please refer to the
测量 menu description of [Field Strength Measurement].

·[Ch Power]: Press 【Measure】→[CHPower], select the channel

场强测量 >
power function, and call out the relevant function menu. For details,
please refer to the menu description of [CHPower].
通道功率 >
·[OBW]: Press 【Measure】→[OBW], select the occupied bandwidth
function, and call out the relevant function menu. For details, please
占用带宽 > refer to the menu description of [OBW].

·[Adj CH Power]: Press 【Measure】→[Adj CH Power], select the

邻道功率 >
adjacent channel power function, and call out the relevant function
menu. For details, please refer to the menu description of [Adj CH
杂散模板 > Power].

·[Stray Template]: Press 【Measure】→[Stray Template], select the

载噪比 > stray template function, and call out the relevant function menu. For
details, please refer to the menu description of [Stray Template].
关闭测量
·[Carrier-to-Noise Ratio]: Press 【Measure】→[Carrier-to-Noise
Ratio], select the carrier-to-noise Ratio measurement function, and call
翻页1/2 > out the relevant function menu. For details, please refer to the menu
description of [Carrier-to-Noise Ratio].

·[Close Measurement]: Press 【Measure】→[Close Measurement]

and close measurement.

测量 ·[Audio Demodulation]: Press【Measure】→[Page Down 1/2]→[Audio

Demodulation] to start the audio demodulation function. For details,
please refer to the menu description of [Audio Demodulation].
音频解调 >
·[IQ Capture]: Press【Measure】→[Page Down 1/2]→[IQ Capture] to
start the IQ capture function. For details, please refer to the menu
IQ捕获 >
description of [IQ Capture].

关闭测量

翻页2/2 >

The spectrum analyzer provides the function of field strength measurement, including} [Field
Strength Off On], [Recall Antenna], [Edit Antenna], [Save Antenna] and other related soft menus.
With the corresponding test antenna, the field strength test can be carried out quickly.

107 / 248
4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Spectrum analysis mode

场强 ·[Field Strength Off On]: Press【Measure】→[Field Strength

Measurement]→[Field Measurement Off On] to start or stop the field
场强 strength measurement function.
关 开
·[Recall Antenna]: Press【Measure】→[Field Strength
调用天线 > Measurement]→[Recall Antenna], soft menus such as [Header],
[Footer], [Last Page], [Next Page], [Recall Immediately] and [Delete]
pop up, and you can select and call the saved antenna factor file in the
编辑天线 >
spectrum analyzer

·[Edit Antenna]: Press【Measure】→[Field Strength

Measurement]→[Edit Antenna] to pop up[Add Edit Point],[Delete Edit
Point],[Clear Edit Point],[Complete Editing],[Cancel Editing]and other
保存天线 soft menus for editing antenna factors.

·[Save Antenna]: Press【Measure】→[Field Strength

> Measurement]→[Save Antenna] to save the antenna factor.

·[Back]: Press【Measure】→[Field Strength Measurement]→[Back] to

< 返回
exit the field strength menu and return to the measurement menu.

The spectrum analyzer provides the channel power measurement function. The channel power of
the signal can be measured by setting the relevant parameters in the function menu and selecting
the appropriate resolution bandwidth and sweep width. Please refer to Section 1 Channel Power
Measurement of this chapter for specific operations.

·[Ch Power Off On]: Press 【Measure】→[Ch Power] →[Ch Power Off
On] to start or stop the channel power measurement.
通道功率
·[Center frequency]: Press 【Measure】→[Ch Power] →[Center Freq]
通道功率 and set the center frequency with numeric keys.
关 开 ·[Ch BW]: Press 【Measure】→[Channel Power] → [Channel
Bandwidth] and set the channel bandwidth with the numeric keys.
中心频率 ·[Channel Span]: Press 【Measure】→[Channel Power] → [Channel
Span] and set the channel span with the numeric keys.
通道带宽 ·[Special Notes]: The channel power bandwidth is a frequency width
of the power displayed by the spectrum analyzer within this bandwidth,
while the channel power span is the frequency range over which the
通道扫宽 spectrum analyzer sweeps. The channel power span should be set to
be greater than or equal to the channel power bandwidth. Otherwise,
the spectrum analyzer will automatically set the channel bandwidth
> equal to the channel power span. The ratio of channel power span to
channel power bandwidth remains constant. This ratio remains
constant as the channel power span changes. Changing the channel
< 返回
power bandwidth can change this ratio. For example, when the
channel power span is doubled, the spectrum analyzer will also
increase the channel power bandwidth by the same factor.
The occupied bandwidth measurement of the spectrum analyzer can present the measurement
results in a quick, clear and accurate manner. There are two methods for calculating the occupied
108 / 248
 4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Spectrum analysis mode
bandwidth depending on the modulation method: power percentage method and power drop XdB
method. Users can choose the appropriate bandwidth measurement method according to their
own needs. Please refer to Section 1 Occupied Bandwidth Measurement of this Chapter for
specific operations.

·[OBW Off On]: Press【Measure】→[OBW]→[OBW Off On] to start or

stop the OBW measurement function.
占用带宽
·[Measurement method]: Press 【Measure】→[OWB]
占用带宽 →[Measurement Method % XdB] to select the measurement methods,
关 开 including percentage method and drop XdB method. The occupied
测量方法 bandwidth of the signal is obtained by calculating the bandwidth of the
百分比 XdB portion of the frequency containing a certain percentage of the total
transmitted signal power, and the percentage of power can be set by
百分比 the user. The descending XdB method defines the occupied bandwidth
99.00% as: the distance between the two frequency points when the signal
XdB power drops by XdB on both sides of the frequency point where the
-3.00dB peak power of the signal is located. The X dB of the signal power drop
is set by the user.
通道扫宽 ·[Percent]: Press 【Measure】 →[OWB]→ [Percentage]. If the
percentage measurement method is selected, it is used to set the
> percentage of power.

·[XdB]: Press 【Measure】 →[OWB]→[XdB]. If the drop XdB method

< 返回 is selected, you can set the XdB value of signal power drop.

·[Channel Span]: Press 【Measure】 →[OWB]→[Channel Sweep] to

set the sweep width of occupied bandwidth measurement.
The spectrum analyzer has the measurement function of adjacent channel power ratio. Users can
obtain the measurement results of adjacent channel power ratio by setting channel related
parameters. The threshold test function will facilitate the user to define the adjacent channel
threshold and observe whether the adjacent channel power exceeds the set range. Please refer to
Section 1 Adjacent Channel Power Ratio Measurement of this chapter for specific operations.

109 / 248
4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Spectrum analysis mode

邻道功率 ·[ACPR Off On]: Press 【Measure】→[ACPR] →[ACPR Off On] to start
or stop the ACPR measurement.
邻道功率
·[Center frequency]: Press【Measure】→[ACPR] →[Center Freq] and
关 开
set the center frequency with numeric keys.
中心频率 ·[Main Ch BW]: Press 【Measure】→[ACPR] → [Main CHBW] and set
the main channel bandwidth with the numeric keys.
主信道带宽
·[Adj Ch BW]: Press 【Measure】→[ACPR] → [AdjCHBW] and set
3.000MHz
the adjacent channel bandwidth with the numeric keys.
邻道带宽
·[Ch Offset]: Press 【Measure】→[ACPR] → [Ch Offset] and set the
3.000MHz
channel offset with the numeric keys.
信道偏移
3.000MHz

翻页1/2 >

< 返回

邻道功率 ·[Threshold Test Off On]: Press 【Measure】→[ACPR] → [Threshold

Test Off On] to start or stop the tests for the upper and lower adjacent
门限测试 channel power thresholds.
关 开
·[Upper Adj Ch Threshold]: Press 【Measure】→[ACPR] → [Upper
上邻道门限 Adj Ch Threshold] to set the power threshold of upper adjacent
0.0dB channel test.
下邻道门限 ·[Lower Adj Ch Threshold]: Press 【Measure】→[ACPR] → [Lower
0.0dB Adj Ch Threshold] to set the power threshold of lower adjacent channel
test.
·[Special Notes]: When the threshold test function is started, if the
adjacent channel power ratio exceeds the set threshold, it will be
翻页2/2 marked with a red background.

< 返回

The spectrum analyzer has the function of carrier-to-noise ratio measurement which is used to
measure the ratio of carrier power to noise power.

110 / 248
 4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Spectrum analysis mode
载噪比 ·[CNR Off On]: Press 【Measure】→[CNR]→[CNR Off On] and start
or stop the carrier-to-noise ratio function.
载噪比
关 开 ·[Center frequency]: Press 【Measure】→[CNR] →[Center Freq] and
set the center frequency with numeric keys.
中心频率
·[Carrier Bandwidth]: Press 【Measure】→[CNR] →[Carrier
载波带宽 Bandwidth] and set the carrier bandwidth with numeric keys, with the
3.000MHz default value of3MHz.
噪声带宽 ·[Noise BW]: Press 【Measure】→[CNR] →[Noise BW] and set the
3.000MHz
noise bandwidth with numeric keys, with the default value of3MHz.
频率偏移
3.000MHz ·[Freq Offset]: Press 【Measure】→[CNR] →[Freq Offset] and set the
frequency offset with numeric keys, with the default value of3MHz.

< 返回

The function of stray template is to recall the limit line as a template to measure whether the signal
power is limited by the template. The template can move up and down left and right according to
the center frequency and reference power. The template always moves the center point of the limit
line left and right to the center frequency, and moves the center point up and down to the
reference power point according to the calculated reference power.

杂散模板 ·[Stray Template Off On]: Press 【Measure】→[Stray

Template]→[Stray Template Off On] to start or stop the stray template
杂散模板 function.
关 开
·[Ref Ch BW]: Press 【Measure】→[Stray Template] → [Ref Ch BW]
参考通道带宽 and set the reference channel bandwidth with the numeric keys.
1.000MHz
·[Recall Limit Line]: Press 【Measure】→[Stray Template] →[Recall
调用极限 Limit Line] and show related soft menus,
>
文件到模板 including[Header],[Footer],[Page Up],[Page Down],[Recall
Immediately]and[Delete], the user can select the limit file to be
参考功率
recalled.
峰值 通道
·[Ref Power]: Press 【Measure】→[Stray Template] →[Ref Power] to
峰值光标
set the mode of reference power setting, including taking peak power
关 开
as reference power or channel power as reference power.

终止频率
上页信息 ·[Peak Mkr Off On]: Press 【Measure】→[Stray Template] →[Peak
Mkr Off on] to open or close the peak marker.
步进频率
下页信息 ·[Information on Last Page]: Press 【Measure】→[Stray Template]
自动 手动
→[Information on Last Page] to view the information on the last page.
信号跟踪
< 返回 ·[Information on Next Page]: Press 【Measure】→[Stray Template]
关 开
→[Information on Next Page] to view the information on the next page.

111 / 248
4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Spectrum analysis mode

The IQ capture function is to capture the original IQ data with the capture time, sampling rate,
capture mode and other parameters set by the user, and save them as a data file for data analysis.

·[IQ Capture Off On]: Press【Measure】→[Page Down 1/2]→[IQ Capture]→[IQ

IQ捕获
Capture Off On] to start or stop the IQ capture function.
IQ捕获 ·[Start Capture]: Press【Measure】→[Page Down 1/2]→[IQ Capture]→[Start
关 开 Capture] and select to start IQ capture
开始捕获 ·[Capture Time]: Press【Measure】→[Page Down 1/2]→[IQ Capture]→[Capture
Time] to set the IQ capture time.
捕获时间
·[Capture Mode]: Press【Measure】→[Page Down 1/2]→[IQ
1.000ms
Capture]→[Capture mode] to set the mode of IQ capture as single or
捕获模式 continuous. If the capture mode is set as single, the capture will end only once.
单次 连续 If the capture mode is multiple times, the sweep thread will capture once after
采样率 each sweep. The capture will stop only when the user sets to Stop Capture.
5.000MHz ·[Sampling Rate]: Press【Measure】→[Page Down 1/2]→[IQ
触发 Capture]→[Sampling Rate] to set the sampling rate of IQ capture.
>
[自由触发]
·[Trig]: Press【Measure】→[Page Down 1/2]→[IQ Capture]→[Trigger]. The
存储名称 trigger methods include [Freerun] and [External Trigger]. Select external trigger
[IQCapt...] to set [Trigger Polarity] and [Trigger Delay].

< 返回 ·[Save Name]: Press【Measure】→[Page Down 1/2]→[IQ Capture]→[Save

Name] to save the captured data.

·[Audio Demodulation Off On]: Press【Measure】→[Page Down

音频解调 1/2]→[Audio Demodulation]→[Audio Demodulation Off On] to start or stop
the audio demodulation function.
音频解调
关 开 ·[Demodulation type]: Press 【Measure】→[Page Down 1/2]→[Audio
Demodulation]→[Demodulation Type] to set the demodulation type. You
解调类型 can select the demodulation type of [FM], [AM], [Upper Sideband] or
>
调频 [Lower Sideband].
解调时间 ·[Demodulation Time]: [Page Down 1/2]→[Audio
100.00ms Demodulation]→[Demodulation Time] to set the demodulation time.
解调模式 ·[Demodulation Mode]: Press 【Measure】→[Page Down 1/2]→[Audio
间歇 连续 Demodulation]→[Demodulation Time] to set the demodulation time. Set
音量 the demodulation mode. In intermittent mode, the data is swept for one
95 screen and then demodulated for a period of time according to the
demodulation time, and then the data is swept for one screen and then
> demodulated for a period of time according to the demodulation time, and
that cycle repeats. In continuous mode, the data is continuously
信号跟踪 demodulated after being swept for one screen, and then the data is no
< 返回 longer swept.
关 开
·[Volume]: Press 【Measure】→[Audio Demodulation]→[Volume] to set

112 / 248
 4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Spectrum analysis mode
the speaker volume in the demodulation mode.

5.3.9 Signal generation menu

信号发生 ·[Signal Generation Off On]：Press 【Measure】→[Page Down

1/2]→[Signal Generation]→[Signal Generation Off On] to set the signal
信号发生 source of the signal generation function ON or OFF.
关 开
·[Freq 3.25GHz]： Press 【Measure】→[Page Down 1/2]→[Signal
频率 Generation]→[Freq 3.25GHz], press numeric keys and then soft unit keys to
3.25GHz 【↓】keys and
confirm your entry, or change the output frequency with【↑】
knob.

高功率 ·[High Power]: Press【Measure】→[Page Down 1/2]→[Signal

Generation]→[High Power] and directly set the output power of the signal
source to high power.
低功率
·[Low Power]: Press【Measure】→[Page Down 1/2]→[Signal
Generation]→[High Power] and directly set the output power of the signal
手动功率 source to low power.
-18.0 dBm
·[Manual Power -18dBm]: Press 【Measure】→[Page Down 1/2]→[Signal
>
Generation]→[Manual Power -18dBm], press numeric keys and then soft
【↓】keys and
unit keys to confirm your entry, or change the power with【↑】
knob.
< 返回 ·[Special Notes]: The manual power is set to - 35 ~ - 10dBm, and the
default value is - 18dBm.

113 / 248
4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Spectrum analysis mode
5.3.10 Interference map menu (option)
干扰地图 ·[Interference Map Off On]: Press【Measure】→[Page Down
干扰地图 1/2]→[Interference Map]→[Interference Map Off On] to set interference
关 开 map ON or OFF.

·[Save/Recall]: Press【Measure】→[Page Down 1/2]→[Interference

存储调用 > Map]→[Save/Recall] to open the save/recall submenu

·【Measure】: Press【Measure】→[Page Down 1/2]→[Interference

测量 > Map]→[Measure] to open the measurement submenu

·[Distance/Time]: Press【Measure】→[Page Down 1/2]→[Interference

距离时间 > Map]→[Distance/Time] to open the distance/time measurement
submenu.

开始采集 ·[Start Acquisition]: Press【Measure】→[Page Down

1/2]→[Interference Map]→[Start Acquisition]. and start data
measurement and mark the location and measurement results on the
放大 map. The interval between two marks can be set through the
[Distance/Time] menu.

缩小 ·[Zoom In]: Press【Measure】→[Page Down 1/2]→[Interference

Map]→[Zoom In] and set map Zoom IN.

< 返回 ·[Zoom Out]: Press【Measure】→[Page Down 1/2]→[Interference

Map]→[Zoom Out]. and set map Zoom Out.

存储调用 ·[Save Collected Data]: Press【Measure】→[Page Down

1/2]→[Interference Map]→[Save/Recall]→[Save Collected Data] to
store the collected data to the instrument.
保存采集数据
·[Save CSV File]: Press【Measure】→[Page Down 1/2]→[Interference
Map]→[Save/Recall]→[Save CSV File] to store the collected data as a
file in CSV format.
保存CSV文件
·[Save BMP file]: Press【Measure】→[Page Down 1/2]→[Interference
Map]→[Save/Recall]→[Save BMP File] to store the collected data as
images.
保存BMP文件
·[Recall Collected Data]: Press【Measure】→[Page Down
1/2]→[Interference Map]→[Save/Recall]→[Recall Collected Data] to
调用采集数据 call out the stored historical data for viewing.

< 返回

114 / 248
 4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Spectrum analysis mode
·[RSSI]: Press【Measure】→[Page Down 1/2]→[Interference
测量 Map]→[Measure]→[RSSI] to open the RSSI measurement
submenu.
RSSI > ·[ACPR]: Press【Measure】→[Page Down 1/2]→[Interference
Map]→[Measure]→[ACPR] to open the ACPR measurement
submenu.
邻道功率比 >
·[Center Freq]: Press【Measure】→[Page Down
1/2]→[Interference Map]→[Measure]→[Center Freq] and set the
center frequency.
中心频率
·[RBW]: Press【Measure】→[Page Down 1/2]→[Interference
Map]→[Measure]→[RBW] and set the resolution bandwidth.

分辨率带宽 ·[Detection]: Press【Measure】→[Page Down 1/2]→[Interference

Map]→[Measure]→[Detection] to open the detection submenu.

检波
>
自动

< 返回

距离时间 ·[Repetition Type]: Press【Measure】→[Page Down

1/2]→[Interference Map]→[Distance/Time]→[Repetition Type] and
set the repetition type.
重复类型
时间 距离 ·[Repetition Time]: Press【Measure】→[Page Down
1/2]→[Interference Map]→[Distance/Time]→[Repetition Time] and
set the interval between two acquisitions. The time interval is valid
重复时间 if and only if the repetition type is set to time.
10.000s ·[Repetition Distance]: Press【Measure】→[Page Down
1/2]→[Interference Map]→[Distance/Time]→[Repetition Distance]
重复距离 and set the distance between two acquisitions. The distance is
valid if and only if the repetition type is set to distance.
100m
·[Del All]: Press【Measure】→[Page Down 1/2]→[Interference
Map]→[Distance/Time]→[Del All] and delete all collected data on
全部删除 the map.

115 / 248
4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Spectrum analysis mode
RSSI ·[Excellent]: Press【Measure】→[Page Down 1/2]→[Interference
Map]→[Measure]→[RSSI]→[Excellent] and set the color when the
优秀:≥ measured signal is greater than this value.
0.0dBm
·[Very Good]: Press【Measure】→[Page Down 1/2]→[Interference
很好:≥ Map]→[Measure]→[RSSI]→[Very Good] and set the color when the
-20.0dBm measured signal is greater than this value.

·[Good]: Press【Measure】→[Page Down 1/2]→[Interference

好:≥
Map]→[Measure]→[RSSI]→[Good] and set the color when the
-40.0dBm
measured signal is greater than this value.

一般:≥ ·[General]: Press【Measure】→[Page Down 1/2]→[Interference

-60.0dBm Map]→[Measure]→[RSSI]→[General] and set the color when the
measured signal is greater than this value.
差:˂
·[Poor]: Press【Measure】→[Page Down 1/2]→[Interference
-60.0dBm
Map]→[Measure]→[RSSI]→[Poor] and set the color when the
measured signal is less than this value.
< 返回

邻道功率比 ·[Main Ch BW]: Press【Measure】→[Page Down 1/2] →[Interference

Map]→ [Measure]→[ACPR] →[Main CHBW] and set the main
主信道带宽 channel bandwidth.
3.000MHz
·[Adj Ch BW]: Press【Measure】→[Page Down 1/2] →[Interference
邻信道带宽 Map]→ [Measure]→[ACPR] →[Adj Ch BW] and set the adjacent
3.000MHz channel bandwidth.

·[CHSpace]: Press【Measure】→[Page Down 1/2] →[Interference

信道间隔 Map]→ [Measure]→[ACPR] →[CHSpace] and set the channel space.
3.000MHz
·[Adj Ch Threshold]: Press【Measure】→[Page Down 1/2]
邻道门限 →[Interference Map]→ [Measure]→[ACPR] →[Adj Ch Threshold] and
0.0dB set the adjacent channel threshold.

·[Good]: Press【Measure】→[Page Down 1/2]→[Interference

好:≥ Map]→[Measure]→[ACPR]→[Good] and set the color when the
0.0dBm
measured signal is greater than this value.

差:˂ ·[Poor]: Press【Measure】→[Page Down 1/2]→[Interference

0.0dBm Map]→[Measure]→[ACPR]→[Poor] and set the color when the
measured signal is less than this value.

< 返回

5.3.11 Sweep menu

The sweep time is the time required for the local oscillator of the spectrum analyzer to tune the
selected frequency interval. It directly affects the time it takes to complete a test, and may vary
from span, resolution bandwidth and video bandwidth. In automatic mode, the spectrum analyzer
116 / 248
 4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Spectrum analysis mode
will use the quickest sweep time after the measurement setup is completed. In the manual mode,
the sweep time can be increased to meet specific measurement needs.
In sweep mode, the default mode is linear sweep, and the list sweep function, as an option, can
realize continuous sweep and measurement of multiple frequency bands, including editing list,
save list and recalling list functions to facilitate the users.

·[Swp Time Auto Man]: Press 【Swp】→ [Swp Time] to adjust the sweep
time of the spectrum analyzer. Adjust the sweep time with numeric keys,
step keys or the knob. The underlined Manual indicates that the sweep
time can be set manually. When the automatic mode is selected, the
sweep time will be automatically correlated based on the resolution
bandwidth, frequency bandwidth and video bandwidth settings.

·[Swp Type Cont Single]: Press 【Swp】→ [Swp Type] to set continuous
扫描 sweep mode or single sweep mode.

扫描时间 ·[Swp Again]: Press 【Swp】→[Swp Again] and sweep again.

自动 手动
·[Swp Mode]: Press 【Swp】→[Swp Mode] and set fast sweep or default
扫描类型 sweep.
连续 单次
·[Trigger]: Press 【Swp】→[Trigger] and select the trigger modes of
重新扫描 sweeping, including [Freerun], [Video Trigger], [External Trigger], etc.
Refer to the trigger menu for details.
扫描方式
>
[默认] ·[Swp Points]: Press 【Swp】→[Swp Points] and set the sweep points.
触发 Sweep points can be set as201,501,1001,2001and4001.
>
[自由触发] ·[Swp Mode Lin List]: Press 【Swp】→ [Swp Mode] and select linear or
扫描点数 list mode. Linear sweep refers to sweep at linear frequency spacings with
>
[1001] equal frequency spacing between adjacent measurement points. The list
扫描模式 mode is optional. In the list sweep mode, the spectrum analyzer sweeps
线性 列表 based on the frequency range and other parameters set by the edited list.

编辑列表 ·[Edit List]: This function is a list sweep option. Press 【Swp】 → [Page
Down 1/2] →[Edit List], and open the list editing soft menu. The user can
use [Add Edit Segment], [Delete Edit Segment] and [Clear All Segments]
存储列表
and other soft keys to manage and edit the sweep list. The selected
sweep segment is represented by green font; After editing the sweep
调用列表 segment, press the [Complete Editing] soft key to confirm to return to the
sweep submenu.

·[Save List]: This function is a list sweep option. Press 【Swp】 → [Page
Down 1/2] →[Save List], and store the current edited list in the spectrum
analyzer for subsequent recalls..

·[Recall List]: This function is a list sweep option. Press 【Swp】 →

[Page Down 1/2] →[Recall List], and the sweep list dialog box pops up
to recall or delete the required sweep list.

117 / 248
4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Spectrum analysis mode
5.3.12 Trigger menu
Select the trigger mode of sweeping or measurement, including [Freerun], [Video Trigger],
[External Trigger], [Trigger Polarity] and [trigger Delay]. The user can select the trigger mode
based on the actual demand.

·[Freerun]: If the freerun is set after the一last continuous sweeping or

触发
single sweeping, a new sweep or measurement will be started.

自由触发 ·[Video Trigger]: Set the trigger mode to video trigger. As long as the
input signal exceeds the set video trigger level, sweeping will be

视频触发 triggered. The trigger level value can be set by numeric keys, step
keys or knob, and the green line on the screen indicates the selected
外部触发 trigger level.
1.50V
·[External Trigger]: Set the spectrum analyzer to the external trigger
触发极性 mode. Select sweeping and measurement to synchronize with the next
正 负
voltage cycle.
触发延时 ·[Trigger Polarity]: The control level triggers the positive and negative
1.000us
polarity. .The positive polarity is triggered by the rising edge, and the

> negative polarity is triggered by the falling edge.

·[Trigger delay]: It is allowed to set the time delay of level trigger. The

< 返回 spectrum analyzer will wait within this time period after receiving the
external trigger signal and then start sweeping.

118 / 248
 4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Spectrum analysis mode
5.3.13 Trace menu
The trace menu is used to set the display of trace, and the user can select refresh trace, maximum
hold, minimum hold and other related settings according to different needs of user test.

·[Trace 1 2 3]: Press 【Trace】→【Trace 1 2 3】for trace selection. The

spectrum analyzer provides traces 1, 2, 3, the selected trace number
迹线 and the status menu item where the trace is located are underlined.

迹线 ·[Refresh trace]: Press 【Trace】→【Refresh Trace】to refresh all data

1 2 3 of the previously displayed trace and continuously display the signal
received by the spectrum analyzer in the sweep state.

刷新迹线 ·[Max Hold]: Press 【Trace】→【Max Hold】to keep the maximum value
of the points on the selected trace, and update the value with the new
maximum value detected in each sweep. If the detection mode is
最大保持 automatic, it will switch to the positive peak detection mode.

·[Min Hold]: Press 【Trace】→【Min Hold】to keep the minimum value

of the points on the selected trace, and update the value with the new
最小保持 minimum value detected in each sweep. If the detection mode is
automatic, it will switch to the negative peak detection mode.

保持迹线 ·[Hold Trace]: Press 【Trace】→【Hold Trace】to keep and display the
amplitude data of the selected trace. However, such data won‘t be
updated when the spectrum analyzer sweeps.
隐藏迹线
·[Hide Trace]: Press 【Trace】→【Hide Trace】to process the signal
on the background. However, such signal is not displayed on the
screen.

119 / 248
4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Spectrum analysis mode
5.3.14 Limit menu

·[Limit Up Low]: Press 【Limit】→[Limit Up Low], and select the

current limit line as the upper limit line or the lower limit line
极限
·[Limit Off On]: Press【Limit】→[Limit Off On], and select limit function
极限 ON/OFF.
上 下
·[Test Off On]: Press【Limit】→[Test Off On] to start/stop the limit line
极限 test.
开 关
·[Edit Limit Line]: Press【Limit】→[Edit Limit Line]，
测试 including[Frequency],[Amplitude],[Add Point],[Delete Point],[Last
关 开 Point],[Next Point],[Set Default]]and other soft menus to view the
frequency and amplitude of limit points and add or delete limit points.
编辑极限 >
·[Offset]: Press【Limit】→ [Offset] to set the offset allowance.
偏移 ·[Audio Alarm Off On]: Press【Limit】→[Audio Alarm Off On] to set
0.0dB audio alarm On/Off. If the audio alarm is on and the upper and lower
声音报警 limit line test is on, the function is effective. If the limit is out of range
关 开 when the upper and lower limit lines are swept on the current screen,
the buzzer will give a short sound.
存储极限 ·[Save Limit]: Press【Limit】→[Save Limit] to store the limit.

·[Recall Limit]: Press【Limit】→[Recall Limit],

调用极限 > including[Header],[Footer],[Last Page],[Next Page],[Recall
Immediately],[Delete][Cancel]and other soft menus to call or delete
saved limits.

120 / 248
 4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Spectrum analysis mode
5.3.15 Peak menu

·[Max Peak]: Press【Peak】→[Max Peak] to place a frequency marker

at the highest point of the trace and display the frequency and
amplitude of the frequency marker in the upper right corner of the
峰值
screen.

·[Sub Peak]: Press 【Peak】→[Sub Peak] to move the active

最大峰值
frequency marker to the next highest peak point on the trace that is
associated with the current frequency marker position. Press the key
次峰值 again, and the user can find the lower peak point quickly.

·[Left Peak]: Press 【Peak】→[Left Peak] to find the next peak to the
left of the current frequency marker position.
左邻峰值
·[Right Peak]: Press 【Peak】→[Right Peak] to find the next peak to
the right of the current frequency marker position.
右邻峰值
·[Max]: Press【Peak】→[Max] to place a marker at the highest point of
the trace and display the frequency and amplitude of the marker in the
最大值 upper right corner of the screen.

·Min Peak] Press【Peak】→[Min] to place a marker at the lowest point

最小值 of the trace and display the frequency and amplitude of the marker in
the upper right corner of the screen.

峰值跟踪 ·[Peak Tracking Off On]: Press【Peak】→[Peak Tracking Off On]. If

关 开 peak tracking is on, the current marker will perform a peak search
operation after each sweep. If peak tracking is off, no operation will be
光标-> performed.
中心频率
·[Mkr→]: Press【Peak】 → [Mkr →] to set the marker frequency equal
to the center frequency. This function quickly moves the signal to the
center of the screen.

121 / 248
4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Spectrum analysis mode
5.3.16 File menu

·[StoreStateFile]: Press 【File】→[Save State] to save the current

sweep status parameters.

文件 ·[Recall Status]: Press【File】→[Recall State] to pop up the state file

list. The soft menus, including[Header],[Footer],[Last Page],[Next
Page],[Recall Immediately]and [Delete], are used to read the existing
存储状态
state file and recall the corresponding state parameters to the current
sweep.
调用状态 > ·[Save Data]: Press【File】→[Save Data] to store trace data.

·[Recall Data]: Press【File】→[Recall Data] to pop up the data file list.

存储数据 The soft menus, including[Header],[Footer],[Last Page],[Next
Page],[Recall Immediately]and [Delete], are used to read the existing
data files and recall the corresponding data to the current sweep.
调用数据 >
·[Save Image]: Press【File】→[Save Image] to capture the current
screen image.
存储图片
·[Default State]: Press【File】→[Default State] to restore to factory
settings.
默认状态 ·[File Mgmnt]: Press 【File】→[File Mgmnt] to pop up the file
management menu, including [Source File], [Target File], [Start
Copy], [Delete Files] and other relevant soft menus to copy and delete
文件管理 >
files.

存储位置 ·[Storage location]: Press 【File】→[Storage Location] to select the

> storage location, the interior is the internal memory of the instrument,
[内部]
and the other optional locations are the memory and SD card of the
USB interface. After the security feature option is selected, the internal
memory cannot be selected.

5.3.17 Security data menu

In case of the security data option, the spectrum analyzer will not be able to select the internal
memory, but only the memory and SD card with USB interface will be selected.
·[Internal]: Press 【File】→[Storage Location]→[Internal], the [Internal]
存储位置 is in a gray state and cannot be saved internally.

内部 ·[SDCard]: Press 【File】→[Storage Location]→[SD card], and select

Store Data to the SD card.
SD卡 ·[USB]: Press【File】→[Storage Location] →[USB]and select Store Data
to USB.
USB

< 返回

122 / 248
 4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Vector voltmeter mode(optional)
6 Cable and antenna feeder test mode (optional)

6.1 Introduction to typical measurements

The cable and antenna feeder test mode (CAT) is used for the contact performance tests of radar,
antenna and feeder, Including VSWR, return loss, impedance and Distance-To-Fault (DTF).
Start the instrument, press【Mode】to pop up the mode selection dialog box, then select [CAT] in
the dialog box, and press [OK] to enter the CAT mode after the progress bar is completed.

Figure 6-1 Main Interface of CAT

All operations in this section are based on the premise of the selected
Notice
CAT, which will not be described separately later.

6.1.1 Selection of measurement parameters

In the CAT mode, the RF analyzer can measure the return loss, VSWR, impedance, cable loss
and other parameters of the device under test, and also provides the fault point Distance-To-Fault
(DTF) function to accurately locate the impedance mismatch point. Press the 【Measure】 key to
select different measurement parameters.
a) [Return Loss] , select the return loss parameter and display it in logarithmic format;
b) [Cable Loss] , select the test parameter for cable loss;
c) [VSWR] , select the test parameter as standing wave ratio;
d) [DTF Return Loss] , select the test parameter fault location point for return loss test;
e) [DTF VSWR] , select the test parameter fault location point for standing wave ratio test;
f) [Impedance] , select the test parameter as impedance, and the coordinate system is Smith
chart;
g) [Smith] , select the test parameter as the Smith chart;
h) [Phase] , select the test parameter as the reflection phase;

6.1.2 Calibration
The calibration in CAT mode is basically the same as that in vector network analysis mode. The
calibration steps in antenna feeder test mode are as follows:

123 / 248
4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Cable and antenna feeder test mode
a) Press the [Cal] key and the [Cal Kit] key, select the calibration part model, and Press [OK] ;
b) Press [M Cal], a message will pop up on the display: ―Please connect the open-circuit device
to port 1, and press the corresponding menu button to start measuring!‖ Connect the
open-circuit device to test port 1. Press [Opener], the RF analyzer will display ―cal std
measuring...‖ during the measurement of standard piece. After the measurement and
calculation of the error factor, the prompt message will pop up on the display: "please connect
the short-circuit device on port 1, and then press the corresponding menu button to start
measuring!‖ ‖;
c) Remove the open-circuit device from test port 1, connect the short-circuit device, press
[Short-circuit Device] , and a message pops up on the display: "Please connect the load on
port 1, then press the corresponding menu button to start measurement!‖ ‖;
d) Remove the short-circuit device from test port 1, connect the load, press [LOAD] , and a
message will pop up on the display: "Press [Done] to complete the measurement!‖ ‖;
e) Press [Done] to complete the calibration process of the cable and antenna analysis mode;

After the calibration is complete, the calibration off On is displayed in the menu bar under
calibration. Connect with the DUT for measurement.

6.1.3 Marker function

The marker function in CAT mode is the same as that in vector network analysis mode.

6.1.4 Saving and recalling function

The saving and recalling function in CAT mode is the same as that in vector network analysis
mode.

6.1.5 DTF measurement

CAT provides DTF measurement function. The DTF (Distance-To-Fault) measurement, also
known as the fault point location function, shows the magnitude of the response signal at different
positions of the signal path of the kit under test, thus providing a basis for judging the impedance
change on the transmission path. DTF measurements are also referred to as time domain
measurements in some vector network analyzers, and the time domain measures the display time
of x-axis and DTF measures the distance of x-axis, and the relationship between the two is:
Distance = time × speed of light × rate factor
For the kit under test, the rate factor is a constant greater than zero and less than 1, and the speed
of light is the rate at which light travels in a vacuum, so the distance and time are proportional.

6.1.5.1 Principle of measurement

In the usual measurement, the vector network analyzer displays the response of the kit under test
as the change of frequency, which is called frequency domain measurement. The modern vector
network analyzer obtains time domain data by inverse Fourier transform of the frequency domain
data, and the measurement result is displayed as time on the X axis, and the response value
appears at discrete time points, and the impedance change point of the kit under test can be
analyzed. The following figure shows the frequency and time domain reflection measurements for
the same cable, and this cable has two bends, each of which causes a mismatch in the
transmission line or a change in impedance.

124 / 248
 4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Vector voltmeter mode(optional)

Limit

frequency Time

Figure 6-2 Measurement of Frequency and Time Domain

The frequency domain response of the S11 measured at the input port shows a combined
reflection response due to multiple cable mismatch point interactions, but it is difficult to determine
the exact physical location at which the cable mismatch occurs.
The time domain response shows the location and magnitude of each impedance mismatch point.
From the response we can see that there is a significant mismatch in the second bend of the
cable.
the RF analyzer's time domain measurement function simulates a traditional time domain
reflection (TDR). The time domain reflexometer emits an impulse or step signal to the kit under
test, and then observe the energy of the reflected signal. By analyzing the amplitude, duration and
waveform of the reflected signal, the impedance change of the kit under test can be determined. If
time domain measurement is performed in the cable and antenna mode but the incident impulse
or step signal does not create, and the frequency sweep measurement is performed, then it will
calculate the time domain information from the frequency domain measurement result by the
Fourier algorithm, so it is also called the frequency domain reflexometer .
The CAT mode of 4957Bis to measureS11 and then perform time domain conversion
measurement. The S11 reflection measurement is not a simple display of the size of the reflected
signal received by the A or B receiver, but shows the ratio measurement between the
measurement receiver and reference receiver. The S11 ratio measurement can be used to
remove system errors in the calibration. This is especially important for DTF measurements
because the measurement reference plane is established by calibration, and the calibration point
becomes the zero point of the X time axis, and all time and distance data will use this point as the
reference point. In that case, time and amplitude data are very accurate due to calibration. The
time domain measurement of the RF analyzer usually involves the following steps:
a) Collect raw data of receiver (A and R) and perform a ratio operation;
b) Perform error correction;
c) Transform the frequency domain data into the time domain;
d) Display measurement result

6.1.5.2 DTF measurement resolution and range

This Section discusses how to observe the effective DTF data of the device under test and how to
make settings for the highest resolution and greater measurement range.

1) Response Resolution
The RF analyzer's DTF response resolution refers to the RF analyzer's ability to distinguish
between two adjacent responses. For equal amplitude response, it is equal to the pulse width of
the impulse response defined by the 50% (6dB) amplitude point, or the rise time of step response
defined by 10%～90％ amplitude point as shown in the following figure:

125 / 248
4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Cable and antenna feeder test mode

90%
-6dB -6dB

10%

Pulse Step Rise

Width Time
Figure 6-3 Time Domain Response Resolution

The time domain response resolution is subject to the several factors:

A) Frequency span

The figure below shows the effect of the frequency span on the response resolution:
Frequency Domain Time Domain

Narrow Span Wide Span

Frequency Time
Narrow Span

Wide Span

Frequency Time

Figure 6-4 Effect of Frequency Span on the Response Resolution

The time domain measurement response under a narrow frequency span shows that the impulse
response pulses that should be separated independently overlap each other. The RF analyzer can
distinguish between different response pulses when performing time domain measurements over
a wide frequency span.
The frequency span is inversely proportional to the pulse width. The wider the frequency span, the
narrower the impulse response pulse, and the shorter the step response rise time, the higher the
resolution of the response measurement.

b) Window function
If the cable and antenna mode is used for frequency time domain transformation, the length of
data processed is limited. To reduce the effects of ringing caused by data truncation, the RF
analyzer usually provides the option of windowing. Windowing can reduce the ringing effect and
reduce the side lobes, but it will increase the width of the main lobe and reduce the resolution.

126 / 248
 4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Vector voltmeter mode(optional)
Frequency Domain Time Domain

Without
Windows S-1
start stop
frequency time

Add windows

start stop
frequency
Time

Figure 6-5 Using Window Filtering to Suppress Side Lobes

4957B provides three kinds of window functions, which are maximum value, normal value,
minimum value. The main lobe width and side lobe height of three kinds of window functions can
select different window according to specific test needs.

Small window

Large window

Figure 6-6 Effects of Different Windows

6) Measurement Range
In time domain measurements, the measurement range is defined as the maximum length of time
that can be set, and no repeated response occurs when measurements are taken over this length
of time.
The measurement range is inversely proportional to the response resolution. If one is increased,
the other is decreased.
The time domain waveform is a periodic signal that repeats over time, so a repetitive response
occurs. The repeated response (false response) is not the true response of the kit under test,
which only occurs at specific time intervals (1/sweep point frequency interval), so the
measurement range is determined by the frequency interval ΔF of the sweeping point:

127 / 248
4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Cable and antenna feeder test mode
For time domain measurements, the maximum measurable stop time is: 1/△F. In the reflection
measurement, since the signal will circle within the kit to be tested, the maximum measurement
distance is:
Distance=0.5*(sweep points -1/span)*C*Speed factor

∆F Frequency span
∆F =
Sweep points-1

Example:
Span=1GHz
Sweep points=201
△F=5 MHz

Figure 6-7 Definition of the Sweeping Point Frequency Space

The measurement range is proportional to the number of sweep points -1, which is inversely
proportional to the span. To improve the measurement range, the following two settings can be
modified:

·Increase the number of sweep points

·Decrease the frequency span.

6.1.5.3 Setting of time domain conversion measurement

Before entering the DTF measurement mode, measurement parameters such as Meas Freq
Range, Points, IF BW, etc. should be set up to complete single port calibration, and then the DTF
test should be carried out according to the following steps. First, connect the tested cable to
network port 1:

a) Press 【Measure】 , press [DTF VSWR] or [DTF Return Loss] to activate the time domain

conversion function and enter the DTF measurement mode.

b) Press 【Frep】, [Start Dist] , input the starting distance to be observed, and complete the input

based on the corresponding distance unit;

c) Press 【Frep】 , [Stop Dist] , enter the end distance to be observed, and complete the input

based on corresponding distance unit;

d) If you want to set the window function, press 【Frep】 , [Window >] , display the submenu of
128 / 248
 4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Vector voltmeter mode(optional)
[Window >] , and select different window functions;

e) Press [Return] , [Unit m/ft] , set the required distance unit system;

f) Press [Cable Specification>] , [Load Cable] , select the model of the cable to be tested in the

cable model selection list, press [OK] to complete the selection and close the dialog box;

g) If there is no corresponding cable type, press [Cable Specification >] , [Cable Loss] , input the

cable loss of cable to be tested, press [OK] to complete the setting and close the dialog box;

h) Press [Velocity] and input the transmission rate factor of the device under test, press [OK]

to complete the setting and close the dialog box.

i) Observe and record the test results.

6.2 Menu Structure

This Section describes the menu structure of the 4957B RF analyzer in the antenna feeder test
mode.
The CAT mode includes 10 groups of primary menus such as ―Frequency‖, ―Amplitude‖,
―Bandwidth‖, ―Marker‖, ―Measure‖, ―Sweep/set‖, ―Calibrate‖, ―Trace‖, ―Peak‖ and ―File‖. The
―Measure‖, ―Frequency‖ and ―Calibrate‖ menus are illustrated in this section. For other menus,
refer to the menu description in vector network analysis mode.

129 / 248
4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Cable and antenna feeder test mode

测量 史密斯 高级 校准 机械校准

校准
回波损耗 线性 A1 开路器
关 开

电缆损耗 对数 B1 校准件 短路器

驻波比 复数对 R1 机械校准 负载

DTF回波损耗 R+jX S11

DTF驻波比 G+jB 继续校准 完成

史密斯 返回

相位 返回

高级

频率/距离 电缆特性

修正模式
起始频率
手动 自动
窗函数

终止频率 速率因子
矩形

起始距离 电缆损耗
正常边缘平滑

终止距离 调用电缆
低边缘平滑

电缆特性 编辑电缆
低边缘平滑

单位
存储电缆
公制 英制
返回

窗函数 返回

Figure 2-8 Menu Structure of ―Measure‖, ―Frequency/Distance‖ and ―Calibrate‖

130 / 248
 4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Vector voltmeter mode(optional)
Only when the measurement format is "DTF return loss" and "DTF

Notice standing wave ratio", select 【 Freq 】 to display the

【Frequency/Distance】 menu.

6.3 Menu Description

6.3.1 Frequency menu
In the antenna feeder measurement mode and the DTF return loss and DTF standing wave ratio
measurement format, press the 【Freq】 button, and the frequency and distance setting menus,
including [Start Freq], [Stop Freq], [Start Dist], [Stop Dist] and [Cable Specification] pop up.
·[Start Freq]: Press 【Freq】→[Start Freq], use the numeric keys on
the front panel, select the frequency unit, or use the 【↑】
【↓】 keys and
the knob for setting.
频率 ·[Stop Freq]: Press【Freq】→[Stop Freq], use the numeric keys on the
front panel, select the frequency unit, or use the 【↑】
【↓】 keys and the
起始频率 knob for setting.
·[Start Dist]: Press 【Freq】 → [Start Dist], the default is 0.00m, and
终止频率 then select [m] in the right menu of the screen with a numeric key on
the front panel, or set it with the 【↑】【↓】 keys and the knob.
起始距离 ·[Special Notes]: With the 【↑】【↓】 keys and the knob, the increase
0.00m or decrease step of the starting distance is 0.1m.
终止距离 ·[Stop Dist]: Press 【Freq】 → [Stop Dist], and then select [m] in the
3.75m right menu of the screen with a numeric key, or set it with the 【↑】【↓】
keys and the knob.
电缆特性 ·[Cable Specification]: Press 【Freq】 → [Cable Specification] and
switch to the setting menu of cable specification, including [Corr Mode
单位 Man Auto] , [Velocity], [Cable Loss], [Load Cable], [Edit Cable], [Save
公制 英制 Cable], etc.
·[Unit m ft]: Press 【Freq】 → [Unit m ft], and set the type of distance
窗函数
unit used for DTF measurements.
·[Special Notes]: Metric units are m and English units are ft.
·[WinFunc]: Switch to the window function menu and set the window
function according to the corresponding menu item: rectangular
window, nominal edge smoothing, low edge smoothing and minimum
edge smoothing.

131 / 248
4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Cable and antenna feeder test mode
6.3.2 Cable specification menu
·[Corr Mode Man Auto]: Press [Cable Specification] → [Corr Mode
Man Auto] to set the cable parameter mode. When manually setting,
use the menu item to set and display the rate factor and cable loss.
电缆特性 When automatically setting, use the parameters of the loaded cable
model.
修正模式 ·[Velocity]: Press [Cable Specification] → [Velocity], enter the velocity
手动 自动 with a numeric key on the front panel, and press [ ↲ ] key for
速率因子 confirmation; or set it with【↑】【↓】keys and the knob.
1.000 ·[Special Notes]: The velocity should not be greater than 1.000. If it is
greater than 1.000, the software will automatically set it to 1.000.
电缆损耗
0.000dB/ft ·[Cable Loss 0.00dB/ft]: Press [Cable Specification] → [Cable Loss],
set the cable loss with a numeric key on the front panel with reference
调用电缆 to actual parameters, and press[↲] key for confirmation.
·[Load Cable]: Press [Cable Specification] → [Load Cable], and load
the edited cable model. In the pop-up cable model list, select the cable
编辑电缆
model to be called, press [Recall] or [OK] to load the cable model. The
cable parameters of the cable model are valid when the correction
存储电缆 mode is automatic.
·[Edit Cable]: Press [Cable Specification]→[Edit Cable], the Edit
返回 Cable dialog box pops up. In the dialog box, set the velocity and the
cable loss at each frequency point to define a new cable model. After
editing is complete, press [Done] to complete the cable parameter
setting.
·[Save Cable]: Press [Cable Specification]→[Save Cable], the file
naming box pops up. Edit the name of the cable model in the box and
press[↲] to save the current cable model.

6.3.3 Measurement menu

Measurement menu in antenna feeder mode

132 / 248
 4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Vector voltmeter mode(optional)

·[Return Loss]: Press 【 Measure 】 →[Return Loss], and set the

测量
measurement format to return loss.
·[Cable Loss]: Press【Measure】→[Cable Loss], and set the cable loss
回波损耗
for DTF measurement, and this parameter is valid when the correction
mode is manual. After the setting tab is popped up, enter the value to
电缆损耗
be set with numeric keys, press the [OK] key to complete the
parameter setting, or adjust it by the step key or rotary knob.
驻波比 ·[VSWR]: Press【Measure】→[VSWR], and set the measurement
format to VSWR.
DTF回波损耗 ·[DTF Return Loss]: Press【Measure】→[DTF Return Loss], and set
the measurement format to DTF return loss.
DTF驻波比 ·[DTF VSWR]: Press 【 Measure 】 →[DTF VSWR], and set the
measurement format to DTF VSWR.
·[Smith]: Press 【Measure】→ [Smith], and set the measurement
史密斯>
format as impedance chart, with the marker information of impedance
chart displayed as linear, logarithmic, Re/Im, impedance ([R + JX]) and
相位
admittance ([G + JB]).
·[Phase]: Press 【Measure】→[Phase]: Set the measurement format to
高级> phase.
·[Advance]: Press 【 Measure 】 →[Advance>] to select the
measurement parameters from A1, B1, R1 and S11.

6.3.4 Smith menu

·[Linear]: Press [Smith] → [Linear], and set the display format of

史密斯 marker information as linear in Smith format.
·[Log]: Press [Smith] → [Log], and set the display format of marker
线性 information as log in Smith format.

·[Re/Im]: Press [Smith] → [Re/Im], and set the display format of marker
对数
information as Re/Im in Smith format.

复数对 ·[R+JX]: Press [Smith] → [R+JX], and set the display format of marker
information as impedance in Smith format.
·[G+JB]: Press [Smith] → [G+JB], and set the display format of marker
R+JX
information as admittance in Smith format.

G+JB

返回

133 / 248
4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Cable and antenna feeder test mode
6.3.5 Calibration menu
The calibration menu is the same as that in vector network analysis mode.

·[Cal Off On]: Press [Cal]→[Cal Off On] to turn the error correction on or off,
and the calibration can only be turned on when the corresponding
校准 calibration is completed.
·[Cal Kit]: Press [Cal]→[Cal Kit] to enter the calibration kit selection dialog
校准
box, and select the calibration kit type.
关 开
·[Special Notes]: The mechanical calibration kit types include 31101A
校准件 31101B 31121 31123
·[M Cal]: Press [Cal] → [M Cal] and complete the relevant calibrations in the
calibration steps, including open circuit, short circuit and load.
机械校准 >
·[E Cal]: Press [Cal]→[E Cal] to enter the electronic calibration dialog box,
and click the down arrow on the touchscreen to select the 【Cal Port】: One
电子校准 port P1, one port P2, full 2 ports; click [Start], [Interrupt] and [Exit] for
relevant operations of electronic calibration.
继续校准 > ·[Cal Cont]: Press [Cal] → [Cal Cont]. If the submenu type is consistent with
the mechanical calibration, continue to complete the calibration.

6.3.6 Mechanical calibration menu

·[OPEN]: Press 【M Cal】→[Open] and select the calibration standard
of OPEN.
机械校准
·[SHORT]: Press 【M Cal】→[Short] and select the calibration standard
of SHORT.
开路
·[LOAD]: Press 【M Cal】→[Load] and select the calibration standard
短路 of Load.

负载

6.3.7 File menu

Refer to the file menu in the vector network analysis mode

134 / 248
 4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Vector voltmeter mode(optional)

7 Vector voltmeter mode (optional)

The 4957B Vector Voltage Measurement Mode (VVM) is a convenient tool for phase matching of
radio frequency cables, which is mainly used to measure the electrical length of cables or other
kits to be measured. This mode can directly replace a vector voltmeter and has the same flexible
and convenient operation interface as the vector voltmeter. The results of single port electrical
length measurement are displayed in amplitude and phase formats, while the results of all port are
only displayed in the amplitude format.
As shown in the figure (a), measuring the electrical length of the kit under test with a vector
voltmeter requires a directional coupler and a signal source to transmit the fixed carrier frequency.
In the figure (b) below, the signal source and directional coupler are integrated into one instrument.
Therefore, the kit under test can be directly connected through the RF output port of 4957B and
are tested directly without any external devices.

Vector

Signal
S11 Device
DU
Directional T
(a)
Device
DU
S11 T

4957B RFanalyzer

(b)

Figure 7-1 Measurement Structure Comparison of Vector Voltmeter and 4957B Vector Voltage
Measurement Mode

7.1 Introduction to typical measurements

The vector voltmeter mode can directly replace a vector voltmeter to measure the electrical length
of cables or other kits to be measured.
After startup, press 【Mode】 to pop up a mode selection dialog box, select the [Vector Voltmeter],
and press [OK] to enter the vector voltmeter mode after completing the progress bar.

135 / 248
4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Vector voltmeter mode(optional)

Figure 6-2 Main Interface of Vector Voltmeter Mode

All operations in this section are based on the premise of the selected
Notice
vector voltmeter mode, which will not be described separately later.

7.1.1 Frequency range setting

Before performing the vector voltage measurement, set the frequency value of the point frequency
signal to be tested. The frequency range of the 4957B instrument in vector voltage measurement
mode is 30kHz~6.5GHz (4957B). The frequency range should be met during the setting, the
corresponding button operations are as follows:
a) Press 【Frep】 and input the frequency value, and complete the center frequency setting by
pressing corresponding frequency unit on the touch screen.

7.1.2 Setting of measurement port

If reflection measurement is required at port 1, keep the default setting of the setting of the
instrument analyzer.
If reflection measurement is required at port 2,
a) Press 【Measure】 → [Meas Port 1 2] , switch [Meas Port 1 2] and change the default
measurement type from 1 port to 2 port.
If transmission measurement is required, when the excitation source port is port 1 or port 2, switch
with the same operation method.

7.1.3 Calibration
Before performing the vector voltage test, after completing the frequency setting and other
measurement settings, calibration must be performed to eliminate the systematic error of the RF
analyzer to ensure the validity and correctness of the measurement results.

7.1.3.1 One port reflection error correction

Single port correction can be conducted on S11 or S22 measurement of the instrument.
The two processes are basically the same, the difference is that the selected parameters and
ports.

136 / 248
 4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Vector voltmeter mode(optional)
a) In vector voltage measurement mode, select the type of measurement you want to make:
To measure reflection at port 1 (forward, S11), keep the default instrument settings.
If reflection measurement (reverse, S22) is required at port 2, press 【 Measure 】
→[Measurement Port 1 2],switch to [Measurement Port 1 2] , switch port 1 to port 2, and
measure parameters automatically switch from S11 to S22.
b) Set other parameters for measurement: Center frequency, measurement type is the default
reflection measurement etc.
c) Open the calibration menu, and press 【Calibrate】.
d) Press 【Calibrate】 → [Cal Kit] to see if the calibration kit is consistent with the kit specified
under the current softkey. If not, press the corresponding softkey to select the correct
calibration kit model. Press [Back] to return to 【Calibrate】 menu bar, press [M Cal >]
and select the type to be corrected.
a) If user wants to make a reflection measurement on port 1, press [S11 One Port] .
b) To measure reflection at port 2, press [S22 One Port].
e) If it is on the port 1, the system will automatically prompt user to connect the open device to
the port 1, and then press the corresponding menu button to start the measurement! At this
time, connect the standard connector of the open-circuit device to the port to be used as the
test port (P1 for S11, and P2 for S22).

All adapters and cables to be used for device measurement shall be

Notice prepared, that is, to connect the standard device to the position for
measurement.

f) After the display trace is stable, to measure the normal part, press [OPEN] and analyzer will
display ―Cal std measuring……‖ during the measurement of the normal kit. After the
measurement is completed and the error coefficient is calculated , it will display the prompt
of ‖Connect Short in P1, then press corresp. menu button to start!‖ And the software menu will
be underlined to indicate that the project has been tested, such as [OPEN].
g) Disconnect the open device and connect the short device to the test port.
h) When the trace to be displayed is stable, to measure the normal kit, press [Short-circuit
Device], the analyzer will display ―Measuring……‖ during the measurement of the normal part.
After the measurement is completed, it will display the prompt of ―Port 1 short measurement
has completed. Connect load at P1, and press ‗Load‘‖ after measurement. Connect LOAD in
P1, press ‗LOAD‘‖, and the software menu will be underlined to indicate that the project has
been tested, such as [Short-circuit Device].
i) Disconnect the circuit breaker and connect the load to the test port.
j) When the trace to be displayed is stable, to measure the normal kit, press [SHORT] and
analyzer will display ―Cal std measuring……‖ during the measurement of the normal kit. After
the measurement is completed and the error coefficient is calculated, it will display the prompt
of ‖Connect load in P1, then press corresp. menu button to start!‖ And the software menu will
be underlined to indicate that the project has been tested, such as [SHORT].
k) Press [Done] , the RF analyzer displays the corrected data trace indicating that the correction
is enabled.

That is to complete the single port calibration for reflected measurement. The DUT can be
connected and measured at this time.

137 / 248
4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Vector voltmeter mode(optional)

The open-circuit device, short-circuit device and load can be measured

Notice in any sequence regardless that mentioned here.

For S22 response For S11 response

Open-circuit device Open-circuit device
Load
Load

Short-circuit device
Short-circuit device

RF Analyzer

Figure 6-3 Standard Piece Connection of Single Port Reflection Error Correction

7.1.3.2 Error correction of full 2 ports

·Eliminate directional error during test component assembling in the forward and reverse
directions
·Eliminate source matching error during test component assembling in the forward and reverse
directions
·Eliminate load matching error during test component assembling in the forward and reverse
directions
·Eliminate isolation error during test component assembling in the forward and reverse directions
·Remove the frequency response of the test component assembly in the forward and reverse
directions

This is a relatively accurate error correction process. The RF analyzer

Notice updates the measurement trace once via forward and reverse sweep,
which takes more time compared with other correction process.

a) Set parameters for device measurement: Frequency, measurement mode, measurement port,
measurement format, relative measurement switch etc. Start frequency, stop frequency,
output power, number of sweeping points or IF bandwidth.
b) Open the calibration menu and press 【Calibrate】 .
c) Press 【Calibrate】 and see if the calibration kit is consistent with the kit specified under the
current softkey. If not, press the appropriate softkey to select the correct calibration kit model.
d) Press [Back] and return to the 【Calibrate】 menu bar, press [M Cal] , select the type to be
corrected, press [Full 2 Ports] , the system will prompt to ―press [Reflect] to start the
corresponding measurement! ‖

138 / 248
 4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Vector voltmeter mode(optional)
e) To start reflection measurement, press [Reflect>] to prompt ―Connect OPEN in P1,then press
corresp. menu button to start!‖. connect the open circuit device to test port 1 according to the
diagram, and after the display trace is stable, press [P1 OPEN], the analyzer will display "Cal
std measuring..." during the measurement of the standard piece, and after completing the
measurement, it will display the prompt "Connect SHORT in P1, then press corresp. menu
button to start!" And the software menu will be underlined to indicate that the project has been
tested, such as [P1 OPEN].
f) Disconnect the opener, and connect the short circuit device to the test port 1. After the display
trace is stable, to measure the standard piece, press [P1 SHORT], the analyzer will display
"calibration standard measurement …" during the measurement of the standard piece, and
after completing the measurement, it will display the prompt "Port 1 Short Measure Done.
Connect LOAD in P1, press ‗P1 LOAD‘‖, and the software menu will be underlined to indicate
that the project has been tested, such as [P1 SHORT].
g) Disconnect the short-circuit device, connect the load to test port 1, and press [P1 LOAD] after
the trace is stable to prompt ―Calibrating standard piece measurement...‖ during standard
piece measurement, and prompt ―Connect the load to Port 1, then press corresp. menu button
to start!‖ after measurement. At this time, underline of the menu indicates the item is tested
completely, for example, [P1 LOAD].
h) Disconnect the load from P1, connect the open-circuit device, short-circuit device and load to
P2 as per the same standard method with P1 in sequence, and complete the measurement
on such standard pieces as S22 OPEN, SHORT and LOAD.
i) After reflection calibration on P1 and P2, the prompt ―Press [Done] to complete the
measurement.‖ Press [Done], and the system will calculate the reflection factor automatically.
j) Return to previous menu for transmission calibration. Press [Tr>] to prompt ―Connect Thru
cable between P1 and P2, then press corresp. menu button to start!‖ connect test port 1 and
test port 2 with cables. You can press [Auto Meas], and the system can automatically
complete four transmission calibration tasks in turn, or press [Pos Match], [Pos Trans], [Rev
Match] and [Rev Trans] in turn to complete each calibration task individually. When all four
tasks are completed, the full 2 ports transmission calibration is completed.
k) Press [Back] to return to previous menu, and press [ISO] for isolation calibration.
l) For isolation measurement, press [ISO] to prompt ―Connect LOADs in P1 and P2, then press
corresp. menu button to start!‖. Connect the load to test port 1 and test port 2 respectively,
press [Auto Meas] to complete isolation calibration on the two items automatically in turn, or
press [Pos Iso] and [Rev Iso] to complete each isolation calibration independently. or directly
press [Ignore Iso] to ignore isolation calibration.
m) Press [Done] to finish the full 2 ports calibration. After that, the prompt ―Calibration Off/On‖
shows in the prompt zone. Connect with the DUT for measurement.

139 / 248
4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Vector voltmeter mode(optional)
For reflection For transmission For isolation

For S22 response For S11 response

Open-circuit device Open-circuit device Load

Short-circuit device
Load Load
Load
Short-circuit device THRU

RF Analyzer RF Analyzer RF Analyzer

Figure 6-4 Standard Piece Connection of Full 2 Ports Error Correction

7.1.4 Selection of measurement format

The vector voltage measurement mode of the instrument measures the amplitude, phase,
standing wave ratio and impedance of the device under test.
a) Press 【Measure】 -> [Format] ;
b) Select different measurement parameters via the menu soft key, and the default is dB format.
[dB], select the measurement parameter as amplitude, with the amplitude value and phase
value displayed; [VSWR], select the measurement parameter as VSWR; [Re/Im], select the
test parameter as impedance, with the information displayed in the real value and the
imaginary value.

7.1.5 Setting of measurement type

If single port measurement is required, keep the default setting of the instrument.
For dual port measurements, please perform the following operations:
a) Press 【Measure】 → [Meas Type Rf/ Tr], switch to [Meas Type Rf/ Tr], and change the
default measurement from reflection to transmission.

7.1.6 Setting of output power

It is used to set the output power of the RF analyzer source, including the high power, low power
and manually-entered power. The actual output power varies with the RF analyzer model. The
operation for setting the output function is as follows:
a) Press the 【Amplitude】 and select [High] or [Low] on the touch screen to select the
required power.
b) To improve the output power accuracy, follow the steps below to set it manually:
c) Press [Man -18dBm] to select the manual input power;
d) Use the numeric keys to enter the number and select the unit on the touch screen to complete
the input or adjust the manual power by turning the wheel or pressing [↑] [↓] .

7.2 Menu Structure

The vector voltage measurement mode mainly has four groups of menus: ―Measurement‖,
―Calibration‖, ―File‖ and ―Amplitude‖. The ―frequency‖ can be directly input by the 【Freq】 key, and
―calibration‖ and ―File‖ can refer to the vector grid analysis mode. The menus of "Measure" and
140 / 248
 4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Vector voltmeter mode(optional)
"Amplitude" are mainly introduced, with the structures being as follows:

测量 格式 输出功率

测量类型
dB 高功率
反射 传输

测量端口
驻波比 低功率
1 2

测量格式 手动功率
阻抗
-5~-20dBm

相对测量
关 开

返回 返回

Figure 6-5 Structure of Measurement and Amplitude Menus

7.3 Menu Description

7.3.1 Measurement menu
Measurement menu in the vector voltmeter mode
·[Measurement Type Reflection Transmission] Press 【Measure】
→\ [Measurement Type Reflection Transmission] to set the
测量 measurement type.
·[Measurement Port 1 2] Press 【Measure】 →\ [Measurement Port
测量类型
1 2] to set the measurement port.
反射 传输 ·[Measurement Format Standing-wave Ratio (SWR)]: Press
测量端口 【Measure】 →\ [Measurement Format], and set the measurement
1 2 format to be such that the standing-wave ratio, the impedance and dB
can be selected.
测量格式 ·[Relative Measurement Off On]: Press 【Measure】 →\ [Relative
驻波比 Measurement Off On] to select the relative measurement switch
相对测量 status.
关 开

141 / 248
4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Vector voltmeter mode(optional)
7.3.2 Amplitude menu
Click the amplitude menu, corresponding to the [Output Power] menu to set output power.
·[High Power]: Press 【Amplitude】 → \[High Power] key, and select
\[High Power] on the touch screen to set the output power as the high
power status.
输出功率
·[Low Power]: Press 【Amplitude】 → [Low Power] key, and select
[Low Power] on the touch screen to set the output power as the low
高功率
power status.
·[Manual]: Press 【Amplitude】 → [Manual] key, and the range is
低功率 -35dB～-10dBm. Enter the numbers with the numeric keys or use the
knob or press 【↑】【↓】 to adjust the manual power.
手动 ·[Radio Frequency Output]: If it is currently off, press 【 Radio
-35~-10dBm Frequency Output】 to turn on; and if it is currently on, press it to turn
射频输出 off.
关/开 ·[Back]: Return to the 【Measure】 menu.
·[Special Notes]: The manual power menu display range
< 返回 is-35~-10dBm, in order to ensure the setting range of power flatness
index, the actual range can be set to -45 - 5dBm. If it is set to a value
outside the range displayed by the menu item, there is a certain
deviation in the power output at some frequency points.

7.3.3 File menu

Refer to the file menu in the vector network analysis mode

142 / 248
 4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
USB power measurement mode(optional)
8 USB power measurement mode (optional)

8.1 Introduction to typical measurement

The 4957B USB power measurement mode of the 4957B instrument uses the USB interface to
externally connect the USB power sensor via a USB cable for the power test. With the 8723XUSB
power sensor provided by China Electronics Instrument and Meter Co., Ltd., it can test up to 6.5
GHz radio frequency/ signal and perform true average power measurements over a high dynamic
range of -60 dBm to +20 dBm. The measurement reading is displayed on the display interface of
the USB Power Meter mode of 4957B. The test block diagram is shown in Figure 4-1, and
attenuators can be added as required.
After startup, press 【Mode】 to pop up a mode selection dialog box, select [USB Power
Measurement], and press [OK] to enter the USB power measurement mode after completing the
progress bar.

All operations in this section are based on the premise of the selected
Notice
power measurement mode, which will not be described separately later.

Attenuator(Optional)

8723X DUT

Figure 8-1 Power Measurement Structure Chart

Figure 8-2 USB Power Measurement Interface

143 / 248
4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
USB power measurement mode(optional)
The USB power sensor of 4957B recommends that you purchase the high-performance
microwave power sensor based on the USB interface developed by China Electronics Instrument
and Meter Co., Ltd., which provides following types and can be purchased based on your testing
requirements:

First, observe the maximum input power range of the USB power sensor
Notice identification to ensure that the input is within the specified range to
avoid damage to the probe caused by excessive power!

Table 8-1 8723XUSB Power Sensor

Model Frequency range Input Power Input Connector

Range Mode

87230 9kHz~6GHz -50dBm～+20dBm N(m)

87231 10MHz～18GHz -60dBm～+20dBm N(m)

87232 50MHz～26.5GHz -60dBm～+20dBm 3.5mm(m)

87233 50MHz～40GHz -60dBm～+20dBm 2.4mm(m)

Connect the power sensor

a) Connect the small port of the USB cable to the 8723XUSB power sensor.
b) Then connect the large end of the USB cable to the USB interface of the spectrum analyzer,
and the green indicator light of the power sensor will be on later.
c) If user wants to power off, please unplug the USB cable to turn off the USB power sensor, and
then the green LED will go out.

The 8723XUSB power sensor is enclosed with the USB cable. The user
Notice can use his own USB cable, but make sure that the cable meets
international safety standards!

144 / 248
 4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
USB power measurement mode(optional)
8.2 Menu Structure

频率 幅度 平均/带宽 校零

平均
频率 最大刻度 校零
关 开
平均因子
最小刻度
16

自动比例

全刻度

偏移
关 开

偏移

相对测量
关 开

Figure 8-3 Overall Block Diagram of Power Measurement Menu

145 / 248
4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
USB power measurement mode(optional)
8.3 Menu Description
8.3.1 Frequency menu

频率 ·[Frequency]: Press【Freq】→ [Frequency], you can use the number

keys, and then select the corresponding frequency menu, or use 【↑】 【↓】
频率
or the knob to change, and the frequency modification step is 10 MHz.
·[Special Notes]: The setting range of the frequency is related to the
selected USB power sensor. For the specific range, refer to Table 6-1.

8.3.2 Amplitude menu

·[Maximum Scale]: Press 【Amplitude】 → [Max Scale], the maximum

value of the currently displayed signal can be changed by using the number
keys, or using 【↑】 【↓】 or the knob, and the default modification step is 1
dB.

·[Minimum Scale]: Press 【Amplitude】 → [Minimum Scale], the minimum

value of the currently displayed signal can be changed by using the number
keys, or using 【↑】 【↓】 or the knob, and the default modification step is 1
幅度
dB.

最大刻度 ·[Auto Scale]: Press 【Amplitude】 → [Auto Scale] to display the

measurement signal within the scope of 10 dB.

最小刻度 ·[full Scale]: Press 【Amplitude】 → [Full Scale] to display the

measurement signal within the scope of 10 dB.

自动比例 ·[Offset Off On]: Press 【Amplitude】 → [Offset Off On], when the power
of the kits to be measured is greater than the maximum power value that
the instrument can measure, the measured power can be reduced within
全刻度 the normal measurement range by connecting an attenuator. The power
offset function allows for setting offset values to offset attenuation values or
偏移 cable losses for added attenuators or connecting cables. It also allows for
关 开 setting power offsets for gains of added amplifiers. Positive values can
偏移 compensate losses and negative values can compensate gains.
0.00 ·[Offset]: Press 【Amplitude】 → [Offset]
相对测量 ·[Relative Measurement Off On]: Press 【Amplitude】 → [Relative
关 开 Measurement Off On], the relative measurement function reflects the
change in power that has been set to the reference signal. In the event of
using the unit of dBm , it is the difference between the measured value
and the saved value, and the reading is expressed in dB; and in the event
of using the unit of W , it is the ratio of the measured value to the saved
value, and it is expressed in percentage %. If the relative measurement
switch is turned on, the instrument will measure and save the current power
level. At the same time, the power measurement will show a power level
relative to the saved value.

146 / 248
 4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
USB power measurement mode(optional)
8.3.3 Bandwidth menu

·[Ave Off On]: Press 【Amplitude】 → [Average Off On], you can use
the number keys, or use 【↑】 【↓】 or the knob to change, and the
average modification step is 1.
BW/Average ·[Special Notes]: The averaging function is generally used to measure
low-power signals or signals close to noise power. It can smooth traces
Average
to reduce the influence of random noise on the measurement and
OFF ON
improve measurement accuracy, but at the same time it will reduce
measuring speed. The times of averaging determine the times for
reading averaging. The more averaging times, the more the noise will be
reduced.

8.3.4 Zero menu

·[Zero]: Press [Zero] → [Zero].

•[Special Notes]: In order to improve the measuring accuracy of the
instrument, zeroing is necessary before using 8723X series USB
power probes to measure small signal power. Zeroing refers to
measuring and storing the noise of the whole measuring channel.
During the measurement, it is required to deduct the zeroing value
校零 from the actual measurement value, namely, deducting the noise of the
channel, and after that the reading should be the input signal level of
校零 the channel. The zeroing of USB power probes is consistent with that
of ordinary power probes. The zero refers to the internal zero of the
USB power sensor, and the internal zero adds a switch at the front end
of the measurement channel, and user does not need to disconnect
the sensor from the device under test, and test and measure and save
the noise of the channel. During the internal zero process, the RF
signal is constantly applied to the power sensor, which reduces the
wear on the sensor connector and shortens the test time.

8.3.5 File menu

Refer to the file menu in the vector network analysis mode

147 / 248
4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Interference analysis measurement mode(optional)
9 Interference analysis measurement mode (optional)

9.1 Introduction to typical measurement

The interference analysis measurement is an extension for the spectrum measurement mode.
After startup, press 【Mode】 to pop up a mode selection dialog box, select [Spectrum Analysis],
and press [OK] to enter the spectrum analysis mode after completing the progress bar. Then press
[System]→[Measurement Mode]→[Interference Analysis] on the touch screen to enter the
interference analysis mode.

Figure 9-1 Main Interface of Interference Analysis

The interference analysis mode of the 4957B instrument is divided into the following three
common measurement modes:
Spectrum measurement (for specific operations, please refer to the chapter on spectrum analysis,
which will not be described repeatedly in this section);
Waterfall chart measurement;
Received signal strength indication (RSSI) measurement.

All operations in this section are based on the premise of the selected
Notice
interference analysis mode, which will not be described separately later.

9.1.1 Waterfall Chart Measurement

The waterfall chart uses the frequency-amplitude-time three-dimensional display method, so as to
easily observe periodic or intermittent signals. The intensity of the timing signal amplitude is
reflected by the difference in the color display of the waterfall chart.
In order to facilitate the observation of the measurement signal, the following steps can be taken:

a) Press 【Freq】 → [Sweep Width] → [Full Sweep Width], then press 【Peak】 to get the
maximum value point of the current measurement signal, Then press [Marker → Center
Frequency] to set the current peak point as the center frequency, and at this moment the
maximum value will be displayed at the center of the trace area.
b) Press 【BW】 → [Resolution Bandwidth Auto Man], use the number keys or 【↑】【↓】 keys
or the knob to set the appropriate resolution bandwidth, and similarly set the appropriate video
bandwidth value.

148 / 248
 4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Demodulation analysis measurement mode(optional)
c) Press 【Amplitude】 → [Ref Level] to bring the current maximum value point close to the
topmost position of the display area, and press [Scale/Graduation] to set the appropriate
scale/graduation value for easy viewing.
d) Press [Auto Save] → [Scan Interval] to set the scan interval value.
When the scan interval is greater than 0, the trace will be set to the
Notice maximum hold state, ensuring that the maximum value of the signal
obtained by each scan will be displayed on the interface.

e) Press [Sweep Width Time] to set the time to be recorded, then through [Auto Save Off On],
you can set the automatic storage, which will be automatically carried out after each screen is
completed.
f) Press [Auto Save] → [Time Marker], and move the horizontal straight line in the vertical
direction of the waterfall chart by using the number keys or 【↑】【↓】 or the knob, and the
spectrogram below will display the trace information in the straight line position.

When the time marker value is greater than 0, the trace is no longer
Notice refreshed, and the waterfall chart area is no longer updated.

g) The interference analysis for the 4957 provides six independent markers for reading out the
amplitude and frequency values of the marker position. The specific usage methods are as
follows: 【Mkr】 → \[Marker 1 2 3 4 5 6].
h) If you want to save the current waterfall chart measurement information as a picture, you can
use 【File】 → [Save Picture].
i) The waterfall chart test structure is as shown in Figure 5-1 (the display is different under
different parameter settings, and Figure 5-1 is just an example):

Figure 9-2 Interference Analysis Waterfall Chart

9.1.2 RSSI measurement

RSSI measurement is mainly used to measure the intensity change of a point frequency signal
over a period of time.
149 / 248
4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Interference analysis measurement mode(optional)
In order to facilitate the observation of the measurement signal, the following steps can be taken:
a) To set the scan interval time, [Auto Save] → [Scan Interval], and the scan interval time
represents the sweep time of two adjacent points in each scan;
b) To set the sweep width recording time, [Auto Save] → [Sweep Width Time], set the time to
be recorded and displayed. After reaching the set sweep width time, the display interface will
no longer refresh the display.
c) To turn on the Auto Save switch, [Auto Save] → [Auto Save Off On], the data will be
automatically saved to the file after each screen is completed.

After setting the sweep width time, the data points displayed on the
Notice screen only record the data points in the most recent time, not the data
points in the whole sweep width time.

The RSSI test structure is as shown in Figure 5-2 (the display is different under different parameter
settings, and Figure 5-2 is just an example):

Figure 9-3 Interference Analysis RSSI Test Chart

150 / 248
 4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Demodulation analysis measurement mode(optional)
9.2 Interference Analysis Menu Structure
频率 扫宽 幅度/标尺 带宽/平均 检波

参考电平 分辨率带宽
中心频率 扫宽 自动
0.0dBm 自动 手动
视频带宽
扫宽 > 全扫宽 参考位置 标准
自动 手动
衰减器 平均
起始频率 零扫宽 正峰值
自动 手动 关 开

终止频率 刻度/格 SPAN/RBW

上次扫宽 负峰值
20.0dB 100
步进频率 幅度单位 RBW/VBW
< 返回 取样
自动 手动 dBm 1
信号标准 前置放大器 检波
> > 均值
-- 关 开 自动
信道号
-- 均方根

< 返回

信号标准 光标 光标-> 峰值 扫描

光标 光标-> 扫描时间
表头 最大峰值
123456 中心频率 自动 手动
光标-> 扫描类型
表尾 普通模式 次峰值
步进频率 连续 单次
光标->
上一页 差值模式 左邻峰值 重新扫描
起始频率
噪声光标 光标->
下一页 右邻峰值
关 开 终止频率

立即调用 光标 > < 返回 最大值

> 光标关闭 最小值

光标->
取消 全部关闭
中心频率

Figure 9-4 Overall Menu Block Diagram of Interference Analysis

151 / 248
4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Interference analysis measurement mode(optional)

自动存储 测量

扫描间隔
频谱测量
Auto
扫宽时间
瀑布图
Auto
自动存储
RSSI
关 开
时间光标
0 ns

>
迹线
重启测量
刷新迹线

最大保持

最小保持

Figure 9-5 Overall Menu Block Diagram of Interference Analysis (Continued)

152 / 248
 4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Demodulation analysis measurement mode(optional)
9.3 Description of Interference Analysis Menu
9.3.1 Frequency menu

·[Center frequency]: Press 【Freq】→[Center Freq], use the numeric

keys on the front panel, select [GHz], [MHz], [kHz] and [Hz] in the
frequency unit menu, or use the 【↑】 【↓】 keys and the knob for setting.

·[Special Notes]: When using the 【↑】 【↓】 keys and the knob, the size
of the frequency step is the same as the set value of the [Step Freq].
After pressing [Step Freq Auto/Man] to switch to [Step Freq Auto/Man],
you can use the numeric keys or the 【↑】 【↓】 keys and the knob to set
the step frequency value.

频率 ·[Span]: Press 【Freq】→[Span] to activate the span submenu. You

can use the numeric keys, and then select the frequency unit to
中心频率 change. You can also use the 【↑】 【↓】 keys and the knob to change
the span. For the detailed information, please refer to the description of
the [Span] menu.
扫宽 >
·[Special Notes]: Use the【↑】 【↓】keys and the knob to change the
sweep width, and change based on the step of 1-2-5 (in the RSSI
起始频率 mode, it can only be the zero sweep width mode ) .

·[Start Freq]: Press 【Freq】→[Start Freq], use the numeric keys on

终止频率 the front panel, select the frequency unit, or use the 【↑】
【↓】 keys and
the knob for setting.
步进频率
自动 手动 ·[Stop Freq]: Press【Freq】→[Stop Freq], use the numeric keys on the
front panel, select the frequency unit, or use the 【↑】
【↓】 keys and the
信号标准 >
knob for setting.
--
·[Signal Standard]: Press 【Freq】→[Signal Standard], use the 【↑】
信道号
【↓】 keys and the knob to select the signal standard, and use the
--
dialog box menu [Immediate Recall] or [OK] key for recalling. Refer
to the dialog box menu for details of the dialog box menu.
·[Special Notes]: After the signal standard is loaded, the center
frequency and the span are set to the center frequency and the span
value defined in the signal standard.

·[Channel No.]: Press 【Freq】→[Channel No.] to pop up the channel

number setting dialog box, and use the numeric keys or the 【↑】【↓】
keys and the knob to set the channel number.
·[Special Notes]: The setting of the channel number shall be carried
out under the premise of loading the signal standard, otherwise a
prompt that it cannot be set will pop up.

153 / 248
4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Interference analysis measurement mode(optional)
9.3.2 Sweep width menu

·[Span]: Press 【Freq】→[Span] to activate the span submenu. You

can use the numeric keys, and then select the frequency unit to
扫宽 change. You can also use the 【↑】 【↓】 keys and the knob to change
the span. For the detailed information, please refer to the description of
扫宽 the [Span] menu.

·[Special Notes]: Use the 【↑】

【↓】 keys and the knob to change the
span with a step of 1-2-5.
全扫宽
·[Full Span]: Press [Span]→[Full Span] to set the current span to
44.1GHz.
零扫宽 ·[Span]: Press 【Freq】→[Span]→[Zero Span] to set the current span
to 0Hz.

·[Last Span]: Press 【Freq】→[Span]→[Last Span] to restore the span

上次扫宽
to the value set last time.

·[Back]: Press 【Freq】→[Span]→[Back] to return to the 【Freq】

< 返回 menu.
·[Special Notes]: The RSSI mode can only be a zero sweep width
mode.

9.2.3 Amplitude menu

·[Ref Level]: Press 【Amplitude】→[Ref Level], use the numeric keys

on the front panel, and then select [dBuV], [-dBuV], [mV] and [uV], or
use the 【↑】 【↓】 keys and the knob to set it.
幅度 ·[Special Notes]: When the 【↑】
【↓】 keys and the knob are used, the
step is 10dB.
参考电平
0.0dBm ·[Ref Pos]: Press 【Amplitude】→[Ref Pos], and use the numeric keys
or the 【↑】 【↓】 keys and the knob to change it.
参考位置
·[Atten Auto Man]: Press 【Amplitude】→[Atten Auto Man] to switch
the automatic and manual switch of the attenuator through the menu.
衰减器
You can use the numeric keys or the 【↑】 【↓】 keys and the knob to
自动 手动
change it.
刻度/格 ·[Special Notes]: The setting range of the attenuation value is 0 dB -
20.0dB 60 dB, with the step value of 10 dB.
幅度单位 ·[Scale]: Press 【Amplitude】→[Scale], and use the numeric keys or
dBm the 【↑】【↓】 keys and the knob to set the scale within the setting range
前置放大器 of 0.1dB - 20dB.
关 开 ·[Amp Unit]: In the interference analysis mode, the amplitude unit is
uniformly displayed in dBm.
·[Pre Amp Off On]: Press 【Amplitude】→[Pre Amp Off On] to turn
the preamplifier on or off.

154 / 248
 4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Demodulation analysis measurement mode(optional)
9.3.4 Bandwidth menu

·[RBW Auto Man]: Press 【BW】→[RBW Auto Man], and use the
numeric keys on the front panel or the 【↑】【↓】 keys and the knob to
set it.
·[Special Notes]: Since the resolution bandwidth is subject to the
bandwidth of the IF filter, the shape of trace depends on the IF filter.
This instrument supports variable resolution bandwidth settings,
ranging from 1 Hz. ~10MHz, which can be changed with a step of
带宽 1-3-10.

·[VBW Auto Man]: Press 【Amplitude】→[VBW Auto Man], and use the
分辨率带宽
numeric keys or the 【↑】
【↓】 keys and the knob to change it.
自动 手动
·[Special Notes]: The video bandwidth filter is used to smooth the
视频带宽 traces, aiming to improve the ability of detecting weak signals in noise
自动 手动 signals. This instrument supports variable resolution bandwidth
平均 settings, ranging from 1Hz~10MHz, which can be changed with a step
关 开 of 1-3-10.

SPAN/RBW ·[Ave Off On]: Press 【BW】→[Ave Off On], the average function can
100 smooth the display trace without changing the video bandwidth filter,
and use the numeric keys or the 【↑】 【↓】 keys and the knob to change
RBW/VBW it.
1
·[SPAN/RBW]: Press 【BW】→[SPAN/RBW] to set the ratio of span to
检波 resolution bandwidth. In automatic mode, the resolution bandwidth will
>
自动 automatically change with the change of span. You can use numeric
keys or the 【↑】 【↓】 keys and the knob to change it.

·[RBW/VBW]: Press 【BW】→[RBW/VBW]. In automatic mode, the

video bandwidth will change with the change of resolution bandwidth.
You can use numeric keys or the 【↑】 【↓】 keys and the knob to change
it.

·[Detection]: Press 【BW】→[Detection] to open the detection function

submenu. Please refer to the [Detection] menu for details.

155 / 248
4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Interference analysis measurement mode(optional)
·[Auto]: Press【BW】→[Detection]→[Auto], the detection is the same as
检波
that in the spectrum analysis mode.
·[Standard]: Press 【BW】→[Detection]→[Standard], the most
自动
commonly used detection method can see the signal and noise base at
the same time without losing any signal.
标准
·[PosPeak]: Press 【BW】→[Detection]→[PosPeak] to ensure that no
peak signal is missed and to measure the signals that are very close to
正峰值 the noise base.

·[NegPeak]: Press 【BW】→[Detection]→[NegPeak], it is used in the

负峰值 self-inspection of the bandwidth millimeter wave RFanalyzer in most
cases, but it is rarely used in the test, and it can reproduce the
modulation envelope of the AM signal very well.
取样
·[Sampling]: Press 【BW】→[Detection]→[Sampling], it is beneficial to
measuring the noise signal, and can measure the noise better than the
均值
standard detection.

·[Ave]: Press 【BW】→[Detection]→[Ave] to average the data in the

均方根
sampling interval.

·[Rms]: Press 【BW】→[Detection]→[Rms] to calculate the root mean

< 返回
square of the data in the sampling interval.

156 / 248
 4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Demodulation analysis measurement mode(optional)
9.3.5 Marker menu

·【Mkr】→[Mkr 1 2 3 4 5 6]: Press 【Mkr】→[Mkr 1 2 3 4 5 6] to switch

between different marker displays, and the selected marker will be
marked with an underline.

·[Normal Mode]: Press 【Mkr】→[Normal Mode] to set the currently

光标 selected marker display mode to normal mode.

·[Difference Mode]: Press 【Mkr】→[Difference Mode] to display the

光标
amplitude difference and frequency difference between the two frequency
123456
markers (time difference in case of zero bandwidth). Use the knob, step
key or numeric key to move the active frequency marker. The displayed
普通模式
amplitude difference is in dB by default.

·[Noise Mkr Off On]: Press 【Marker】 → [Noise Marker Off On], the
差值模式
noise marker shows the noise power that normalizes the noise to the 1Hz
bandwidth near the active marker. At this time, the detector is set to the
噪声光标
root-mean-square detection mode. In the default state, when the noise
关 开
marker is turned on, the unit of the marker reading is automatically
switched to dBm/Hz.
光标- > >
·[Mkr→]: Press 【Mkr】→[Mkr→] to open the marker function submenu,
which allows users to use the marker as a reference to change the
光标关闭
instrument display. Please refer to the [Mkr→] function menu for details.

·[Mkr Off]: Press 【Mkr】→[Mkr Off] to turn off the currently activated
全部关闭
marker.

·[All Off]: Press 【Mkr】→[All Off] to turn off all markers that have been
turned on.
·[Special Notes]: There is no marker function in RSSI measurement
mode.

光标-> ·[Mkr→Center Freq]: Press 【Mkr】→[Mkr→]→[Mkr→Center Freq], the

marker will move to the center frequency, and the reading at the center
frequency is displayed on the screen.
光标->
中心频率 ·[Mkr→Step Freq]: Press 【Mkr】→[Mkr→]→[Mkr→Step Freq] to set the
stepping amount of the center frequency, that is, the value of the
光标-> frequency step is equal to the marker frequency. If the difference marker
步进频率 function is activated, the frequency step value is equal to the frequency of
the difference marker.
光标-> ·[Mkr→Start Freq]: Press 【Mkr】→[Mkr→]→[Mkr→Start Freq] to set the
起始频率 start frequency equal to the marker frequency.

光标-> ·[Mkr→Stop Freq]: Press 【Mkr】→[Mkr→]→[Mkr→Stop Freq] to set the

stop frequency equal to the marker frequency.
终止频率
·[Back]: Return to the previous menu
< 返回 (not available in RSSI measurement mode)

157 / 248
4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Interference analysis measurement mode(optional)
9.3.6 Peak menu

·[Max Peak]: Press 【Peak】→[Max Peak] to set the current active

marker to the maximum peak point of the measurement trace and
display the frequency and amplitude of the marker in the upper center
峰值 of the screen.
·[Sub Peak]: Press [Peak]→[Sub Peak] to move the active marker to
最大峰值
the next highest point on the trace that is associated with the current
marker position.
次峰值 ·Left Peak]: Press 【Peak】→[Left Peak] to find the next peak to the left
of the current frequency marker position.
左邻峰值 ·[Right Peak]: Press【Peak】→[Right Peak] to find the next peak to the
right of the current frequency marker position.
右邻峰值 ·[Max]: Place a marker at the highest point of the trace and display the
frequency and amplitude of the marker in the upper right corner of the
screen. Pressing this button will not change the activated functions.
最大值
·[Min]: Press [Peak]→[Min] to place a marker at the lowest point of the
trace and display the frequency and amplitude of the marker in the
最小值 upper right corner of the screen. Pressing this button will not change
the activated functions.
光标->
·[Mkr→Center Freq]: Press [Peak]→[Mkr → Center Freq] and set
中心频率 the center frequency equal to the marker frequency. This function
quickly moves the signal to the center of the screen.
(not available in RSSI measurement mode)

9.3.7 Scan menu

·[Swp Time Auto Man]: Press 【Swp】→[Swp Time Auto Man] to switch
the sweep time between Auto and Manual. The underline marks the
current state. If the sweep time is automatic, the RF analyzer
automatically sets the sweep time to the fastest according to the current
instrument status, and the screen displays the fastest sweep time under
扫描 the current setting. If the sweep time is manually set, the sweep time
value can be input at this time. Use the numeric keys to enter the sweep
扫描时间 time value and select the time unit by pressing corresponding soft key to
自动 手动 complete the setting. If the sweep time is automatic, the sweep speed
may change depending on the change of RBW and VBW. The larger the
扫描类型 values of RBW and VBW, the faster the sweeping speed and vice versa.
连续 单次 If the sweep time of the instrument meet the minimum scanning time limit,
the maximum non-zero sweep width can be set to 800 s, and the
重新扫描 maximum zero sweep width can be set to be 600 s.
·[Swp Type Cont Single]: Press 【Swp】→[Swp Type Cont Single]. The
sweep type setting determines how the RF analyzer sweeps and when it
stops to enter into the hold state. In the interference analysis mode, it
provides two sweep modes: Continuous sweep and single sweep.
·[Re-sweep]: Press 【Swp】→[Re-sweep] to restart the sweep.

158 / 248
 4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Demodulation analysis measurement mode(optional)
9.3.8 Auto Save menu

·[Swp Interval]: Press [Auto Save]→[Swp Interval Auto] to set the

sweep interval. After setting the sweep time, the trace will be switched to
自动存储 the maximum hold state by default to ensure that all signals measured
during the sweep interval can be recorded.
扫描间隔 ·[Span Time]: Press [Auto Save]→[Span Time Auto], and the span time
Auto is the entire sweep time. After the sweep reaches the span time, it will
扫宽时间 stop recording.
Auto ·[Auto Save Off On]: Press [Auto Save]→[Auto Save Off On], and press
自动存储 the menu to switch the automatic save switch.
关 开 ·[Special Notes]: The automatic save function cannot be turned on until
the span time is set.
时间光标
0 ns ·[Time Mkr]: Press [Auto Save]→[Time Mkr] to view the historical data.
·[Special Notes]: It can only be used in the waterfall chart measurement
>
mode.
·[Re-measure]: Press [Auto Save]→[Re-measure] to restart the sweep.
重启测量
·[Special Notes]: This menu shall not be used in spectrum
measurement;
The time marker menu function shall not be used in RSSI.

9.3.9 Measurement menu

测量 ·[Spectrum Measurement]: Press 【Measure】 → [Spectrum

Measurement] to switch the measurement mode to spectrum
measurement.
频谱测量
·[waterfall Chart]: Press 【Measure】 → [Waterfall] to switch the
measurement mode to waterfall chart.
瀑布图
·[RSSI]: Press 【Measure】 → [RSSI] to switch the measurement
mode to RSSI.
RSSI

159 / 248
4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Demodulation analysis measurement mode(optional)
10 Demodulation Analysis measurement mode (optional)

10.1 Introduction to typical measurement

The demodulation analysis measurement mode is an extension of the spectrum measurement
mode. After startup, press 【Mode】 to pop up a mode selection dialog box, select [Spectrum
Analysis Mode], and press [OK] to enter the spectrum analysis mode after completing the
progress bar. Then press 【System】 → [Measurement Mode] → [Demodulation Analysis] on the
touch screen to enter the demodulation analysis mode.

Figure 10-1 Main Interface of Demodulation Analysis Mode

The demodulation analysis measurement mode provides the display of AM, FM and PM
modulation signal spectrums and the analysis of related parameters. The main maps and the
measurements of related parameters are as shown below:
Radio frequency spectrum: Similar to the spectrum analysis mode, it displays the spectrogram of
the modulated signal, and it can be used to measure the occupied bandwidth.
Audio map: It displays a spectrogram of the demodulated audio signal.
Audio waveform: It displays the waveform of the demodulated audio signal in the time domain.
Parameter analysis: It can measure and analyze the parameters such as carrier power,
modulation rate, carrier frequency offset, modulation depth (AM), modulation frequency offset
(FM), modulation phase offset (PM), signal-to-noise-and-distortion ratio, modulation distortion,
total harmonic distortion, etc. of modulated signals.

All operations in this section are based on the premise of the selected
Notice demodulation analysis mode, which will not be described separately
later.
The demodulation analysis can display three kinds of maps at the same time, or each map can be
displayed separately. You can press the 【Measure】 menu, and select [Radio Frequency Map],
[Audio Map], [Audio Waveform], and [Show all] to choose to display a certain map or to display all
maps at the same time.
In order to facilitate the observation of the measurement signal, the following steps can be taken:
a) Press 【Measure】 → [Demodulation Type AM FM PM] to select the type of analog signal
to be demodulated.
b) Press 【Freq】 → [Center Frequency ] to set the center frequency of the measurement
signal.
c) Press【BW】 → [Intermediate Frequency Bandwidth], and use the number keys or the 【↑】
160 / 248
 4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Demodulation analysis measurement mode(optional)
【↓】 keys or the knob to set an appropriate intermediate frequency bandwidth.
d) Press 【Amplitude】 → [Ref Level] to set the reference level of the radio frequency
spectrum, and press [Scale/Graduation] to set the appropriate scale/graduation value to
facilitate viewing the radio frequency spectrum.
e) e) Press [Audio Map] → [Sweep Width] to set the appropriate sweep width, and press
[Scale/Graduation] to set the appropriate scale/graduation value to facilitate viewing the
spectrogram of audio signals.
f) Press [Audio Waveform] → [Sweep time] to set the display time of the audio signal
waveform, press [Scale/Graduation] to set the appropriate scale/graduation value to facilitate
viewing the spectrogram of audio signals.

When setting the intermediate frequency bandwidth, you need to select

an appropriate value. The intermediate frequency bandwidth shall be
greater than the width of the modulation signal in order to accurately
Notice demodulate the signal. You can observe the bandwidth of the modulation
signal in the radio frequency spectrum. At the same time, if the
intermediate frequency bandwidth is too large, noise would be
introduced, which would affect the accuracy of parameter measurement.
The following takes the measurement of FM signal as an example to introduce the measurement
method of demodulation analysis. First, input an FM modulation signal generated by a signal
source at the radio frequency input end of the instrument. The frequency of the signal is 6 GHz,
the amplitude is -10 dBm, the modulation rate is 3 kHz, and the modulation frequency offset is 30
kHz. The measuring steps are shown as follows:
a) Press 【Measure】 → [Demodulation Type AM FM PM] to select FM.
b) Press 【Freq】 → [Center Frequency] to set the center frequency of the measurement signal
to be 6 GHz.
c) Press 【BW】 → [Intermediate Frequency Bandwidth] to set the intermediate frequency
bandwidth to be 100 kHz.
d) Press 【Audio Map】 → [Sweep Width] to set the sweep width to be 50 kHz.
e) Press [Audio Waveform] → [Sweep time] to set to be 2 ms.
The measurement result is shown in Figure 7-1:

Figure 10-2 FM Demodulation Analysis Result

161 / 248
4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Demodulation analysis measurement mode(optional)
10.2 Demodulation analysis menu structure
频率 扫宽 幅度 带宽 信号标准

参考电平
中心频率 扫宽 中频带宽 表头
0.0dBm
平均
扫宽 > 上次扫宽 参考位置 表尾
关 开
衰减器
起始频率 > 上一页
自动 手动
刻度/格
终止频率 < 返回 下一页
10.0dB

步进频率 前置放大器
立即调用
自动 手动 关 开

信号标准 >
>
--
信道号 取消
--

光标 选择迹线 峰值 射频图谱 音频图谱

光标 占用带宽
射频图谱 最大峰值 扫宽
123456 关 开
测量方法 刻度/格
普通模式 音频图谱 次峰值
百分比 XdB 10.0dB
百分比
差值模式 音频波形 左邻峰值 参考位置
99.00%
XdB
选择迹线 > > 右邻峰值
-3.00dB

> < 返回 最大值

光标关闭 最小值

光标->
全部关闭
中心频率

Figure 10-3 Demodulation Analysis Menu

162 / 248
 4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Demodulation analysis measurement mode(optional)

音频波形 测量

解调类型
扫描时间
AM FM PM
刻度/格
射频图谱
20.0%

音频图谱

音频波形

显示全部

扫描类型
连续 单次

重新扫描

Figure 10-4 Demodulation Analysis Menu (Continued)

163 / 248
4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Demodulation analysis measurement mode(optional)
10.3 Description of demodulation analysis menu
10.3.1 Frequency menu

·[Center frequency]: Press 【Freq】 → [Center Frequency], through

the number keys on the front panel, select [GHz], [MHz], [kHz] and [Hz]
in the frequency unit menu, or use the 【↑】 【↓】 keys and the knob to
set the center frequency.

·[Special Notes]: When using the 【↑】 【↓】 keys and the knob, the size
of the frequency step is the same as the set value of the [ Step
Frequency]. After pressing the [Step Frequency Auto Man]to switch
to [Step Frequency Auto Man ], you can use the number keys or
the 【↑】 【↓】 keys and the knob to set the step frequency value.
频率 ·[Sweep Width]: Press 【Freq】 → [ Sweep Width ] to activate the
sweep width submenu. You can use the number keys, and then select
中心频率 the frequency unit to change. You can also use the 【↑】 【↓】 keys and
the knob to change the sweep width. For the detailed information,
please refer to the description of the [ Sweep Width ] menu.
扫宽 >
·[Special Notes]: Use the 【↑】
【↓】 keys and the knob to change the
span with a step of 1-2-5.
起始频率
· [Start Frequency]: Press 【Freq】 → [ Start Frequency ], and then
select the corresponding frequency unit through the number keys on
终止频率 the front panel, or use the 【↑】【↓】 keys and the knob to set.

·[Stop Frequency]: Press 【Freq】 → [Stop Frequency ], and then

步进频率
select the corresponding frequency unit through the number keys on
自动 手动
the front panel, or use the 【↑】【↓】 keys and the knob to set.
信号标准 >
·[Signal Standard]: Press 【Freq】 → [ Signal Standard ] to pop up
-- the related soft menu, including [ Header ], [ Footer ], [Page Up ],
信道号 [Page Down], and [ Recall Immediately ], select the relevant signal
-- standard, and use the [Recall Immediately ] key or the [OK] key to call.
·[Special Notes]: After the signal standard is loaded, the center
frequency and the sweep width are set to the center frequency and the
sweep width value defined in the signal standard.

·[Channel No.]: Press 【Freq】 → [ Channel number ] to pop up the

channel number setting dialog box, and use the number keys or the
【↑】 【↓】 keys and the knob to set the channel number.

·[Special Notes]: The setting of the channel number shall be carried

out under the premise of loading the signal standard, otherwise a
prompt that it cannot be set will pop up.

164 / 248
 4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Demodulation analysis measurement mode(optional)
10.3.2 Sweep width menu

·[Sweep Width]: Press 【Freq】 → [ Sweep Width ] to activate the

sweep width submenu. You can use the number keys, and then select
扫宽 the frequency unit to change the sweep width. You can also use the 【↑】
【↓】 keys and the knob to change.

·[Special Notes]: Use the 【↑】

【↓】 keys and the knob to change the
扫宽 span with a step of 1-2-5.

·[Last Sweep Width]: Press 【Freq】 → [ Sweep Width ]→[ Last

Sweep Width ], and restore the sweep width to the last set sweep width
上次扫宽 value.

·[Back]: Press 【Freq】 → [ Sweep Width ]→[Back ], and return the

【Freq】menu.
< 返回

10.3.3 Amplitude menu

·[Ref Level]: Press【Amplitude】→ [ Ref Level], use the number keys on

the front panel, and then select [dBm], [-dBm], [mV] and [uV], or use the
【↑】 【↓】 keys and the knob to set.
幅度
·[Special Notes]: When using the 【↑】
【↓】 keys and the knob, the step
参考电平 is 10 dB.

0.0dBm ·[Reference Position]: Press 【Amplitude】 → [Reference Position ],

you can use the number keys, and you can also use the 【↑】【↓】 keys
and the knob to change.
参考位置
·[Attenuator Auto Man]: Press 【Amplitude】 → [ Attenuator Auto
Man] to switch the automatic and manual switch of the attenuator
衰减器 through the menu. You can use the number keys, and you can also use
自动 手动 the 【↑】 【↓】 keys and the knob to change.

·[Special Notes]: The setting range of the attenuation value is 0 dB ~ 60

刻度/格 dB, with the step value of 10 dB.
10.0dB ·[Scale/Graduation]: Press 【Amplitude】 → [ Scale / Graduation ] to
set via the number keys or the 【↑】
【↓】 keys and the knob, and the
前置放大器 setting range of scale / graduation is 0.1 dB ～ 20 dB.
关 开
·[Pre Amp Off On]: Press 【Amplitude】 to control the on/off state of the
preamplifier. Only when the reference level is less than -40 dBm, this
function will be activated.

165 / 248
4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Demodulation analysis measurement mode(optional)
10.3.4 Bandwidth menu

·[Immediate Frequency Bandwidth]: Press 【BW】 → [Immediate

Frequency Bandwidth], through the number keys on the front panel,
select the corresponding frequency units of [GHz], [MHz], [kHz] and
[Hz], or use the 【↑】【↓】 keys and the knob to set.
带宽
·[Special Notes]: The intermediate frequency bandwidth shall be
greater than the width of the modulation signal in order to accurately
中频带宽 demodulate the signal. You can observe the bandwidth of the
modulation signal in the radio frequency spectrum. At the same time, if
平均 the intermediate frequency bandwidth is too large, noise would be
关 开 introduced, which would affect the accuracy of parameter
measurement. The immediate frequency bandwidth ranges from 10 kHz
to 300 kHz, changing in the steps of 1-3-10.

·[Average Off On]: Press 【BW】 → [ Avg Off On], the average
function can smooth the displayed trace. When the average function is
turned on, you can use the number keys to select the average times,
and you can also use the 【↑】 【↓】 keys and the rotary round to change.

166 / 248
 4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Demodulation analysis measurement mode(optional)
10.3.5 Marker menu

·[Marker 1 2 3 4 5 6]: Press 【Mkr】 → [Marker 1 2 3 4 5 6] to switch

光标 between different marker displays, and the selected marker will be
marked with an underline.
光标
·[Normal Mode]: Press 【Mkr】 → [ Normal Mode ], and set the
123456 currently selected marker display mode to be the normal mode.

·[Delta Mode]: Press 【Mkr】 → [ Delta Mode ], and set the currently
普通模式 selected marker display mode to be the delta mode. The delta mode
displays the frequency difference and the amplitude difference between
the difference marker and the reference marker ( it is the time difference
差值模式 at the zero sweep width ). When the amplitude unit is selected to be
dBm, dBmV, dBuV, dBW, dBV, dBA, dBmA and dBuA, the displayed
amplitude value unit is dB, and when the amplitude unit is displayed to
be A, W and V, the displayed amplitude unit is % .
选择迹线 >
·[Selection Trace]: Press 【Mkr】 → [ Selection Trace ]to pop up the
related soft menu of the trace, including [ Radio Frequency Spectrum ],
[ Audio Map ] and [ Audio waveform ]. For details, please refer to the
光标关闭
menu of [ Selection Trace ].

·[Marker Off]: Press 【Mkr】 →[Marker Off ] to turn off the currently
全部关闭 activated marker.

·[All Off]: Press 【Mkr】 →[All Off] to turn off all the activated markers.

·[Selection Trace]: Press 【Mkr】 → [ Selection Trace ]

选择迹线
·[Radio Frequency Spectrum]: Press 【Mkr】 → [ Selection
Trace ]→[ Radio Frequency Spectrum ], select the current trace to be the
trace in the radio frequency spectrum, and the marker operates only on
射频图谱 this trace.

·[Audio Map ]: Press 【Mkr】 → [ Selection Trace ]→[ Audio Map ],

select the current trace to be the trace in the audio map, and the marker
音频图谱 operates only on this trace.

·[Audio Waveform]: Press 【Mkr】 → [ Selection Trace ]→[ Audio

Waveform ], select the current trace to be the trace in the audio
音频波形 waveform, and the marker operates only on this trace.

< 返回

167 / 248
4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Demodulation analysis measurement mode(optional)
10.3.6 Peak menu

·[Max Peak]: Press 【Peak】→[Max Peak] to set the current active

marker to the maximum peak point of the measurement trace and
峰值 display the frequency and amplitude of the marker in the upper center of
the screen.

最大峰值 ·[Sub Peak]: Press [Peak]→[Sub Peak] to move the active marker to
the next highest point on the trace that is associated with the current
marker position.

次峰值 ·[Left Peak]: Press [Peak] →[ Left Peak ] to find the next peak to the
left of the current marker position.
·[Right Peak]: Press [Peak] →[ Right Peak ] to find the next peak to
左邻峰值 the right of the current marker position.
·[Max]: Place a marker at the highest point of the trace and display the
frequency and amplitude of the marker in the upper right corner of the
右邻峰值 screen. Pressing this button will not change the activated functions.
·[Min]: Press [Peak]→[Min] to place a marker at the lowest point of the
trace and display the frequency and amplitude of the marker in the upper
最大值 right corner of the screen. Pressing this button will not change the
activated functions.

·[Marker -> Center Frequency]: Press【Peak】→[ Marker → Center

最小值 Frequency ], and set the center frequency equal to the marker frequency.
This function quickly moves the signal to the center of the screen, and
光标-> this operation is only effective to the radio frequency spectrum.

中心频率 ·[Special Notes]: The operations of searching each peak value, the
maximum value and the minimum value are all carried out on the
selected trace. For details, see the menu of [Selection Trace].

10.3.7 Radio frequency spectrum menu

·[Special Notes]: The occupied bandwidth measurement in the radio

frequency spectrum is similar to that in the spectrum analysis mode,
射频图谱 except that it is only applied to the radio frequency spectrum in the
demodulation analysis measurement mode.
占用带宽 ·[Occupied Bandwidth Off On]: Press [Radio Frequency
关 开 Spectrum ]→[ Occupied Bandwidth Off On], and set the occupied
测量方法 bandwidth measurement switch.

百分比 XdB ·[Measuring Method Percentage XdB]: Press [Radio Frequency

Spectrum ]→[ Measuring Method Percentage XdB], and select different
百分比 measuring methods, including the percentage method or the XdB drop
99.00% method. The occupied bandwidth of the signal is obtained by
calculating the bandwidth of the portion of the frequency containing a
XdB certain percentage of the total transmitted signal power, and the
-3.00dB percentage of power can be set by the user. The descending XdB method
defines the occupied bandwidth as: the distance between the two
frequency points when the signal power drops by XdB on both sides of

168 / 248
 4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Demodulation analysis measurement mode(optional)
the frequency point where the peak power of the signal is located. The X
dB of the signal power drop is set by the user.
·[Percentage]: Press [Radio Frequency Spectrum]→[ Percentage ] to
set the percentage.
·[XdB]: Press [Radio Frequency Spectrum→[XdB] to set the XdB
value.

10.3.8 Audio map menu

·[Sweep Width]: Press [Audio Map]→[ Sweep Width ]to set the sweep
width of the audio map. The sweep width here shall be set large enough
to display the audio signal and associated harmonics. You can use the
number keys and then select the frequency unit to change the sweep
音频图谱
width, or you can use the 【↑】 【↓】 keys and the knob to change.

扫宽 ·[Scale]: Press [Audio Map ]→[ Scale / Graduation ], and set the scale of
the audio map to facilitate the observation of the audio map trace. You
can change the scale unit by using the number keys and then selecting
刻度/格
10.0dB the power units of [dB] , [-dB] , and you can also use the 【↑】【↓】 keys
and the knob to change.
参考位置 ·[Reference Position]: Press [Audio Map ]→[ Reference Position ],
and set the reference position of the audio map to facilitate the
observation of the audio map trace. You can use the number keys and
then click to confirm, and you can also use the 【↑】 【↓】 keys and the
knob to change the reference position.

10.3.9 Audio waveform menu

·[Sweep Time]: Press [ Audio Waveform ]→[Sweep Time ] to set the

sweep time of the audio waveform. The larger the sweep time is set
here, the more sampling points, and the more stable the measurement
results are.
音频波形 ·[Scale]: Press [ Audio Waveform ]→[ Scale / Graduation ], and set the
scale of the audio waveform to facilitate the observation of the audio
扫描时间 map trace. You can change the scale unit by using the number keys and
then selecting [%] or click the OK key, and you can also use the 【↑】 【↓】
刻度/格 keys and the knob to change.
20.0%
·[Special Notes]: The scale unit changes based on the type of the
demodulated signal. When measuring the AM signal, the scale unit is
percentage (%), when measuring the FM signal, the scale unit is the
frequency unit (Hz, kHz and GHz), and when measuring the PM signal,
the scale unit is the radian (Rad).

169 / 248
4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Demodulation analysis measurement mode(optional)
10.3.10 Measurement menu

·[Demodulation Type AM FM PM]: Press 【Measure】

测量 [Demodulation Type AM FM PM] to select the type of the signal to be
demodulated.
解调类型
AM FM PM ·[ Radio Frequency Spectrum ]: Press 【Measure】→[Radio
Frequency Spectrum], and choose to only display the radio frequency
射频图谱 spectrum.

·[Audio Map]: Press 【Measure】→[Audio Map], and choose to only

音频图谱 display the audio map.

·[Audio Waveform]: Press【Measure】→[Audio Waveform], and choose

音频波形 to only display the audio waveform.

·[Display All]: Press 【Measure】→[Display All], and choose to display

the radio frequency spectrum, the audio map, and the audio waveform
显示全部
simultaneously.

扫描类型 ·[Swp Type Cont Single]: Press 【Measure】 →[Sweep Type

连续 单次 Continuous Single ], and select continuous sweep or single sweep.

·[Sweep again]: Press 【Measure】 →[ Sweep Again ], and select to

重新扫描 trigger the single sweep. Only when the sweep type is set to be the
single sweep, it makes sense sweep again.

170 / 248
 4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Channel sweep measurement mode(optional)
11 Channel sweep measurement mode (optional)

11.1 Introduction to typical measurements

The channel sweep measurement mode is an extension of the spectrum measurement mode.
After startup, press 【Mode】 to pop up a mode selection dialog box, select [Spectrum Analysis
Mode], and press [OK] to enter the spectrum analysis mode first after completing the progress bar.
Then press [System]→[Measurement Mode]→[Channel Sweep] on the touch screen to enter the
channel sweep measurement mode.

Figure 11-1 Main Interface of Channel Sweep Measurement Mode

The channel sweep measurement mode provides the measurement of signal power for multiple
channels. The signal power is displayed in the form of a bar graph or a list, and the signal power of
up to 20 channels can be measured. Channel sweep is divided into three measurement methods
according to the way of setting the channel: Channel sweep, frequency sweep, and list sweep.
Channel sweep: Set the channel to be measured by setting the signal standard, the start channel,
and the channel step.
Frequency sweep: Set the channel to be measured by setting the start frequency and the
frequency step.
List sweep: Set the channel to be measured by setting the list.
All the three measurement methods can be used to set the bandwidth of the channel and the
number of channels to be measured.
All operations in this section are based on the premise of channel sweep
Notice
measurement, which will not be described separately later.

11.1.1 Channel sweep

The following is a measurement example of channel sweep. The main operation steps are as
follows:
a) Press 【Sweep】 →[Channel Sweep] →[Signal Standard] to set the standard of the channel
to be measured.
b) Press 【Sweep】 →[Channel Sweep]→[Start Channel] to set the start channel number to be
measured . This start channel shall meet the requirements of the selected signal standard.
c) Press 【Sweep】 →[Channel Sweep] →[Number of Channels], set the number of channels
to be measured, and up to 20 channels can be measured simultaneously.

171 / 248
4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Channel sweep measurement mode(optional)
d) Press 【Sweep】 →[Channel Sweep] →[Channel Step] to set the step of the channel to be
measured. The instrument will take the start channel number as the initial measurement
channel, and measure a certain number of channels successively in the set channel step.
e) Press 【Sweep】→[Display Diagram Table], and set to be the diagram display mode.
f) Press 【Sweep】 →[Power Display Real-time Maximum], select the Maximum option, and set
to display the maximum power of each channel.

Only when the maximum hold switch is on can set the power display to
Notice
be maximum.

Figure 11-2 Schematic Diagram of Channel Sweep

11.1.2 Frequency sweep

The following is a measurement example of frequency sweep. The main operation steps are as
follows:
a) Press 【Sweep】 →[Frequency Sweep] →[Start Frequency], and set the center frequency of
the start channel to be measured.
b) Press 【Sweep】 →[Frequency Sweep] →[Frequency Step], and set the frequency step of
the channel to be measured.
c) Press 【Sweep】 →[Frequency Sweep] →[Channel Bandwidth], and set the bandwidth of
the channel to be measured.
d) Press 【Sweep】 →[Channel Sweep] →[Number of Channels], set the number of channels
to be measured, and up to 20 channels can be measured simultaneously.
e) Press 【Measure】 →[Display Diagram Table], and set to be the diagram display mode.
f) Press 【Measure】 →[Power Display Real-time Maximum], select the Real-time option, and
set to display the real-time power of each channel.
g) Press 【Measure】 →[Color Single Double] to select the double color option.
h) Press 【Measure】 →[Chart Direction Vertical Parallel] to select the parallel chart display
mode.

172 / 248
 4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Channel sweep measurement mode(optional)

Figure 11-3 Schematic Diagram of Frequency Sweep

11.1.3 List Sweep

The following is a measurement example of frequency sweep. The main operation steps are as
follows:
a) Press 【Sweep】 →[List Sweep] →[Edit List], edit the channel list to be swept. In the list, the
information of each channel can be set by setting the signal standard and the channel number,
and the channel information can also be set by setting the frequency and the bandwidth.
b) Press 【Sweep】 →[List Sweep] →[Number of Channels], set the number of channels to be
measured, and up to 20 channels can be measured simultaneously.
c) Press 【Sweep】 →[Display Diagram Table], and set to be the diagram display mode.
d) Press 【Sweep】 →[Power Display Real-time Maximum], select the Real-time option, and set
to display the real-time power of each channel.

Figure 11-4 Schematic Diagram of List Sweep

173 / 248
4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Channel sweep measurement mode(optional)
11.2 Menu structure of channel sweep
幅度/标尺 扫描 信道扫描 信号标准

参考电平 频率扫描 信号标准

信道扫描 > > 表头
0.0dBm --
起始频率
刻度/格 890.000MHz 起始信道
频率扫描 > 表尾
10.0dB --
频率步进
列表扫描 > 200.000kHz 信道数量 上一页
信道带宽
200.000kHz 信道步进
下一页
1
信道数量 信道带宽
立即调用
200.000kHz
>
> >

< 返回
< 返回 取消

测量 列表扫描 编辑列表 信号标准

显示
编辑列表 > 信号标准 > 表头
图 表
最大保持
信道数量 信道号 表尾
关 开
单元
中心频率 上一页
信道 频率
功率显示
信道带宽 下一页
实时 最大
颜色
> 立即调用
单 双
图标方向
完成编辑 >
垂直 平行

取消编辑 取消

Figure 11-5 Channel Sweep Menu

174 / 248
 4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Channel sweep measurement mode(optional)
11.3 Description of channel sweep menu
11.3.1 Sweep menu

·[Channel Sweep]: Press 【Sweep】→[Channel Sweep], and set the

channel sweep measurement mode and activate the submenu
扫描 of[Channel Sweep]. You can set the sweep channel parameters in the
submenu of [Channel Sweep]. For details, see the submenu
of[Channel Sweep].
信道扫描 >
·[Freq Sweep]: Press 【Sweep】→[Frequency Sweep], and set the
frequency sweep measurement mode and activate the submenu
of[Frequency Sweep]. You can set the sweep channel parameters in
频率扫描 > the submenu of [Frequency Sweep]. For details, see the submenu
of[Frequency Sweep].

列表扫描 > ·[List Sweep]: Press 【Sweep】→[List Sweep], and set the list sweep
measurement mode and activate the submenu of[List Sweep]. You can
set the sweep channel parameters in the submenu of [List Sweep]. For
details, see the submenu of[List Sweep].

11.3.2 Channel sweep menu

·[Signal Standard]: }Press 【Sweep】→[Channel Sweep ]→[Signal

信道扫描 Standard ] to pop up the list of existing signal standards. Through the
related menus of [ Header ], [Footer], [Page Pp], [ Page Down ], etc.,
信号标准 click [Recall Immediately] to select the corresponding signal
>
-- standard.

·[Start Channel]: Press 【Sweep】 →[Channel Sweep ]→[ Start

起始信道
Channel ] to set the start channel number. This channel is the initial
-- channel for measurement, and this channel number can only be set
under the premise of selecting the signal standard.
信道数量 ·[Channel Num]: Press 【Sweep】→[ Channel Sweep ]→[ Number of
Channels ] to set the number of channels to be measured, and up to
信道步进 20 channels can be measured.
1 ·[Cannel Step]: Press 【Sweep】→[ Channel Sweep ]→[Channel
信道带宽 Step ] to set the step between the channels to be measured.

200.000kHz ·[Channel BW]: Press 【Sweep】→[ Channel Sweep ]→[Channel

Bandwidth ] to set the bandwidth of the channel to be measured.

175 / 248
4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Channel sweep measurement mode(optional)
11.3.3 Frequency sweep menu

频率扫描 ·[Start Frequency]: Press 【Sweep】 →[ Frequency Sweep ]→[Start

Frequency ] to set the center frequency of the start channel.
起始频率
·[Freq Step]: Press 【Sweep】→[ Frequency Sweep ]→[Frequency
890.000MHz
Step] to set the frequency step between the channels.
频率步进
·[Channel BW]: Press 【Sweep】→[ Frequency Sweep ]→[Channel
200.000kHz
Bandwidth ]to set the bandwidth of the channel to be measured.
信道带宽
·[Channel Num]: Press 【Sweep】→[Frequency Sweep ]→[Number of
200.000kHz
Channels ]to set the number of channels to be measured, and up to 20
channels can be measured.
信道数量

11.3.4 List sweep menu

列表扫描 ·[Edit List]: Press 【Sweep】 → [ List Sweep ]→[Edit List ] to pop up the
corresponding edit list menu. For details, please refer to the menu of
编辑列表 > [ Edit List ].

·[Channel Num]: Press 【Sweep】→[List Sweep ]→[Number of

信道数量 Channels ]to set the number of channels to be measured, and up to 20
channels can be measured.

·[Signal Standard]: Press [Edit List ] →[Signal Standard ] to pop up the

编辑列表 list of signal standards. Through [ Header ], [ Footer ], [ Page Up], and
[Page Down], select the required signal standard, and click [ Recall
信号标准 > Immediately].
·[Channel Number]: Press [ Edit List ]→[ Channel Number ] to display
the information such as the selected signal standard, the channel range,
信道号 etc. The user can also edit the channel number, and click [ Complete
Editing ] to save the settings.

中心频率 ·[Center Frequency]: Press [Edit List ]→[ Center Frequency ] to edit
the center frequency of the selected channel, and click [ Complete
Editing ] to save the settings.
信道带宽 ·[Channel BW]: Press [ Edit List ]→[ Channel Bandwidth ] to edit the
bandwidth of the selected channel, and click [ Complete Editing ] to save
the settings.
完成编辑
·[Complete Editing]: Press [ Edit List ]→[ Complete Editing ] to save the
changed settings, and return to the list sweep menu.
取消编辑 ·[Cancel Editing]: Press [ Edit List ]→[ Cancel Editing] to cancel the
changed settings, and return to the list sweep menu.

176 / 248
 4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Channel sweep measurement mode(optional)
11.3.5 Measurement menu

·[Display Diagram Table]: Press 【Measure】 →[Display Diagram

测量 Table] to select the icon display mode. For two kinds of diagrams, see
Figure 8-7and Figure 8-8.
显示
·[Max Hold Off On]: Press 【Measure】 →[Max Hold Off On ] to
图 表 set the maximum hold switch.
最大保持 ·[Unit Channel Frequency]: Press 【Measure】→[Unit Channel
关 开 Frequency ], and set to display the channel as the channel number or the
frequency.
单元
·[Power Display Real-time Maximum]: Press 【Measure】 →[Power
信道 频率
Display Real-time Maximum], and set to display power as real-time or
功率显示 maximum. Only when the maximum hold is on can set the maximum
实时 最大 display of power.

颜色 ·[Color Single Double]: Press 【Measure】 →[Color Single

Double ], and set to display the channel in a single color or double
单 双
colors.
图标方向 ·[Icon Direction Vertical Parallel]: Press 【Measure】 →[Icon
垂直 平行 Direction Vertical Parallel ], and set to display the channel diagram
in the vertical or parallel manner.

177 / 248
4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Field strength measurement mode(optional)
12 Field strength measurement mode (Optional)
12.1 Introduction to typical measurements
The field strength measurement mode is an extension of the spectrum measurement mode. After
startup, press 【Mode】 to pop up a mode selection dialog box, select [Spectrum Analysis Mode],
and press [OK] to enter the spectrum analysis mode after completing the progress bar. Then press
【System】 →[Measurement Mode]→[Field Strength Measurement] on the touch screen to enter
the field strength measurement mode.

Figure 12-1 Main Interface of Field Strength Measurement Mode

Field strength measurement is indispensable in the radiant intensity measurement of measured
equipment. According to different measurement modes, the field strength measurement can be
divided into: Three modes of point frequency measurement, frequency sweep measurement and
list sweep measurement.
Point frequency measurement: Observe the frequency offset, the amplitude value and the field
strength value of the current point by setting the point frequency.
Frequency sweep measurement: By setting the start frequency, the step frequency and the
number of sweep points to observe the changes of the amplitude value and the field strength value
within a frequency range.
List sweep measurement: Observe the amplitude value and the field strength value of the list
frequency point by calling a pre-edited or saved list.
All operations in this section are based on the premise of field strength
Notice
measurement, which will not be described separately later.

12.1.1 Point frequency measurement

The main operation steps of point frequency measurement are as follows:
a) Press 【 Measure 】 →[Point Frequency Measurement] to select the point frequency
measurement mode;
b) Press 【Freq】 →[Point Frequency] to set the point frequency value. The setting range of the
point frequency value is [1 MHz, 44.1 GHz];
c) Press 【BW】→[BW] to set the bandwidth value, which will be set to 150Hz, 300Hz, 600Hz,
1.5kHz, 2.4kHz, 6kHz, 9kHz, 15kHz, 30kHz, 50kHz, 120kHz, 150kHz;
d) Press 【Sweep/Antenna】→[Recall Antenna] to select the antenna factor file;
e) Press 【Demodulation】 to set the demodulation type and demodulation volume.
f) The schematic diagram of point frequency measurement is shown in the following figure (for
example only

178 / 248
 4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Field strength measurement mode(optional)

Figure 12-2 Schematic Diagram of Point Frequency Measurement Mode

12.1.2 Frequency sweep measurement

The main operation steps of frequency sweep measurement are as follows:
a) Press 【Measure】 →[Frequency Sweep] to select the frequency sweep mode;
b) Press 【Freq】 →[Start Frequency] to set the start frequency value of frequency sweep;
c) Press 【Freq】 →[Step Frequency] to set the step frequency value of frequency sweep;
d) Press 【Freq】 →[Sweep Points] to set the number of sweep points for frequency sweep;
e) Press 【BW】 →[Bandwidth] to set the bandwidth value, which will be set to be 150 Hz, 300
Hz, 600 Hz, 1.5 kHz, 2.4 kHz, 6 kHz, 9 kHz, 15 kHz, 30 kHz, 50 kHz, 120 kHz, and 150kHz;
f) Press [Sweep/Antenna] →[Recall Antenna] to select the antenna factor file;
g) Press [Sweep/Antenna] →[Residence time +∞ Manual] to set the residence time;
h) Press [Sweep/Antenna] →[Dwell time Off On] to set the residence time switch.
i) Press 【Marker 】 →[Marker Off On] to turn on or off the marker;
j) Press【Peak】to directly position the marker at the maximum point.
The residence time refers to the time staying at the frequency point after
Notice the measured value of the current frequency point exceeds the set limit
value after the limit switch is turned on.

The schematic diagram of frequency sweep measurement is shown in the following figure (for
example only)

179 / 248
4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Field strength measurement mode(optional)

Figure 12-3 Schematic Diagram of Frequency Sweep Measurement Mode

12.1.3 List sweep measurement

The main operation steps of list sweep measurement are as follows:

a) Press 【List Edit】 →[Edit List] to edit the current list;

b) Press 【List Edit】 →[Edit List]→[Frequency] to set the frequency value of each segment;
c) Press 【List Edit】 →[Edit List] →[Bandwidth] to set the bandwidth value, which will be set to
be 150 Hz, 300 Hz, 600 Hz, 1.5 kHz, 2.4 kHz, 6 kHz, 9 kHz, 15 kHz, 30 kHz, 50 kHz, 120 kHz,
and 150kHz;
d) Press 【Measure】→[List Sweep] to switch the current measurement mode to the list sweep
mode;
e) Press [Sweep/Antenna] →[Recall Antenna] to select the antenna factor file;
f) Press [Sweep/Antenna] →[Residence time +∞ Manual] to set the residence time;
g) Press [Sweep/Antenna] →[Dwell time Off On] to set the residence time switch.
h) Press 【Mkr】 →[Marker Off On] to turn on or off the marker;
i) Press【Peak】to directly position the marker at the maximum point.

Notice The list sweep mode can only be switched when the list exists!

The schematic diagram of list sweep measurement is shown in the following figure (for example
only)

180 / 248
 4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Field strength measurement mode(optional)

Figure 12-4 Schematic Diagram of List Sweep Measurement Mode

181 / 248
4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Field strength measurement mode(optional)
12.2 Menu structure of field strength measurement

频率 频率 幅度 单位 解调

点频频率 起始频率 参考值 关

dBm
500MHz 500MHz 107dBuV
频率步进 步进频率 衰减器
dBmV 调频
自动 手动 10MHz 自动 手动
频率跟踪 扫描点数 刻度/格
dBuV 调幅
关 开 58 20.0dB
极限 上边带
Volt
带宽 检波 关 开
声音报警 下边带
带宽 Watt
峰值 关 开
30kHz
单位 音频啸叫
> 关 开
检波 > 均值 dBuV
音量
实时 光标 95
测量
> 最大值
点频测量
光标
>
返回 关 开
频率扫描

列表扫描

Figure 12-5 Overall Menu Block Diagram of Field Strength Measurement

182 / 248
 4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Field strength measurement mode(optional)

编辑天线 扫描/天线 编辑列表 列表编辑

扫描类型
增加编辑点 表头 增加编辑点 编辑列表 > 表头
连续 单次

删除编辑点 重新扫描 表尾 删除编辑点 保存列表 表尾

驻留时间
清空所有点 上一页 清空所有点 调用列表 > 上一页
+∞ 手动
驻留时间
> 下一页 > 下一页
关 开

完成编辑 调用天线 > 立即调用 完成编辑 立即调用

取消编辑 编辑天线 > 删除 取消编辑 删除

保存天线 全部删除 全部删除

取消 取消

Figure 12-6 Overall Menu Block Diagram of Field Strength Measurement (Continued)

183 / 248
4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Field strength measurement mode(optional)
12.3 Description of field strength measurement menu
12.3.1 Frequency menu (point frequency measurement mode)

·[Point Frequency]: Press 【Freq】 → [Point Frequency], through

the number keys on the front panel, select [GHz], [MHz], [kHz] and [Hz]
频率 in the frequency unit menu, or use the 【↑】 【↓】 keys and the knob to
set the point frequency.

点频频率 ·[Special Notes]: The point frequency setting range is 1 MHz ~ 44

GHz.

500MHz ·[Freq Step]: Press 【Freq】 →[ Frequency Step Auto Man ], and
set the 【↑】 【↓】 keys and the knob to change the step value of the

频率步进 point frequency . In the automatic state, the frequency step is set to be
1 MHz.

自动 手动 ·[Frequency Tracking Off On]: Press 【Freq】→[ Frequency

Tracking Off On ] to set the frequency tracking switch. In the state

频率跟踪 of frequency tracking on, the instrument can automatically track the
frequency value of the peak point, and display the frequency of the

关 开 tracked peak point in the frequency display area of the current screen.
·[Special Notes]: The peak point tracked by the frequency is the peak
point of the search amplitude signal in the current bandwidth range.

12.3.2 Frequency menu (frequency sweep measurement mode)

·[Start Frequency 500 MHz]: Press 【Freq】 → [Start Frequency

频率 500MHz] , through the number keys on the front panel, select [GHz],
[MHz], [kHz] and [Hz] in the frequency unit menu, or use the 【↑】【↓】
keys and the knob to set the start frequency.
起始频率 ·[Special Notes]: The start frequency setting range is 1 MHz ~ 44
500MHz GHz.

·[Step Frequency 10 MHz]: Press 【Freq】 →[ Step Frequency

步进频率 10MHz] , and set the 【↑】 【↓】 keys and the knob to change the step
10MHz value of the sweep frequency .

·[Number of Sweep Points 58]: Press【Freq】→[Number of Sweep

扫描点数 Points 58], set the number of sweep points for frequency sweep, and
the setting range for the number of sweep points is 2~58.
58

184 / 248
 4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Field strength measurement mode(optional)
12.3.3 Amplitude menu

·[Reference Value 107 dBuV]: Press 【Amplitude】 → [ Reference

Value 107dBuV ], use the number keys on the front panel, and then
幅度 select [dBuV], [-dBuV], [mV] and [uV], or use the 【↑】
【↓】 keys and the
knob to set the reference value.

参考值 ·[Special Notes]: The reference value setting range is -43 dBuV ~ 147
dBuV.
107dBuV
·[Attenuator Auto Man]: Press 【Amplitude】 →[ Attenuator Auto
衰减器 Man ], in the automatic state of the attenuator, the attenuator will
automatically adjust the attenuation value according to the reference
自动 手动 value, and in the attenuator manual state, the attenuator will always use
the set attenuation value.
刻度/格
·[Scale/Graduation 20.0 dB]: Press 【Amplitude】 → [ Scale/
20.0dB Graduation 20.0dB ], use the number keys on the front panel, and
then select [dB] and [-dBm] in the frequency unit menu, or use the 【↑】
极限 【↓】 keys and the knob to set the reference value.
关 开 ·[Limit Value Off On]: Press 【Amplitude】 →[ Limit Value Off
On ]. By pressing this menu, you can choose to turn on or off the limit
声音报警 value switch .
关 开 ·[Audible Alarm Off On]: Press 【Amplitude】 →[Audible Alarm Off
On ]. By pressing this menu, you can choose to turn on or off the
单位 audible alarm switch .
>
dBuV ·[Unit dBuV]: Press 【Amplitude →[ Unit], open the unit function
menu, and you can select the menu types, including [dBm], [dBmV],
[dBuV], [Volt], and [Watt].

12.3.4 Bandwidth menu

·[Bandwidth 30 kHz]: Press 【Amplitude → [ Bandwidth 30kHz ], use

the number keys on the front panel, and then select [GHz], [MHz], [kHz]
带宽 and [Hz], or use the 【↑】 【↓】 keys and the knob to set the reference
带宽 value.
30kHz ·[Special Notes]: The bandwidth value can only be set as 150 Hz, 300
Hz, 600 Hz, 1.5 kHz, 2.4 kHz, 6 kHz, 9 kHz, 15 kHz, 30 kHz, 50 kHz,
检波 > 120 kHz, and 150kHz.
·[Detection]: Press 【BW】→[ Detection] to open the detection menu.
The available detection types include: Peak, average, and real-time.

185 / 248
4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Field strength measurement mode(optional)
12.3.5 Marker menu

光标 ·[Max]: Press 【Mkr】 →[ Maximum]. By pressing this menu, you can

display the marker at the maximum point position.
最大值 ·[Mkr Off On]: Press 【Mkr】→[Marker Off On ]. By pressing this
menu, you can choose to turn off or on the marker display.
光标 ·[Special Notes]: The marker menu is only effective in the frequency
关 开 sweep mode and the list sweep mode.

12.3.6 Peak menu

峰值 ·[Max]: Press 【Peak】 →[ Max]. By pressing this menu, you can

display the marker at the maximum point position.
最大值 ·[Mkr Off On]: Press 【Peak】→[ Marker Off On ]. By pressing this
menu, you can choose to turn off or on the marker display.
光标
·[Special Notes]: The peak menu is only effective in the frequency
关 开
sweep mode and the list sweep mode.

12.3.7 Sweep/antenna menu

·[Swp Type Cont Single]: Press 【Sweep /Antenna】→ [Sweep Type

Continuous Single ], and it is used to set the continuous sweep mode
or the single sweep mode .

·[Re-sweep]: Press 【Sweep /Antenna】→[Sweep Again], and it is

扫描/天线 used to sweep again.
扫描类型 ·[Residence time +∞ Manual]: Press 【Sweep /Antenna】
连续 单次 →[Residence time + ∞ Manual ], and it is used to set the residence
time. The residence time refers to the time staying at this point when
重新扫描 the amplitude of the sweep point exceeds the limit value. The default is
infinity, and the manual setting range is 1 ms ~ 40 s.
驻留时间
·[Special Notes]: The residence time is only effective when the limit
+∞ 手动
switch is turned on.
停留时间
·[Dwell Time Off On]: Press 【Sweep /Antenna】→[Dwell Time Off
关 开
On], and it is used to set the dwell time. The dwell time refers to the
waiting time of sweep at each time. The default is Off, and the manual
调用天线 >
setting range is 1 ms ~ 40 s.
·[Special Notes]: Dwell time and residence time are only effective in
编辑天线 > the frequency sweep mode and the list sweep mode.

·[Recall Antenna]: Press 【Sweep /Antenna】→[ Recall Antenna]

保存天线 to pop up the soft menus such as [Header], [Footer], [Page Up], [Page
Down], [Recall Immediately], [Delete], etc. You can select the saved
antenna factor file and call .

·[Edit Antenna]: Press 【Sweep /Antenna】→[Recall Antenna] to

pop up the soft menus such as [ Add Edit Point], [ Delete Edit Point],

186 / 248
 4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Field strength measurement mode(optional)
[ Clear All Points], [ Complete Editing], [ Cancel Editing], etc. It is used
to edit the antenna factors.

·[Save Antenna]: Press 【Sweep /Antenna】→[Save Antenna] to

open the antenna saving dialog box. It is used to save the antenna
factor file.

12.3.8 Demodulation menu

·[Off]: Press 【Demodulation】 →[Off] to turn off the demodulation

mode .

·[Frequency Modulation]: Press 【Demodulation】 →[ Frequency

解调 Modulation], and it is used to switch demodulation to the frequency
modulation mode.
关
·[Amplitude Modulation]: Press 【Demodulation】 →[Amplitude
Modulation], and it is used to switch demodulation to the amplitude
调频 modulation mode.

·[Upper Sideband]: Press 【Demodulation】 →[ Upper Sideband],

调幅 and it is used to switch demodulation to the upper sideband mode.

·[Lower Sideband]: Press 【Demodulation】 →[Lower Sideband],

上边带 and it is used to switch demodulation to the lower sideband mode.

·[Audio Howling Off On]: Press 【Demodulation】 → [Audio

下边带 Howling Off On], and it is used to enable or disable the audio
howling function.
音频啸叫
·[Special Notes]: After the audio howling switch is turned on, the
关 开 demodulation modes of [Frequency Modulation ], [Amplitude
音量 Modulation ], [Upper Sideband ], [Lower Sideband ], etc. will no longer
95 work.

·[Volume 95]: Press 【Demodulation】 → [Volume 95 ] to set the

demodulation volume. You can use the number keys or the 【↑】【↓】
keys or the knob to set the desired volume value.

12.3.9 List edit menu

·[Edit List]: Press 【List Edit】 →[ Edit List] to pop up the soft menus
列表编辑
of [Add Edit Point ], [Delete Edit Point ], [Clear All Points ], [Complete
Editing ], [Cancel Editing ], etc. It is used to edit the list items.
编辑列表 >
·[Save List]: Press 【List Edit】 →[ Save List ] to open the list file
save dialog box for list file saving.
保存列表
·[Recall List]: Press 【List Edit】 →[ Recall List] to pop up the soft
menus such as [Header], [Footer], [Page Up], [Page Down], [Recall
调用列表 > Immediately], [Delete], etc. You can select the saved list file and recall
it.

187 / 248
4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Field strength measurement mode(optional)
12.3.10 Measurement menu

·[Point Frequency Measurement]: Press 【Measure】 → [Point

Frequency Measurement], and switch the field strength
测量 measurement mode to the point frequency measurement mode.

·[Freq Sweep]: Press 【Measure】 → [Frequency Sweep], and

点频测量 switch the field strength measurement mode to the frequency sweep
measurement mode.

频率扫描 ·[List Sweep]: Press 【Measure】 → [List Sweep], and switch the
field strength measurement mode to the list sweep measurement
mode.
列表扫描
·[Special Notes]: Before switching the list sweep mode, make sure
that a list file exists currently. It can be viewed through the 【List Edit】
-[Edit List] menu.

188 / 248
 4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Location analyzer mode(optional)
13 Location analyzer mode (optional)

13.1 Introduction to typical measurements

The Location analyzer measurement mode is an extension of the spectrum measurement mode.
After startup, press 【Mode】 to pop up a mode selection dialog box, select [Spectrum Analysis
Mode], and press [OK] to enter the spectrum analysis mode after completing the progress bar.
Then press 【System】 → [Measurement Mode] → [Location analyzer] on the touch screen to
enter the Location analyzer mode.

Figure 13-1 Main Interface of Location analyzer Mode

It is mainly used for positioning interference sources or unknown signal sources, and the direction
of interference signals can be quickly positioned by using external receiving antenna and
electronic compass;

The Location analyzer measurement mode shall be configured with the

options of the receiving antenna and the electronic compass. Since the
Notice azimuth measurement of the electronic compass used in the Location
analyzer adopts the principle of geomagnetism, please try to keep a
distance from the magnetic object during the test.

The Location analyzer measurement is mainly divided into three measurement modes:

13.1.1 Direct lookup

The main steps for the direct lookup measurement are as follows:

a) Press 【Measure】 →[Direct Lookup] to select the direct lookup measurement mode;
b) Press [Freq]→[Center Freq] to set the center frequency value;
c) Press 【BW】→[BW] to set the bandwidth value, which will be set to 150Hz, 300Hz, 600Hz,
1.5kHz, 2.4kHz, 6kHz, 9kHz, 15kHz, 30kHz, 50kHz, 120kHz, 150kHz;
d) Press 【Sweep/Antenna】→[Recall Antenna] to select the antenna factor file;
e) Press 【Demodulation】 to set the demodulation type and demodulation volume.
f) The schematic diagram of direct lookup measurement is as shown in the figure below (for
example only)
189 / 248
4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Location analyzer mode(optional)

Figure 13-2 Schematic Diagram of Direct Lookup Measurement Mode

13.1.2 Horizontal sweep

Horizontal sweep is to display the measured value information after rotating one cycle of the
current measurement point on a horizontal disc. The main operation steps of horizontal sweep
measurement are as follows:
a) Press 【Measure】 →[Horizontal Sweep] to select the horizontal sweep measurement mode;
b) Press [Freq]→[Center Freq] to set the center frequency value;
c) Press 【BW】→[BW] to set the bandwidth value, which will be set to 150Hz, 300Hz, 600Hz,
1.5kHz, 2.4kHz, 6kHz, 9kHz, 15kHz, 30kHz, 50kHz, 120kHz, 150kHz;
d) Press 【Sweep/Antenna】→[Recall Antenna] to select the antenna factor file;
e) Press 【Demodulation】 to set the demodulation type and demodulation volume.
The schematic diagram of horizontal sweep measurement is as shown in the following figure (for
example only)

190 / 248
 4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Location analyzer mode(optional)

Figure 13-3 Schematic Diagram of Horizontal Sweep Measurement Mode

191 / 248
4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Location analyzer mode(optional)
13.2 Menu structure of Location analyzer
频率 编辑位置 带宽 检波 光标 解调 地图 峰值
中心频率 带宽 最大场强角度 定位
500MHz 删除编辑点 峰值 关 最大峰值
30kHz 自动 手动 实时 调用
频率步进
清空编辑点 检波 > 均值 调频 放大 次峰值
自动 手动

实时 角度范围 调幅 缩小 左邻峰值

定位选择
完成编辑 上边带 标记 > 右邻峰值
123456

定位保存 < 返回 下边带 定位数据 >

标记
音频啸叫 标记
定位编辑
关 开 当前位置
音量 标记
95 删除标记

测量 幅度 单位 单位 扫描/天线 标记
全部删除
扫描类型 编辑天线
直接查找 参考值
dBm dBW 表头
107.0dBuV 连续 单次
增加编辑点
衰减器
水平扫描 dBmV dBV 重新扫描 表尾
自动 手动 < 返回
删除编辑点
地图定位 dBuV dBA 调用天线 > 上一页
清空所有点 定位数据
单位
> Volt dBmA 编辑天线 > 下一页
幅度 dBuV 删除点
刻度/格 前置放大器
Watt dBuA 保存天线 立即调用
20.0 dB 关 开
完成编辑
刻度类型 翻页1/2 > A 删除
对数 线性 调用
取消编辑
极限 翻页1/2 > 翻页2/2 > 全部删除
关 开
声音报警 >
返回
>
返回 取消
关 开 取消
最大保持
关 开 全部取消

翻页2/2 >

返回

Figure 12-5 Overall Menu Block Diagram of Location analyzer

192 / 248
 4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Location analyzer mode(optional)
13.3 Description of Location analyzer menu
13.3.1 Frequency menu

·[Center Frequency]: Press【Freq】→ [Center Frequency], through

the number keys on the front panel, select [GHz], [MHz], [kHz] and [Hz]
in the frequency unit menu, or use the 【↑】 【↓】 keys and the knob to
set.
·[Special Notes]: When using the 【↑】 【↓】 keys and the knob, the size
频率
of the frequency step is the same as the set value of the [Step
中心频率 Frequency]. After pressing the [Step Frequency Auto Man] to switch to
500MHz [Step Frequency Auto Man], you can use the number keys or the 【↑】
【↓】 keys and the knob to set the step frequency value.
频率步进
·[Frequency Step Auto Man]: Press 【Freq】 → [Frequency Step],
自动 手动
through the number keys on the front panel, select [GHz], [MHz], [kHz]
定位选择 and [Hz] in the frequency unit menu, or use the 【↑】 【↓】 keys and the
123456 knob to set.
·[Positioning Selection 1 2 3 4 5 6]: Press 【Freq】 →[Positioning
定位保存
Selection], and the data saving function of 6 different location
information can be realized by switching the menu mark.
定位编辑 ·[Positioning Save]: Press 【Freq】 →[Positioning Save], and the
data saving function of current positioning information can be realized
by this menu.
·[Positioning Edit]: Press 【Freq】→[Positioning Edit] to open the
positioning data editing submenu, and you can [Edit Positioning Point],
[Delete Positioning Point] and [Complete Editing].

13.3.2 Amplitude menu

·[Reference Value 107.0 dBuV]: Press 【Amplitude】 → [Ref Level],

幅度 use the number keys on the front panel, and then select [dBuV],
[-dBuV], [mV] and [uV], or use the 【↑】【↓】 keys and the knob to set.
参考值
107.0dBuV ·[Special Notes]: When using the [↑][↓] keys and the knob, the step is
10 dB.
衰减器
自动 手动 ·[Attenuator Auto Man]: Press 【Amplitude】 → [Attenuator Auto
Man] to switch the automatic and manual switch of the attenuator
单位 through the menu. You can use the number keys, and you can also use
>
dBuV the 【↑】 【↓】 keys and the knob to change.
前置放大器 ·[Special Notes]: The setting range of the attenuation value is 0 dB -
关 开 50 dB, with the step value of 10 dB.
·[Unit dBuV]: Select the unit of the vertical axis, including [dBm],
[dBmV], [dBuV], [Volt], [Watt], [A], [dBW], [dBV], [dBA], [dBmA] and
[dBuA].
·[Preamplifier Off On]: Press 【Amplitude】 →[Preamplifier Off On],
you can choose whether to turn on the pre-amplifier through the menu

193 / 248
4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Location analyzer mode(optional)
13.3.3 Bandwidth menu

·[Bandwidth 30 kHz]: Press 【BW】→[Bandwidth 30 kHz], and set

through the number keys on the front panel or the 【↑】
【↓】 keys and
Bandwidth the knob.
·[Special Notes]: Since the resolution bandwidth is subject to the
bandwidth of the intermediate frequency filter, the shape of the trace
depends on the intermediate frequency filter. This instrument supports

Bandwidth variable resolution bandwidth settings, with the range of 150Hz,

300Hz, 600Hz, 1.5kHz, 2.4kHz , 6kHz, 9kHz, 15kHz, 30kHz, 50kHz,
120kHz and 150KHz.
30kHz ·[Detection]: Press 【BW】 →[Detection], you can select the three
detection modes of: [Peak], [Average], and [Real-time].

Detector >>

13.3.4 Marker menu

·[Maximum Field Strength Angle Auto Man]: Press 【Mkr】

光标 →[Max Field Strength Angle Auto Man] to select the currently

judged maximum field strength angle mode.

·[Angle Range]: Press 【Mkr】→[Angle Range] to select the display

最大场强角度 range of the current local directional diagram.
·[Special Notes]: The marker menu is only available in the horizontal
自动 手动 sweep mode; and the local directional diagram pops up when you
choose to manually judge the maximum field strength angle.

角度范围

194 / 248
 4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Location analyzer mode(optional)
13.3.5 Peak menu

·[Max Peak]: Press 【Peak】→[Max Peak] to set the currently active

峰值 marker to the maximum peak point of the field strength in the
measurement directional diagram.
最大峰值 ·[Sub Peak]: Press 【Peak】→[Sub Peak] to move the active marker
to the next highest point that is associated with the current marker
次峰值 position on the directional diagram.

·Left Peak]: Press 【Peak】→[Left Peak] to find the next peak to the
left of the current frequency marker position.
左邻峰值
·[Right Peak]: Press 【Peak】→[Right Peak] to find the next peak to
the right of the current frequency marker position.
右邻峰值
·[Special Notes]: The marker menu is only available in the horizontal
sweep mode.

13.3.6 Sweep/antenna menu

·\[Sweep Type Continuous Single]: Press 【Sweep/Antenna】

扫描/天线
→[Sweep Type Continuous Single]. The sweep method setting
扫描类型 determines how the instrument sweeps and when it stops to enter into
连续 单次 the hold state. In the interference analysis mode, it provides two sweep
modes: Continuous sweep and single sweep.
重新扫描 ·[Sweep Again]: Press 【Sweep】 →[Sweep Again] to restart the
sweep.
调用天线 > ·[Recall Antenna]: Press 【Sweep/Antenna】→[Recall Antenna] to
pop up the soft menus such as [Header], [Footer], [Page Up], [Page
编辑天线 > Down], [Recall Immediately], [Delete], etc. You can select the saved
antenna factor file and recall it .

保存天线 ·[Edit Antenna ]: Press 【Sweep/Antenna】→[Recall Antenna] to

pop up [Add Edit Point], [Delete Edit Point], [Clear All Points],
[Complete Editing], [Cancel Editing], etc. It is used to edit the antenna
factors.

·[Save Antenna]： Press 【Sweep/Antenna】 →[Save Antenna] to

open the antenna saving dialog box. It is used to save the antenna
factor file.

195 / 248
4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Location analyzer mode(optional)
13.3.7 Demodulation menu

·[Off]: Press 【Demodulation】→[Off] to turn off the demodulation

mode .

解调 ·[Frequency Modulation]: Press 【Demodulation】→[Frequency

Modulation], and it is used to switch demodulation to the frequency
modulation mode.
关
·[Amplitude Modulation]: Press 【Demodulation】→[Amplitude
Modulation], and it is used to switch demodulation to the amplitude
调频
modulation mode.

·[Upper Side band]: Press 【Demodulation】→[Upper Sideband,

调幅
and it is used to switch demodulation to the upper sideband mode.

·[Lower Sideband]: Press 【Demodulation】→[Lower Sideband],

上边带
and it is used to switch demodulation to the lower sideband mode.

·[Audio Howling Off On]: Press 【Demodulation】→[Audio Howling

下边带
Off On] to turn on or off the audio howling function.
音频啸叫 ·[Special Notes]: After the audio howling switch is turned on, the
关 开 demodulation methods of [Frequency Modulation], [Amplitude
Modulation], [Upper Sideband], [Lower Sideband], etc. will no longer
音量 work.
95
·[Volume 95]: Press 【Demodulation】→[Volume 95], and it is used
to set the demodulation volume. You can set the desired volume value
through the number keys or the 【↑】 【↓】 keys or the knob.

13.3.8 Measurement menu

·[Direct Lookup]: Press 【Measure】→[Direct Lookup] to select the

测量 current measurement mode as the direct lookup mode.

·[Horizontal Sweep]: Press 【Measure】→[Horizontal Sweep] to

select the current measurement method as the horizontal sweep
直接查找 mode.

·[Map Positioning]: Press 【Measure】→[Map Positioning] to select

the current measurement method as the map positioning mode.

水平扫描

地图定位

196 / 248
 4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Location analyzer mode(optional)
13.3.9 Map menu

·[Positioning Real-time Recall]: Press 【Map】→[Positioning

Real-time Recall]. The real-time positioning mode means that the
current measurement is refreshed in real time with the GPS and the
地图 compass, and the calling of the positioning mode is to display the
positioning data measured at different positioning points on the
定位 current map.
实时 调用
·[Zoom in]: Press 【Map】→[Zoom in] to display the currently
放大 called map in an enlarged scale.

·[Zoom out]: Press 【Map】→[Zoom out] to display the currently

缩小 called map in a reduced scale.

·[Marker]: Press 【Map】→[Marker] to open the marker submenu,

标记 > [Marker Current Position], [Marker Delete Marker], and [Marker
Delete All]. Measurement information at different locations and in
different directions can be displayed on the map via the marker
定位数据 submenu .

·[Positioning Data]: Press 【Map】→[Positioning Data] to open

the positioning data sheet on the selected positioning point, and you
can select [Delete], [Recall], and [Cancel].
·[Special Notes]: The [Positioning Data] menu can only be used
after calling the positioning mode.

197 / 248
4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Signal analysis mode
14 Signal analysis mode (optional)

14.1 Introduction to typical measurements

The signal analysis measurement mode is an extension of the spectrum measurement mode.
After startup, press 【Mode】 to pop up a mode selection dialog box, select [Spectrum Analysis
Mode], and press [OK] to enter the spectrum analysis mode after completing the progress bar.
Then press 【System】 → [Measurement Mode] → [Signal Analysis] on the touch screen to enter
the signal analysis mode.
The signal analysis measurement mode provides a rapid analysis for interference signals. With
the help of waterfall charts, the display and playback of historical data can be realized. Through
the shortcut menu, the parameters such as the center frequency, the sweep width, etc. can be
quickly modified, and audio output and IQ capture function can also be quickly realized.

All operations in this section are based on the premise of the selected
Notice
signal analysis mode, which will not be described separately later.
The main interface of the signal analysis measurement mode refers to the interference analysis
waterfall chart measurement. It can be used to easily observe the periodic or hopping interference
signals. A shortcut menu is specially designed for the signal analysis, so that the setting of the
parameters such as the center frequency, the seep width can be quickly realized. At the same time,
audio output and IQ capture can be turned on quickly, improving the ability of quickly analyzing
interference signals. The main interface of signal analysis is as shown in Figure 14-1 below:

Figure 14-1 Main Display Interface of Signal Analysis Measurement Mode

Signal analysis is designed with a signal list switch menu, which can be used to easily check the
parameters such as the frequency, the amplitude, the capture time, etc. of the captured
interference signal. The display results are shown in Figure 14-2 below.

198 / 248
 4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Signal analysis mode

Figure 14-2 Signal List Interface

The IQ capture function can be used to directly store the IQ data of interference signals. The IQ
capture interface is shown in Figure 14-3 below:

Figure 14-3 Schematic Diagram of IQ Capture Function

In the signal analysis mode, the current test task can be quickly stored, and the test task can be
saved with an automatically generated file name according to the currently set intermediate
frequency and sweep width and the current test time.
The signal analysis storage task is shown in Figure 14-4 below:

199 / 248
4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Signal analysis mode

Figure 10-4 Schematic Diagram of Signal Analysis Storage Tasks

200 / 248
 4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Signal analysis mode
14.2 Signal analysis menu structure
频率 扫宽 幅度 带宽 检波

参考电平 分辨率带宽
中心频率 扫宽 自动
0.0dBm 自动 手动
视频带宽
扫宽 > 全扫宽 参考位置 标准
自动 手动
衰减器 视频类型
起始频率 零扫宽 正峰值
自动 手动 线性 对数
刻度/格 平均
终止频率 上次扫宽 负峰值
20.0dB 关 开
步进频率 SPAN/RBW
< 返回 取样
自动 手动 100
信号标准 前置放大器 RBW/VBW
> 均值
-- 关 开 1
信道号 检波
> 均方根
-- 自动

< 返回

信号标准 光标 光标-> 峰值 扫描 扫描

光标 光标-> 扫描时间 扫描时间

表头 最大峰值
123456 中心频率 自动 手动 自动 手动
光标-> 扫描类型 扫描类型
表尾 普通模式 次峰值
步进频率 连续 单次 连续 单次
光标->
上一页 差值模式 左邻峰值 重新扫描 重新扫描
起始频率
噪声光标 光标-> 扫描点数 扫描点数
下一页 右邻峰值
关 开 终止频率 1001 1001

立即调用 光标 > < 返回 最大值

> 光标关闭 最小值

光标->
取消 全部关闭
中心频率

Figure 14-5 Overall Menu Block Diagram of Signal Analysis

201 / 248
4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Signal analysis mode

触发 IQ捕获 配置 音频解调 解调类型

IQ捕获 音频解调
自由触发 音频解调 > 调频
关 开 关 开
外部触发 > 解调类型
开始捕获 IQ捕获 > 调幅
1.50V 调频
触发极性 捕获时间 门限 解调时间
上边带
正 负 1.000ms 关 开 100.000ms
触发延迟 捕获模式 门限 解调模式
下边带
1.000us 单次 连续 15.0 间歇 连续
采样率 信号列表 音量
快捷方式 5.000MHz 详细 简洁 95
> 触发
中心频率 [自由触发] 自动存储
存储名称 扫描间隔
扫宽 IQCapture Auto

音频解调 扫宽时间
关 开 Auto

IQ捕获 自动存储
关 开 关 开
时间光标
开始捕获 0 ns

最大峰值 >

光标 ->
重启测量
中心频率
信号列表
关 开

Figure 14-6 Overall Menu Block Diagram of Signal Analysis (Continued)

202 / 248
 4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Signal analysis mode
14.3 Description of signal analysis menu
14.3.1 Frequency menu

·[Center Frequency]: Press 【Freq】→[Center Freq], use the numeric

keys on the front panel, select [GHz], [MHz], [kHz] and [Hz] in the
frequency unit menu, or use the 【↑】 【↓】 keys and the knob for setting.

·[Special Notes]: When using the 【↑】 【↓】 keys and the knob, the
size of the frequency step is the same as the set value of the [Step
Frequency]. After pressing the [Step Frequency Auto Man] to
switch to [Step Frequency Auto Man], you can use the number
keys or the 【↑】 【↓】 keys and the knob to set the step frequency
频率
value.

·[Sweep Width]： Press 【Freq】→[Span] to activate the span

中心频率
submenu. You can use the numeric keys, and then select the
frequency unit to change. You can also use the 【↑】 【↓】 keys and the
扫宽 > knob to change the span. For the detailed information, please refer to
the description of the [Span] menu.

【↓】 keys and the knob to change the

·[Special Notes]: Use the 【↑】
起始频率
span with a step of 1-2-5.

·[Start Freq]: Press 【Freq】→[Start Freq], use the numeric keys on

终止频率 the front panel, select the frequency unit, or use the 【↑】
【↓】 keys and
the knob for setting.
步进频率
·[Stop Freq]: Press【Freq】→[Stop Freq], use the numeric keys on the
自动 手动
front panel, select the frequency unit, or use the 【↑】
【↓】 keys and the
信号标准 > knob for setting.
-- ·[Signal Standard]: Press 【Freq】→[Signal Standard], use the 【↑】
信道号 【↓】 keys and the knob to select the signal standard, and use the
-- dialog box menu [Immediate Recall] or [OK] key for recalling. Refer
to the dialog box menu for details of the dialog box menu.
·[Special Notes]: After the signal standard is loaded, the center
frequency and the span are set to the center frequency and the
span value defined in the signal standard.

·[Channel No.]: Press 【Freq】→[Channel No.] to pop up the channel

number setting dialog box, and use the numeric keys or the 【↑】
【↓】
keys and the knob to set the channel number.
·[Special Notes]: The setting of the channel number shall be carried
out under the premise of loading the signal standard, otherwise a
prompt that it cannot be set will pop up.

203 / 248
4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Signal analysis mode
14.3.2 Sweep width menu

·[Span]: Press 【Freq】→[Span] to activate the span submenu. You

扫宽 can use the numeric keys, and then select the frequency unit to
change. You can also use the 【↑】 【↓】 keys and the knob to change
扫宽 the span. For the detailed information, please refer to the description of
the [Span] menu.

【↓】 keys and the knob to change the

·[Special Notes]: Use the 【↑】
全扫宽 span with a step of 1-2-5.
·[Full Span]: Press [Span]→[Full Span] to set the current span to
零扫宽 44.1GHz.

·[Zero Sweep Width]: Press 【Freq】→[Span]→[Zero Span] to set the

current span to 0Hz.
上次扫宽
·[Last Span]: Press 【Freq】→[Span]→[Last Span] to restore the span
to the value set last time.
< 返回
·[Back]: Press 【Freq】→[Span]→[Back] to return to the 【Freq】
menu.

14.3.3 Amplitude menu

·[Ref Level]: Press 【Amplitude】→[Ref Level], use the numeric keys on

the front panel, and then select [dBuV], [-dBuV], [mV] and [uV], or use
the 【↑】 【↓】 keys and the knob to set it.
幅度
【↓】keys and the knob are used, the
·[Special Notes]: When the【↑】
参考电平 step is 10dB.
0.0dBm
·[Ref Pos]: Press 【Amplitude】→[Ref Pos], and use the numeric keys
or the 【↑】【↓】 keys and the knob to change it.
参考位置
·[Atten Auto Man]: Press 【Amplitude】→[Atten Auto Man] to switch the
衰减器 automatic and manual switch of the attenuator through the menu. You
自动 手动 can use the numeric keys or the 【↑】【↓】 keys and the knob to change
it.
刻度/格
·[Special Notes]: The setting range of the attenuation value is 0 dB -
20.0dB
50 dB, with the step value of 10 dB.
幅度单位 ·[Scale]: Press 【Amplitude】→[Scale], and use the numeric keys or the
dBm 【↑】 【↓】 keys and the knob to set the scale within the setting range of
前置放大器 0.1dB - 20dB.
关 开 ·[Amp Unit]: The amplitude unit is uniformly displayed in dBm.

·[Pre Amp Off On]: Press 【Amplitude】→[Pre Amp Off On] to turn the
preamplifier on or off.

204 / 248
 4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Signal analysis mode
14.3.4 Bandwidth menu

·[RBW Auto Man]: Press 【BW】→[RBW Auto Man], and use the
numeric keys on the front panel or the 【↑】
【↓】 keys and the knob to
set it.
·[Special Notes]: Since the resolution bandwidth is subject to the
bandwidth of the IF filter, the shape of trace depends on the IF
filter. This instrument supports variable resolution bandwidth
settings, ranging from 1 Hz. ~10MHz, which can be changed with
a step of 1-3-10.
带宽
·[VBW Auto Man]: Press 【Amplitude】→[VBW Auto Man], and use
分辨率带宽 the numeric keys or the 【↑】
【↓】 keys and the knob to change it.
自动 手动
·[Special Notes]: The video bandwidth filter is used to smooth the
视频带宽 traces, aiming to improve the ability of detecting weak signals in
自动 手动 noise signals. This instrument supports variable resolution
视频类型 bandwidth settings, ranging from 1Hz~10MHz, which can be
线性 对数 changed with a step of 1-3-10.

平均 ·[Video Type Linear Logarithm]: Press 【BWh】→[Video Type

关 开 Linear Logarithm] to set the video bandwidth filter data processing.

SPAN/RBW ·[Ave Off On]: Press 【BW】→[Ave Off On], the average function can
100 smooth the display trace without changing the video bandwidth filter,
and use the numeric keys or the 【↑】【↓】 keys and the knob to change
RBW/VBW it.
1
·[SPAN/RBW]: Press 【BW】→[SPAN/RBW] to set the ratio of span to
检波
> resolution bandwidth. In automatic mode, the resolution bandwidth will
自动 automatically change with the change of span. You can use numeric
keys or the 【↑】 【↓】 keys and the knob to change it.

·[RBW/VBW]: Press 【BW】→[RBW/VBW]. In automatic mode, the

video bandwidth will change with the change of resolution bandwidth.
You can use numeric keys or the 【↑】 【↓】 keys and the knob to change
it.

·[Detection]: Press 【BW】→[Detection] to open the detection function

submenu. Please refer to the [Detection] menu for details.

205 / 248
4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Signal analysis mode

检波 ·[Auto]: Press 【BW】→[Detection]→[Auto], the detection is the same

as that in the spectrum analysis mode.
自动 ·[Standard]: Press 【BW】→[Detection]→[Standard], the most
commonly used detection method can see the signal and noise base at
the same time without losing any signal.
标准
·[PosPeak]: Press 【BW】→[Detection]→[PosPeak] to ensure that no
peak signal is missed and to measure the signals that are very close to
正峰值
the noise base.
·[NegPeak]: Press 【BW】→[Detection]→[NegPeak], it is used in the
负峰值
self-inspection of the bandwidth millimeter wave RF analyzer in most
cases, but it is rarely used in the test, and it can reproduce the
取样 modulation envelope of the AM signal very well.
·[Sampling]: Press 【BW】→[Detection]→[Sampling], it is beneficial to
均值 measuring the noise signal, and can measure the noise better than the
standard detection.
均方根 ·[Ave]: Press 【BW】→[Detection]→[Ave] to average the data in the
sampling interval.

< 返回 ·[Rms]: Press 【BW】→[Detection]→[Rms] to calculate the root mean

square of the data in the sampling interval.

14.3.5 Marker menu

【Mkr】→[Mkr 1 2 3 4 5 6]: Press 【Mkr】→[Mkr 1 2 3 4 5 6] to switch

·
between different marker displays, and the selected marker will be
marked with an underline.
光标
·[Normal Mode]: Press 【Mkr】→[Normal Mode] to set the currently
光标 selected marker display mode to normal mode.
123456 ·[Difference Mode]: Press 【Mkr】→[Difference Mode], and set the
currently selected marker display mode to be the difference mode. The
difference mode displays the frequency difference and the amplitude
普通模式
difference (it is time difference at zero sweep width) between the
difference marker and the reference marker, and the displayed
amplitude value is dB.
差值模式
·[Noise Mkr Off On]: Press 【Mkr】 → [Noise Marker Off On], the
噪声光标 noise marker shows the noise power near the activation marker that is
normalized to the 1 Hz bandwidth. At this time, the detector is in the
关 开 sample detection mode. If the noise marker is turned on, the unit of the
marker reading is automatically switched to dB/Hz.
光标- > > ·[Mkr→]: Press 【Mkr】→[Mkr→] to open the marker function submenu,
which allows users to use the marker as a reference to change the
instrument display. Please refer to the [Mkr→] function menu for details.
光标关闭
·[Mkr Off]: Press 【Mkr】→[Mkr Off] to turn off the currently activated
marker.
全部关闭 ·[All Off]: Press 【Mkr】→[All Off] to turn off all markers that have been
turned on.
·[Special Notes]: There is no marker function in RSSI
measurement mode.

206 / 248
 4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Signal analysis mode
·[Mkr→Center Freq]: Press【Mkr】→[Mkr→]→[Mkr→Center Freq], the
光标-> marker will move to the center frequency, and the reading at the center
frequency is displayed on the screen.
光标->
中心频率 ·[Mkr→Step Freq]: Press 【Mkr】→[Mkr→]→[Mkr→Step Freq] to set
the stepping amount of the center frequency, that is, the value of the
光标-> frequency step is equal to the marker frequency. If the difference
步进频率 marker function is activated, the frequency step value is equal to the
光标-> frequency of the difference marker.
起始频率 ·[Mkr→Start Freq]: Press 【Mkr】→[Mkr→]→[Mkr→Start Freq] to set
the start frequency equal to the marker frequency.
光标->
终止频率 ·[Mkr→Stop Freq]: Press 【Mkr】→[Mkr→]→[Mkr→Stop Freq] to set
the stop frequency equal to the marker frequency.
< 返回 ·[Back]: Return to the previous menu
(not available in RSSI measurement mode)

14.3.6 Peak menu

·[Max Peak]: Press 【Peak】→[Max Peak] to set the current active

marker to the maximum peak point of the measurement trace and
display the frequency and amplitude of the marker in the upper center
峰值 of the screen.
·[Sub Peak]: Press [Peak]→[Sub Peak] to move the active marker to
最大峰值 the next highest point on the trace that is associated with the current
marker position.

次峰值 ·Left Peak]: Press 【Peak】→[Left Peak] to find the next peak to the
left of the current frequency marker position.

左邻峰值 ·[Right Peak]: Press 【Peak】→[Right Peak] to find the next peak to
the right of the current frequency marker position.
·[Max]: Place a marker at the highest point of the trace and display
右邻峰值
the frequency and amplitude of the marker in the upper right corner of
the screen. Pressing this button will not change the activated
最大值 functions.
·[Min]: Press [Peak]→[Min] to place a marker at the lowest point of
最小值 the trace and display the frequency and amplitude of the marker in the
upper right corner of the screen. Pressing this button will not change
光标-> the activated functions.
中心频率 ·[Mkr→Center Freq]: Press [Peak]→[Mkr → Center Freq] and set
the center frequency equal to the marker frequency. This function
quickly moves the signal to the center of the screen.
(not available in RSSI measurement mode)

207 / 248
4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Signal analysis mode
14.3.7 Sweep menu

·[Swp Time Auto Man]: Press 【Swp】→[Swp Time Auto Man] to

switch the sweep time between Auto and Manual. The underline marks
the current state. If the sweep time is automatic, the RF analyzer
automatically sets the sweep time to the fastest according to the
扫描 current instrument status, and the screen displays the fastest sweep
time under the current setting. If the sweep time is manually set, the
sweep time value can be input at this time. Use the numeric keys to
扫描时间 enter the sweep time value and select the time unit by pressing

自动 手动 corresponding soft key to complete the setting. If the sweep time is

automatic, the sweep speed may change depending on the change
of RBW and VBW. The larger the values of RBW and VBW, the faster
扫描类型 the sweeping speed and vice versa. If the sweep time of the instrument
of 4957 meet the minimum sweep time limit, the maximum non-zero
连续 单次 sweep width can be set to 800 s, and the maximum zero sweep width
can be set to be 600 s.

重新扫描 ·[Swp Type Cont Single]: Press 【Swp】→[Swp Type Cont Single].
The sweep type setting determines how the RF analyzer sweeps and
when it stops to enter into the hold state. In the interference analysis

扫描点数 mode, it provides two sweep modes: Continuous sweep and single
sweep.
1001 ·[Re-sweep]: Press 【Sweep】 →[Sweep Again] to restart the sweep.

·[Number of Sweep Points]: Press 【Sweep】→[Number of Sweep

Points], you can select the number of sweep points as [201], [501],
[1001], [2001] and [4001].

14.3.8 Automatic storage menu

·[Swp Interval]: Press [Auto Save]→[Swp Interval Auto] to set the

sweep interval. After setting the sweep time, the trace will be switched
自动存储
to the maximum hold state by default to ensure that all signals
扫描间隔 measured during the sweep interval can be recorded.
Auto ·[Span Time]: Press [Auto Save]→[Span Time Auto], and the span
扫宽时间 time is the entire sweep time. After the sweep reaches the span time, it
Auto will stop recording.

自动存储 ·[Auto Save Off On]: Press [Auto Save]→[Auto Save Off On], and
press the menu to switch the automatic save switch.
关 开
·[Special Notes]: The automatic save function cannot be turned
时间光标
on until the span time is set.
0 ns
·[Time Mkr]: Press [Auto Save]→[Time Mkr] to view the historical
> data.
·[Special Notes]: It can only be used in the waterfall chart
measurement mode.
重启测量
·[Re-measure]: Press [Auto Save]→[Re-measure] to restart the
sweep.
208 / 248
 4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Signal analysis mode
14.3.9 Configuration menu

·[Audio Demodulation]: Press 【Configuration】→[Audio

Demodulation] to turn on the audio demodulation function. For the
detailed introduction, you can refer to the description of the menu
配置
[Audio Demodulation].
·[IQ Capture]: Press 【Configuration】→[IQ Capture] to turn on the
音频解调 > IQ capture function. For the detailed introduction, you can refer to
the description of the menu [IQ Capture].

IQ捕获 > ·[Threshold Off On]： Press 【Configuration】→[Threshold Off On],

and you can choose whether to turn on the threshold function.
门限 ·[Threshold 15.0]: Press 【Configuration】→[Threshold 15.0], and
关 开 you can set the threshold value through the number keys, the knob or
the up and down keys.
门限
·[Signal List Detailed Concise]: Press 【Configuration】→[Signal
15.0 List Detailed Concise] to select the signal list display mode by
信号列表 switching the menu. In the concise display mode, only the frequency,
bandwidth and amplitude information of the captured interference
详细 简洁 signal are displayed, and in the detailed display mode, the information
such as the capture time, the number of capture times, etc. of the
signal can also be displayed.

14.3.10 Audio demodulation menu

·[Audio Demodulation Off On]: Press 【Configuration】→[Audio

Demodulation]→[Audio Demodulation Off On] to turn on or off the
音频解调
audio demodulation function.
音频解调 ·[Demodulation type]: Press 【Configuration】→[Audio
关 开 Demodulation]→[Demodulation Type] to set the demodulation type.
You can select the demodulation type of [FM], [AM], [Upper
解调类型
> Sideband] or [Lower Sideband].
调频
·[Demodulation Time]: Press 【Configuration】→[Audio
解调时间 Demodulation]→[Demodulation Time] to set the demodulation time.
100.00ms
·[Demodulation Mode]: Press 【Configuration】→[Audio
解调模式 Demodulation]→[Demodulation Mode] to set the demodulation
间歇 连续 mode. Set the demodulation mode. In intermittent mode, the data is
swept for one screen and then demodulated for a period of time
音量
according to the demodulation time, and then the data is swept for
95
one screen and then demodulated for a period of time according to
the demodulation time, and that cycle repeats. In continuous mode,
>
the data is continuously demodulated after being swept for one
screen, and then the data is no longer swept.
< 返回 ·[Volume]: Press 【Configuration】→[Audio
Demodulation]→[Volume] to set the speaker volume in the
demodulation mode.

209 / 248
4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Signal analysis mode
14.3.11 IQ capture menu

·[IQ Capture Off On]: Press【Configuration】→[IQ Capture]→[IQ

Capture Off On] to turn on or off the IQ capture function.
IQ捕获
·[Start Capture]: Press 【Configuration】→[IQ Capture]→[Start
IQ捕获 Capture] to start the IQ data capture and record functions.
关 开
·[Capture Time]: Press 【Configuration】→[IQ Capture]→[Capture
开始捕获 Time] to set the IQ capture time. Note that the IQ capture time cannot
exceed the sweep time.
捕获时间 ·[Capture Type]: Press 【Configuration】→[IQ Capture]→[Capture
1.000ms Type] to set the IQ capture type as single or continuous.
捕获模式 ·[Sampling Rate]: Press 【Configuration】→[IQ
单次 连续 Capture]→[Sampling Rate], and press the sampling rate menu to
采样率 pop up the sampling rate dialog box. The sampling rate that can be
5.000MHz set for IQ capture will be 12.5 MHz, 5 MHz, 1.25 MHz, 500 kHz, 125
kHz and 50 kHz.
触发
[自由触发] ·[Trig]: Press 【Configuration】→[IQ Capture]→[Trigger], you can
choose [Free Trigger] and [External Trigger]. If you set an external
存储名称 trigger, you can set [Trigger Polarity] and [Trigger Delay].
IQCapture
·[Save Name]: Press 【Configuration】→[IQ Capture]→[Storage
Name] to set the storage name of the IQ capture file.

210 / 248
 4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Signal analysis mode
14.3.12 Shortcut menu

·[Center frequency]: Press 【Shortcut】 → [Center Frequency],

press 【Freq】 → [Center Frequency], and through the number keys
on the front panel, select [GHz], [MHz], [kHz] and [Hz] in the
快捷方式 frequency unit menu, or use the 【↑】 【↓】 keys and the knob to set.

·[Span]: Press 【Shortcut】 → [Sweep Width], and press 【Freq】 →

中心频率
[Sweep Width] to activate the sweep width submenu. You can use the
number keys, and then select the frequency unit to change. You can
扫宽 also use the 【↑】 【↓】 keys and the knob to change.

·[Audio Demodulation Off On]: Press 【Shortcut】→[Audio

音频解调 Demodulation Off On] to turn on or off the audio demodulation
关 开 function.

IQ捕获 ·[IQ Capture Off On]: Press 【Shortcut】→[IQ Capture Off On] to
关 开 turn on or off the IQ capture function.

·[Start Capture]: Press 【Shortcut】→[Start Capture] to start the IQ

开始捕获 capture.

·[Max Peak]: Press 【Shortcut】→[Max Peak], you can set the

最大峰值 current active marker to the maximum peak point of the measurement
trace and display the frequency and amplitude of the marker in the
光标 -> upper center of the screen.
中心频率 ·[Mkr -> Center Freq]: Press 【Shortcut】→[Marker->Center
信号列表 Frequency], and set the center frequency to be equal to the marker
frequency. This function can quickly move the signal to the center of
关 开
the screen.

·[Signal List Off On]: Press 【Shortcut】→[Signal List Off On] to

open or close the signal list.

211 / 248
4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Signal analysis mode
15 Technical description
15.1 Working principles
The 4957B instrument is equipped with numerous functions such as vector network analysis,
spectrum analysis, cable and antenna test, vector voltmeter, power measurement, etc., and it is a
multifunctional multi-parameter test instrument. In terms of the overall hardware implementation
plan, this tester focuses on the design concept of modularization and platform generalization, fully
utilizes the existing technical foundation and determines the block diagram of implementation plan
of the final project as shown in Figure 15-1.
The system hardware can be divided into several large block pieces of a radio frequency channel
board, a frequency synthesis board, in intermediate frequency channel board, a signal source
board, signal separation and frequency conversion components, a CPU board, a display screen, a
keyboard, a battery, etc.
Among them, the radio frequency channel board includes two parts of a program-controlled step
attenuator and a switch filtering and frequency conversion. The complete machine will
automatically associate the attenuation value of the program-controlled step attenuator according
to the reference level settings, or the user can manually set the attenuation value to provide
suitable frequency mixer level. The switch filtering and frequency conversion part will complete the
sub-band filtering and frequency conversion processing of the spectrum radio frequency input
signal, and it will output the intermediate frequency signal to the intermediate frequency channel
board.
The intermediate frequency channel board will filter the intermediate frequency signal input by the
radio frequency channel board, implement gain control for different bands to adjust the amplitude
value of the AD sampled signal, and finally output the differential digital signal after AD conversion
to the FPGA of the CPU board, so as to complete the functions of digital down conversion,
intermediate frequency filtering, video filtering, etc.
The frequency synthesis board will provide the local oscillator signal for the frequency mixer of the
radio frequency channel board. It is related to the indicators such as the hardware sweep speed,
phase noise, sideband stray, etc. for the spectrum part of the complete machine. At the same time,
it will also provide the local oscillator signal for the vector network part of the complete machine,
and output it to the signal separation and frequency conversion components.
The signal source board will provide a 30 kHz ~ 6.5 GHz excitation signal for the vector network of
the complete machine, and also provide the intermediate frequency processing function of the
vector network part. It will carry out filtering and AD conversion for the intermediate frequency
signal subjected to frequency conversion in the signal separation and frequency conversion
components, and output the digital signal to the FPGA of the CPU board.
The signal separation and frequency conversion components are responsible for dividing the
power adjustment and switching power of the 30 k ~ 6.5 GHz excitation signal into two paths. One
path will reach the test port 1 via the port 1 directional coupler, and the other path will reach the
port 2 via the port 2 coupler; dividing the local oscillator signal into 4 channels and sending them to
the local oscillator end of the 4-way frequency mixer respectively; and carrying out frequency
mixing for the excitation signal with the local oscillator signal, down converting to the intermediate
frequency that can be processed by the complete machine, and sending to the signal source
board.
The CPU board includes a power conversion and management circuit, an interface and display
circuit, an FPGA/CPLD control and digital signal processing circuit, and an ARM core module,
realizing the functions of DC/DC conversion, power work management, digital signal processing,
logic circuit control, etc. for the power supply part of the complete machine, and finally outputting
the test results to the LCD display.

212 / 248
 4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Technical description

Port 1/RF output

30kHz~6.5GHz CPU
30kHz~6.5GHz
excitation signal
CPU core
generation USB
module

CPU LAN
A/D RAM
ROM SD
card

FPGA
Signal source
30kHz~6.5GHz system
board
Bridge
Port 2 Power
AC/DC
manage
Frequency
RF channel board IF processing ment
synthesis
SA, VNALO board
generation board

A/D

RF input keybo Keyboard

9kHz~6.5GHz ard interface

Keyboard LCD backlight

power supply

Figure 15-1 Functional Block Diagram of 4957B RF Analyzer

213 / 248
4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Technical description

15.2 Description of fault information

The section introduces how to find problems and ask for after-sales services. It also includes an
explanation of the error messages inside the instrument.
If you purchase a 4957B instrument and encounter some problems during operation, or you want to buy
relevant parts, options or accessories of 4957B, we will provide you with complete after-sales services.
Generally, causes of problems are due to hardware, software or user maloperation. In case of any
problem, please contact us in time. If the 4957B you purchased is within the warranty period, we will
repair it for free as per the provisions specified in the warranty bill. Even if it is beyond the warranty
period, we will only charge the cost price.

This section introduces the way on how to judge and handle failures
(if any) of the 4957B, and feed them back to the manufacturer as
Description accurately as possible if necessary for quick solution.

In case of any problem with 4957B you are using, you can check it by yourself according to the following
tips. If the problem cannot be solved, please contact us.

If 4957B cannot be started after pressing the start button, please check whether the power supply is
normal and whether the adapter indicator is on or whether the battery level is normal. If there is nothing
abnormal, instrument may be faulty, please contact us for repair.

If the 4957B cannot enter the system or application program after startup, please press the 【Reset】key
to make 4957B return to a known state. If it still cannot work normally, it may be faulty, please contact us
for repair.

If the performance indicators of 4957B are abnormal, please check the test tools and test environment
for compliance with the requirements, the test port connectors for any damages and the calibration piece
for normal performance indicators; If everything above is normal, the instrument may be faulty, please
contact us for repair.

If the 4957B cannot realize communication via LAN, check the IP settings of the analyzer first, and check
whether the yellow LED beside the LAN port on the top panel flashes. If no, check the LAN cable
connection. If there are no problems for the above aspects, the instrument may be faulty, please contact
us for repair.

214 / 248
 4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Technical description
15.3 Repair
In case of any failure to 4957B that is difficult to be eliminated, contact us by phone or fax. If it is
confirmed that the instrument needs to be repaired, please package the instrument according to the
following steps:

1) Write a paper document describing the instrument failure and put it in the package together with the

analyzer;

2) Pack it with the original packing materials, so as to minimize possible damage;

3) Place cushions at the four corners of the outer packing carton, and place the instrument in the outer

packing carton;

4) Seal the opening of the packing carton with adhesive tape and reinforce the packing carton with

nylon tape;

5) Indicate ―Fragile‖ on the box body! Do not touch! Handle with care! and so on.

6) ease check it as precision instrument, and keep a copy of all shipping documents.

215 / 248
4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Technical indicators and testing methods
16 Technical indicators and testing methods
This section illustrates the recommended test methods for the main technical indicators of the 4957B
instrument, and these indicators can fully reflect the performance and condition of the instrument. The
instrument to be tested should be stored at the operating temperature for at least 2 hours, and then
started and warmed up for 30 minutes before testing the following indicators without error.

The specific operation steps for testing the following indicators are
provided according to the testing instrument shown in the figure. When
other testing instruments with the same performance characteristics are
used for testing, please refer to the User‘s Manual of such instruments
Notice
for the specific operation. The reset instrument mentioned in the test
step refers to the factory reset mode. If the device is in the user-defined
reset state, it shall be changed to the factory reset state and reset again,
ensuring that the initial state of the device is in a known state.

16.1 Vector network analysis performance indicator test

Before the indicator test of this section, first press the 【Mode】 key on the instrument to select the
working mode as the vector network analysis mode, and carry out the detailed test according to the
method recommended in this section.

16.1.1 Frequency range and accuracy

Description: Frequency range in this test refers to the range of the minimum frequency and the
maximum frequency of the signal which can be set for the 4957B instrument (hereinafter referred to as
the instrument) working at the port in the network analysis mode. Frequency accuracy refers to the
difference between the measured frequency and the set frequency of the signal output at the port. Use a
spectrum analyzer that is an order of magnitude higher than the frequency accuracy of the instrument to
test the port 1 output frequency accuracy of the instrument.

16.1.1.1 Testing Equipment

Spectrum analyzer…………………………………………………………………………………….4036
Test cable and adapter

16.1.1.2 Test steps

a) Set the working mode to be the vector network analysis mode, and press 【Measure】[S11] to set
the test port as Port 1.
b) Press 【Freq】 [Start] to set the start frequency of the instrument as the minimum frequency of the
corresponding model, and press [Stop] to set the stop frequency of the instrument as the maximum
frequency of the corresponding model; and if they can be set to the minimum and the maximum
frequencies, it indicates that the frequency range meets the requirements.

216 / 248
 4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Technical indicators and testing methods

RF Analyzer

Spectrum analyzer

Figure 16-1 Block Diagram of Frequency Range and Frequency Accuracy Test

c) Connect the instrument as shown in Figure 16-1; connect Port 1 (radio frequency output port) of the
instrument to the RF input port of the spectrum analyzer, set the reference level of the spectrum
analyzer to 10 dBm, and enable frequency counting;
d) Press 【Freq】 [Center Frequency], 1GHz, [Sweep Width], 0Hz, and set the instrument to work at
the point frequency of 1GHz;
e) Set the center frequency of the spectrum analyzer to be the same as that of the instrument,
appropriately change the sweep width of the spectrum analyzer, search the peak, and set it to the
center;
f) Read out the count value fo of the spectrum analyzer, and fill in the log sheet;

16.1.2 Frequency resolution

Description: The frequency resolution of this test refers to the minimum frequency difference between
two adjacent frequency point signals output by the port of the instrument.

16.1.2.1 Testing Equipment

Spectrum analyzer…………………………………………………………………………………….4036
1 piece of N(m-m) cable (100 cm)
1 piece of BNC(m-m) cable (120 cm)

16.1.2.2 Test steps

a) Connect the instrument as shown in Figure 16-2. Connect Port 1 of the instrument to the RF input
port of the spectrum analyzer, which provides a 10 MHz frequency reference for the instrument. On the
instrument, press 【System/Local】[Frequency Reference Internal External], and select the 10 MHz
reference of the instrument as the external reference ;
b) Set the instrument as follows (other items remain the default settings of the system at startup):
Center frequency ...................................................................................................................... 2001MHz
Sweep width .................................................................................................................................. 0 MHz
Output power ........................................................................................................................high power
Measurement ................................................................................................................................... S11

217 / 248
4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Technical indicators and testing methods

10MHz BNC cable

Reference
10MHz
output
Reference
input

Spectrum analyzer N-type

cable
RF Analyzer

Figure 16-2 Block Diagram of Frequency Resolution Test

c) Press the reset key on the spectrum analyzer 4036 to make the following settings:
Center frequency 2001MHz
Frequency Bandwidth 100 Hz
Reference Level 10 dBm
d) On the spectrum analyzer4036, search the peak value, place the marker at the peak value
and turn on the difference marker;
e) Set the center frequency fs of instrument to be 2001.00001MHz;
f) Search the peak value on the spectrum analyzer 4036 again, read out the reading FM of the
different marker, and record in the 4957B RF Analyzer Record Sheet .

16.1.3 Power level

Description: The port output power of the instrument is divided into high, low and manually set. In this
test, the power level is checked and tested based on its menu.
The test steps are shown as follows:
a) Press 【Reset】 on the instrument to set the working mode to vector network analysis mode and the
test port to Port 1.
b) Press 【Amplitude】→[Power]→[High] to set the port output power to high.
c) Press 【Measure】→[Advance]→[A1], [Trace]→[Trace Math]→[Data→Mem]→[Data & Mem].
d) Press 【Amplitude】→[Power]→[Low] to set the port output power to low;
e) Compare the data and the in-memory traces. If the distance is obviously about 20dB~30dB,
the power range meets the requirements.
f) Set certain output power manually within the specified range. If the test curve is below the
high power output curve and relatively flat, the manually set power meets the requirements.
Make a tick in corresponding place of the test log sheet if it meets the requirements; otherwise,
make a cross.

16.1.4 Port output power

Description: It is to test the settable output power range for the vector network port of the instrument
meeting a certain power accuracy requirement and the difference between the measured value and the
actually set value of the port output power meter when the port output power is set to -15 dBm. The
smaller the difference, the higher the power level accuracy.

16.1.4.1 Testing Equipment

Power meter ..................................................................................................................... ML2437A

Power probe .................................................................................................................... MA2445D
One 3.5mm (f)-N(m) adapter

218 / 248
 4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Technical indicators and testing methods

Direct-connected Adapter
non-cable

Amplitude probe RF Analyzer

Power Meter

Figure 16-3 Block Diagram of Power Level Accuracy Test

16.1.4.2 Test steps

a) Set the instrument to work in the network analysis mode, and press 【Amplitude】 [Output Power]
[Manual Power]. It can be set within the range of -35dBm~-5dBm.
b) Connect the power meter ML2437A with the power probe MA2445D for zero calibration, as shown
in Figure 16-3, and connect Port 1 of the instrument to the power probe through the adapter.
c) Set the instrument to work in network analysis mode, the test port to Port 1, the output power level
to -15dBm, and the point frequency to 100MHz.
d) Set the calibration factor frequency of the power meter to be the same as the output frequency of
the RF analyzer.
e) Read the test value of the power meter, calculate the amplitude accuracy index (-15 - power meter
reading), and record the result in corresponding column of the test form;
f) Change the test frequency based on the test log sheet, and repeat c)～e) until all tests are
completed.

16.1.5 Effective directivity

Description: The direction is defined as the ratio of the power that occurs at the auxiliary end of a signal
when it travels in the positive direction to the power that occurs at the auxiliary end of a signal when it
travels in the reverse direction, expressed in dB. It shows how well a directional device can separate the
positive and reverse traveling waves. The larger the value of the directional index is, the better its ability
to separate signals is. Ideally it is infinite.

16.1.5.1 Testing Equipment

Calibration kit………`…………………………………………………………………………….20201A/B
N-type calibration cable

16.1.5.2 Test steps

Open-circuit device

Short-circuit device

Load device

RF Analyzer
Figure 16-4 Block Diagram Of Effective Directivity, Effective Source Matching And Reflection Tracking
219 / 248
4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Technical indicators and testing methods
Test
a) Set the analyzer as follows (for the other items, keep the default settings at the startup):
Start frequency.................................................................................................................... 300kHz
Stop frequency .................................................................................................................... 6.5GHz
Output power....................................................................................................................... -10dBm
Intermediate frequency bandwidth ....................................................................................... 100Hz
Points ....................................................................................................................................... 401
Port 1 effective directivity test
b) Press 【Measure】[S11] to select the test port as Port 1. Then press 【Cal】[Cal Kit] to select the
correct calibration kit, and press 【Cal】 [M Cal] [S11 Single Port], so as to complete the
measurement of standard parts such as OPEN, SHORT and LOAD, and finally press [Done] to
complete the calibration;
c) Do not remove the LOAD used in the last step of calibration from the measurement port. Press
[Sweep/Setup]→[Sweep Once], stop sweep after the instrument finishes the current sweep, and
press 【Mkr】[Marker search][Max] to find and test the maximum value;
d) Fill in the Record Sheet of 4957B RF Analyzer with the absolute value of the
maximum value as the effective directivity index of Port 1;
e) Remove the calibration kit from Port 1, and press 【[Sweep/Settings] → [Continuous Sweep] to
make the instrument in the continuous sweep state;
Port 2 Effective directivity test
f) Press 【Measure】[S22] to select the test port as Port 2. Then press 【Cal】[M Cal] [S22 Single Port],
so as to complete the measurement of standard parts such as OPEN, SHORT and LOAD, and
finally press [Done] to complete the calibration;
g) Repeat the step c), and fill in the Record Sheet of 4957B RF Analyzer with the absolute value of the
maximum value as the effective directivity index of Port 2;

16.1.6 Effective source matching

Description: Source matching refers to the matching degree of the output impedance equivalent to the
measurement port with the system standard impedance. In reflection measurement, the source
matching error signal is the signal reflected by the measured part, then reflected back to the measured
part by the signal source and finally reflected by the measured part. The source matching is expressed in
dB. The larger the value is, the better the index is, and the smaller the measurement error is. Ideally it is
infinite.

16.1.6.1 Testing Equipment

Calibration kit………`…………………………………………………………………………….20201A/B
N-type calibration cable

16.1.6.2 Test steps

a) Set the analyzer as follows (for the other items, keep the default settings at the startup):
Start frequency………………………………………………………………………………300kHz
Stop frequency………………………………………………………………………………6.5GHz
Output power………………………………………………………………………………-10dBm
Intermediatefrequency bandwidth……………………………………………………… 100Hz
Sweep points……………………………………………………………………………………401

b) Press 【Measure】 [S11] to select the test port as Port 1, then press 【Cal】 [Cal Kit] to select the
correct calibration kit, and press 【Cal】 [M Cal] [S11 One Port], complete the measurement of the
standard kits such as OPEN, LOAD, SHORT, etc., and finally press [OK] key to complete the calibration;

220 / 248
 4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Technical indicators and testing methods
c) Do not remove the SHORT used in the last step of calibration from the calibration port. Press
[Sweep/Settings] →[Single Sweep], stop after the instrument finishes the current sweep, and press
[Trace]→[Trace Operation]→[Data → Storage];
d) Remove the SHORT from the test port, connect the OPEN, press [Next Page], [Source Matching] to
make the instrument stop after completing the current sweep, and change the scale to make the curve
easier to read;
e) Press 【Mkr】[Marker Search] [Max] to search for the maximum test value Amax on the trace at this
time, take it as the source matching index of Port 1, and fill in the Record Sheet of 4957B RF Analyzer:
f) Press 【Measure】[S22] to select the test port as Port 2. Then press 【Cal】[M Cal][S22 Single Port],
so as to complete the measurement of standard parts such as OPEN, SHORT and LOAD, and finally
press [Done] to complete the calibration;
g) Repeat the steps 3 to 5, and fill in the Record Sheet of 4957B RF Analyzer with the effective
source matching index of Port 2;

16.1.7 Load matching

Description: This test is calibrated and error-corrected for load matching. The larger the value is, the
better the index will be, and the smaller the measurement error will be.

16.1.7.1 Testing Equipment

Calibration kit………`…………………………………………………………………………….20201A/B
N-type calibration cable

16.1.7.2 Test steps

a) Set the RF analyzer as follows (for the other items, keep the default settings at the startup):
Start frequency .................................................................................................................... 300 kHz
Stop frequency ..................................................................................................................... 6.5 GHz
Output power .......................................................................................................................... -10dBm
Intermediate frequency bandwidth ........................................................................................... 100Hz
Points ........................................................................................................................................... 401

Open-circuit device

Short-circuit
device
Load

RF Analyzer

Figure 16-5 Block Diagram of Load Matching Test

b) Press 【Cal】[Cal Kit] to select the correct calibration kit, then press 【Cal】[M Cal][Full 2
Ports][Reflection], connect the N-type calibration cable at the test Port 1 as shown in Figure 16-5,
connect the OPEN, SHORT and LOAD at the end of the cable successively to complete the
measurement of the standard kits such as the OPEN, SHORT and LOAD of the port P1; connect the
OPEN, SHORT and LOAD successively at the test Port 2, and complete the measurement of the
standard kits such as the OPEN, SHORT and LOAD of the port P2; and finally, press the [OK] key to
complete the reflection calibration of full 2 ports;
c) Directly connect the test Port 1 and test Port 2 with an N-type calibration cable, press [Transmit]
[Auto] to transmit the calibration, press [Back] [ISO] [Ignore Iso] to omit isolation calibration, and

221 / 248
4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Technical indicators and testing methods
finally press the [Back] [OK] key to complete the calibration of full 2 ports;
Port 1 Effective load matching test
d) Press 【Measure】[S11], press [Sweep/Settings] →[Single Sweep], and stop after the instrument
finishes the current sweep;
e) Press 【Mkr】[Marker Search] [Max] to record the read out the maximum return loss value R1;
f) Record the absolute value of R1 as the effective load matching index of Port 1 into the Record
Sheet of 4957B RF Analyzer;
Port 2 Effective load matching test
g) Press 【Measure】 [S22], press [Sweep/Settings] →[Single Sweep], and stop after the instrument
finishes the current sweep;
h) Press 【Mkr】[Marker Search] [Max] , and record the absolute value of the maximum as the effective
load matching index of Port 2 into the Record Sheet of 4957B RF Analyzer.

16.1.8 Reflection tracking

Description: Reflection tracking reflects the difference between the reflection test channel and the
reference channel. For the reflection tracking error after calibration and error correction in this test, the
smaller the value, the better the index, and the smaller the measurement error caused.

16.1.8.1 Testing Equipment

Calibration kit………`…………………………………………………………………………….20201A/B
N-type calibration cable

16.1.8.2 Test steps

a) Set the RF analyzer as follows (for the other items, keep the default settings at the startup):
Start frequency……………………………………………………………………………………300kHz
Stop frequency…………………………………………………………………………………… 6.5GHz
Output power………………………………………………………………………………………-10dBm
Intermediate frequency bandwidth……………………………………………………………… 100Hz
Sweep points………………………………………………………………………………………… 401
Port 1 Reflection tracking test
b) Press 【Measure】 [S11] to select the test port as Port 1, then press 【Cal】 [Cal Kit] to select the
correct calibration kit, and press 【Cal】 [M Cal] [S11 One Port], complete the measurement of the
standard kits such as OPEN, LOAD, SHORT, etc., and finally press [OK] key to complete the
calibration;
c) Do not remove the SHORT used in the last step of calibration from the calibration port. Press
[Sweep/Settings] →[Single Sweep], and stop after the instrument finishes the current sweep;
d) Press 【Mkr】[Marker Search][Max], record the read out maximum return loss value R1, press [Min],
record the read out minimum return loss value R2, and compare |R1| and |R2|;
e) e) Fill in the Record Sheet of 4957B RF Analyzer with the value for which the absolute value is
larger as the reflection tracking index of Port 1;
f) Press 【Sweep】[Trigger] [Continuous Sweep] to make the instrument in the continuous sweep
state;
Port 2 Reflection tracking test
g) Press 【Measure】[S22] to select the test port as Port 2, then press 【Cal】[M Cal] [S22 Single Port],
complete the measurement of the standard kits such as OPEN, LOAD, SHORT, etc., and finally
press the [OK] key to complete the calibration;
h) Repeat the steps c) to d), and fill in the Record Sheet of 4957B RF Analyzer with the value for which
the absolute value is larger as the reflection tracking index of Port 2.

222 / 248
 4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Technical indicators and testing methods
16.1.9 transmission tracking
Description: Transmission tracking reflects the difference between the transmission test channel and
the reference channel. For the transmission tracking error after calibration and error correction in this
test, the smaller the value, the better the index, and the smaller the measurement error caused.

16.1.9.1 Testing Equipment

Calibration kit………`…………………………………………………………………………….20201A/B
N-type calibration cable

16.1.9.2 Test steps

Load

RF Analyzer

Figure 16-6 Block Diagram of Dynamic Range and Transmission Tracking Test
f) Set the instrument as follows (other items remain the default settings of the system when it is
started):
Start frequency .................................................................................................................... 300 kHz
Ending frequency ..................................................................................................................... 6 GHz
Output power .......................................................................................................................... -10dBm
Intermediate frequency bandwidth ........................................................................................... 100Hz
Points ........................................................................................................................................... 401
g) Press 【Cal】→[Cal Kit] to select the correct calibration kit, then press [M Cal]→[Response &
Isolation S12]→[Isolation], as shown in Figure 16-6, connect the test cable to Port 1 or Port 2,
connect the LOAD at the end of the cable to the other port, and finally press [Isolation] to complete
isolation calibration.
h) Remove the LOAD, directly connect the test Port 1 and the test Port 2. and press [Through] to
complete S12 through measurement;
Port 1 Transmission tracking test
i) After the calibration is completed, wait for the end of single sweep, press 【Mkr】, [Marker Search],
[Max], and record the read out maximum value R1;
j) Press [Minimum Value] to record the read out the minimum value R2;
k) Compare |R1| and |R2|, and record the value for which the absolute value is larger as the
transmission tracking index of Port 1 into the Record Sheet of 4957B RF Analyzer;
Port 2 Transmission tracking test
l) Press 【Measure】, [S21], repeat the steps 2 to 6, carry out S21 transmission and isolation
calibration, and complete the test and record of transmission tracking indicators for Port 2.

16.1.10 Dynamic range

Description: Dynamic range refers to the difference between the maximum power output from the port
of the instrument and the measurement sensitivity of the port. The unit of the dynamic range index for
the port after calibration and error correction in the test is dB. The larger the value is, the better the index
is.

223 / 248
4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Technical indicators and testing methods

16.1.10.1 Testing Equipment

Calibration kit………`…………………………………………………………………………….20201A/B
N-type calibration cable

16.1.10.2 Test steps

a) Set the analyzer as follows (for the other items, keep the default settings at the startup):
Start frequency ....................................................................................................................... 300kHz
Stop frequency ....................................................................................................................... 6.5GHz
Output power ................................................................................................................. high power
Intermediate frequency bandwidth .......................................................................................... 10 Hz
Points ........................................................................................................................................... 401
b) Press 【Cal】→[Cal Kit] to select the correct calibration kit, then press [M Cal]→[Response &
Isolation S12], as shown in Figure 6, use the cable to directly connect the test Port 1 with Port 2, and
press [Trough] to complete the through measurement;
c) Remove the cable from one of the ports, connect the load on the calibration end face, and press
[Isolation] to complete the S12 isolation measurement;
Port 1 Dynamic range test
d) After the calibration is completed, wait for the end of single sweep, press 【Mkr】, [Marker Search],
[Max], and record the read out maximum value;
e) Fill in the Record Sheet of 4957B RF Analyzer with the absolute value of the maximum value
as the dynamic range index of Port 1;
Port 2 Dynamic range test
e) Press 【Measure】, [S21], repeat the steps 2 to 5, carry out S21 transmission and isolation
calibration, and complete the dynamic range test for Port 2.

16.2 Spectrum analysis performance indicator test

Before the indicator test in this section, first press the 【Mode】 key on the instrument, select the working
mode as the spectrum analysis mode, and carry out the detailed test according to the method
recommended in this section.

16.2.1 Frequency range

Description: Test the frequency measurement range of the comprehensive by using a 9 kHz signal and
a 6.5 GHz signal. Use a signal generator of high-frequency stability to produce signals within the nominal
upper and lower limits of the 4957B instrument to check whether the spectrum frequency measurement
capability of the 4957B is adequate.

16.2.1.1 Testing Equipment

Composite Signal Generator ........................................................................................... 1464A/1461

Several test cables and adapters

16.2.1.2 Test steps

a) Connect the test equipment by following the dotted line in Figure 16-7. The instrument is used to
provide reference frequencies for the 1464C composite signal generator. The low-frequency output
port of the composite signal generator is connected to the radio frequency input of the instrument.
b) Set the Composite signal generator as follows: 【Freq】 [Set Low Frequency Generator] [Set
224 / 248
 4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Technical indicators and testing methods
Frequency] 9 kHz, [Set Amplitude] -10 dBm, [Return], [Low Frequency Output On Off].
BNC cable

10MHz IN
Adapter 10 MHz output
Adapter

Adapter

Signal Generator
Adapter

Cables RF Analyzer

Figure 16-7 Frequency Range Test

c) Set the instrument to be the spectrum analysis mode, and set the center frequency of the spectrum
analyzer to 9 kHz, sweep width to 1 kHz, reference level to 0 dBm, and resolution bandwidth to 10
Hz. For the other items, set them to be automatic. On the instrument, press Peak Value. At this time,
the cursor points to the maximum signal response; the marker amplitude value has no obvious jitter;
the signal can be clearly distinguished. Then, record the center frequency as the lower-limit
measured value of the frequency span; otherwise, record Fail to meet the requirements.
d) As shown in the solid line of Figure 16-7, connect the radio frequency output of the composite signal
generator 1461 to the radio frequency input of the instrument with adapters and cables . Set the
output frequency of the signal generator to 6.5 GHz, the modulation function to off, and the output
power to -10 dBm.
e) Set the center frequency of the instrument to the highest frequency of the corresponding model,
sweep width to 1 kHz, reference level to 0 dBm, resolution bandwidth to 10 Hz, and other items
automatic. On the instrument, press Peak Value. At this time, the marker points to the maximum
signal response, the marker amplitude value has no obvious jitter; the signal can be clearly
distinguished. Then, record the center frequency as the lower-limit measured value of the frequency
range; otherwise, record Fail to meet the requirements.
f) Record measurement results in corresponding test items of the Record Sheet of 4957B RF
Analyzer.

16.2.2 Frequency reading accuracy

Description: This index is used to represent the proximity between the indicated value of frequency
measurement on the instrument and the corresponding true value. The frequency measurement
indicator value of the instrument is subject to the influence of some factors such as frequency reference,
span and RBW. Use an input signal with known frequency to test the accuracy of the frequency read out
from the instrument, which represents the degree of difference between the test indicator value and the
true value. The smaller the difference, the higher the accuracy.

16.2.2.1 Testing Equipment

Composite Signal Generator ........................................................................................... 1464A/1461

Several test cables and adapters

16.2.2.2 Test steps

Figure 16-8 Block Diagram of Frequency Readout Accuracy Test

Adapter

Signal Generator
Adapter 225 / 248

Cables
RF Analyzer
4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Technical indicators and testing methods
a) Connect the test equipment according to Figure 16-8, in which the RF output of the signal
generator is connected to the RF input of the spectrum analyzer.
b) Press the Reset key on the signal generator; set the output frequency f0 of the signal generator
according to the item of ―frequency readout accuracy‖ in the Record Sheet of 4957B RF Analyzer;
set the power level to -10 dBm, and turn on the radio frequency output switch.
c) Set the center frequency of the instrument to f0 for spectrum analysis, sweep width to 500 kHz,
reference level to 0 dBm, and the resolution bandwidth and sweep time to automatic.
d) Press 【Peak】 on the instrument, and read out the peak signal frequency fs through the marker.
e) Calculate the error of frequency reading (Δf) by formula (1):
Δf = fs- f0 (1)
f) Record Δf as the test result in the corresponding test item of Record Sheet of 4957B RF Analyzer.
g) Repeat steps b) through f) to test all combinations of frequencies and sweep widths listed in the
corresponding test items of the Record Sheet of 4957B RF Analyzer.

16.2.3 Sweep width accuracy

Description: Use two composite signal generators to send two signals of known frequency as the input
of the instrument. Set the center frequency of the instrument to the middle value of the two frequencies.
Measure the frequency difference between the two signals by using the marker. Calculate and record
the percentage of the error between the measured difference marker and the span. Enable the two
signal generators to share a reference frequency with the instrument.
Note: You can also use one signal generator to perform the test. Firstly set the center frequency and the
sweep width of the instrument , enable the frequency value of the first signal generator on the
instrument , and set the difference marker on the instrument; then enable the frequency value of the
second signal generator on the instrument. Read the difference marker of the two signals on the
instrument and record it as the measured value. Enable the signal generator to share a reference
frequency with the instrument .

16.2.3.1 Testing Equipment

Composite Signal Generator ........................................................................................... 1464A/1461

Several test cables and adapters

16.2.3.2 Test steps

BNC cable
10MHz IN
Adapter 10 MHz output

Signal Generator
Adapter

Cables
RF Analyzer
Figure 16-9 Block Diagram of Sweep Width Accuracy and Sweep Time Test
a) Connect the test equipment as shown in Figure 16- 9, and the instrument is used to provide
reference frequencies for the composite signal generator.
b) Set the center frequency f0 of the instrument for spectrum analysis to 3.25 GHz, and reference level
to 0 dBm; set the sweep width according to the item column of ― Sweep Width Accuracy‖ in the
Record Sheet of 4957B RF Analyzer.
c) Firstly set the output frequency of the signal generator to f1 (f1= f0-0.4×sweep width, the sweep width
is the setting value of the instrument), the power to -10 dBm, and the state of radio frequency output

226 / 248
 4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Technical indicators and testing methods
to on.
d) Press 【Peak】, 【Mkr】, [Delta Mode ] on the instrument.
e) Set the output frequency of the signal generator to f2 (f2=f0+0.4×Sweep width), and the output power
to -10 dBm;
f) Press the 【Peak】 key on the instrument and move the difference marker to f2. After sweep is
completed, read out the frequency difference Δf of the two signals through the instrument.
g) Record the frequency difference Δf and calculate the sweep width accuracy by the following
formula:
Span accuracy = 100× [Δf-(0.8×span)] /(0.8×span)% (2)
h) Record the results in the corresponding test items of the Record Sheet of 4957B RF Analyzer.
i) Turn off all frequency markers and set the sweep width of the instrument and the frequency of the
signal generator respectively according to the sweep widths of the instrument in the record sheet.
Repeat the steps c) to h) until all sweep width tests are completed.

16.2.4 Sweep time

Description: Display the amplitude modulation signal on the instrument at the zero sweep width,
and adjust the frequency of the modulation signal, enabling the peak intervals to be evenly distributed on
the screen. Count the frequency of the modulation signal, calculate the actual sweep time, and then
compare it with the specified time to obtain the sweep time accuracy. The sweep time accuracy is
guaranteed by design. In order to reduce the test time, select a typical sweep time to test and verify.

16.2.4.1 Testing Equipment

Composite Signal Generator ........................................................................................... 1464A/1461

Several test cables and adapters

16.2.4.2 Test steps

a) Connect the test equipment as shown in Figure 16-9, connect the radio frequency output of the
signal generator to the radio frequency input of the instrument, which is used to provide reference
frequencies for the composite signal generator.
b) Set the center frequency of the instrument to 3 GHz, the sweep width to 0 Hz, the resolution
bandwidth and the video bandwidth to 10 MHz respectively, and the number of sweep points to 201,
then the minimum settable sweep time is not higher than 10 μs, and the maximum settable sweep
time is 600 s. If the above settings meet the requirements of the "Sweep Time Range (Zero Sweep
Width)" item in the Record Sheet of 4957B RF Analyzer, it would be recorded as "√", otherwise it
would be recorded as "×. ‖
c) After resetting the signal generator, set the frequency to 3 GHz, the power to -5 dBm, 【Modulation】
[Amplitude Modulation] [Amplitude Modulation Input], [Internal], 【Back】, [Amplitude Modulation On],
[Modulation Rate], 10 kHz, [Modulation Depth], 100%, [Internal Modulation Waveform Selection],
[Sawtooth Wave], [Modulation Type Linear], and turn on the amplitude modulation switch and the
radio frequency output switch.
d) Set the scale type of the instrument to linear, the peak detection method, set the number of sweep
points to the default 1001 points, the resolution bandwidth to 3 MHz, and the video bandwidth to 3
MHz.
e) Set the instrument[Sweep Time], 1ms, [Sweep Type Continuous Single].
f) Set the instrument, press [Peak], and use [Left Peak] or [Right Peak] to place the marker on the first
peak from the left. Press 【Mkr】[Delta Mode], press 【Peak】, and use [Left Peak] or [Right Peak]
to place the marker on the ninth peak from the left. To read out the difference marker reading,
227 / 248
4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Technical indicators and testing methods
calculate as follows:
Sweep time error=100 × ((Marker difference reading × 1.25 - set sweep time) / set sweep time) %
(3)
Record the results at the 1 ms sweep time in the corresponding test items of the Record Sheet of
4957B RF Analyzer.
g) Turn off the marker, and repeat the steps f) ~ g) for other sweep time listed in the table. Set the
modulation rate (Frequency) in step f) according to the following formula: Modulation rate =
10/sweep time settings

16.2.5 Resolution bandwidth

Description: Resolution bandwidth is used to represent the capability of the instrument to clearly
separate two input signals. It is subject to the influence of some factors such as IF filter bandwidth,
phase noise, and sweep time. Most spectrum analyzers can be used to test different resolution
bandwidths by using the LC filter, crystal filter, SAW, digital filter, etc.
Connect the output of the signal generator to the radio frequency input of the instrument. Set the
bandwidth of the 4957B to approximately 2~3 times the current resolution bandwidth (facilitate the
measurement of -3 dB bandwidth). Reduce the signal source output amplitude by 3 dB to determine the
actual -3 dB point. After the marker reference is set, the output value of the signal source is increased by
3 dB and is returned back to the previous level. Then sweep is started. The difference marker is taken as
the measured value of 3 dB bandwidth.
The reading value in the 4957B usable for 3 dB bandwidth test can be taken as the test value. The span
error of Analyzer may cause an error to the resolution bandwidth accuracy. Compared with the error of
resolution bandwidth, the span error can be neglected.

16.2.5.1 Testing Equipment

Composite Signal Generator ........................................................................................... 1464A/1461

Several test cables and adapters

16.2.5.2 Test steps

BNC cable
10MHz IN 10 MHz output

Adapter

Signal Generator
Adapter

Cables RF Analyzer

Figure 16-10 Settings for Resolution Bandwidth Accuracy Test

a) Connect the test equipment as shown in Figure 16-10. The instrument is used to provide reference
frequencies for the signal generator.
b) Set the composite signal generator as follows: frequency is 100 MHz; power is -2 dBm; power step
is 1 dB.
c) Reset the instrument, press the 【 Mode 】 , [Frequency Analysis], [Measure] and [Occupied

228 / 248
 4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Technical indicators and testing methods
Bandwidth] keys to open the function of measuring occupied bandwidths; select the measurement
method XdB, and change X to -3.01 dB.
d) Set the center frequency of the instrument to 100 MHz, sweep width to 30 MHz, amplitude scale to 1
dB/graduation, and resolution bandwidth to 10 MHz. For the other items, keep the default values of
system.
e) Adjust the output power of the composite signal generator to make the signal be 2 to 3 scales below
the reference level.
f) f) Use the instrument to search the peak value, record the 3 dB bandwidth marker difference
Δf-3 dB that is read out at this time; calculate the resolution bandwidth accuracy δ by the following
formula, and fill the calculation results in the corresponding test item of the Record Sheet of 4957B
RF Analyzer.
f  RBW
  3dB 100%
RBW (5)
g) Set the instrument according to the item column of ― Resolution Bandwidth Accuracy ‖ in the Record
Sheet of 4957B RF Analyzer, with the frequency bandwidth close to three times of the resolution
bandwidth. Repeat the steps f)~g) until all resolution bandwidth tests are completed.

16.2.6 Noise sideband

Description: Sideband noise is an indicator to represent the short-term stability of the local oscillator
signal frequency of the instrument.
Measure the sideband noises of the 1.0 GHz and 0 dBm reference signals at deviation points of 10 kHz,
100 kHz, 1 MHz and 10 MHz of the carrier wave. Average the sideband noise at each frequency
deviation point by using the noise marker and video averaging function. If there is a spurious response at
the set frequency deviation point, deviate the cursor from the spurious response to ensure the
measurement accuracy.

16.2.6.1 Testing Equipment

Composite Signal Generator ........................................................................................... 1464A/1461

Test cable and adapter

16.2.6.2 Test steps

10 MHz input BNC cable

10 MHz output

Adapte

Signal Generator
Adapter

Cables RF Analyzer
Figure 16-11 Schematic Diagram of Sideband Noise Test
a) Connect the test equipment as shown in Figure 16-11, and the instrument is used to provide
reference frequencies for the composite signal generator.
b) Set the output frequency of the signal generator to 1GHz and the output power to 0dBm;
c) On the instrument, set 【Freq】 to 1 GHz, [Sweep Width] to 30 kHz, and 【Amplitude】 (Ref Level)

229 / 248
4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Technical indicators and testing methods
to 0 dBm.
d) Press 【Mkr】, [Peak], [Delta Mode] on the instrument to set the difference marker to 10 kHz, and
turn on the noise marker.
e) Set the resolution bandwidth and video bandwidth according to Table 4; enable the averaging
function; and perform 10 times of averaging.
f) Record the difference marker amplitude value as the sideband noise at +10 kHz deviation point in
the corresponding measured value item of the Record Sheet of 4957B RF Analyzer.
g) Press 【Mkr】 - 10 kHz] on the instrument and record the difference marker amplitude value as the
sideband noise at the -10 kHz deviation point.
h) Set the instrument according to Table 4; test the single sideband noise at the deviation points of
±100 kHz, ±1 MHz and ±10 MHz successively; record the difference marker amplitude value in the
corresponding test item of the Record Sheet of 4957B RF Analyzer. If there is a spurious response
at the frequency deviation point under test, keep away from the spurious response when reading the
cursor value in the test.

Table 16-1 Sideband Noise Measurement Settings

Offset frequency Δf Span RBW Video bandwidth and averaging
±10 kHz 30 kHz 300 Hz Video bandwidth is 30Hz;
averaging is On
±100 kHz 300 kHz 3 kHz Video Bandwidth 300 Hz Average
On
±1 MHz 2.2 MHz 10kHz Video Bandwidth 1 kHz Average On
±10 MHz 25 MHz 100 kHz Video Bandwidth 10 kHz Average
On

16.2.7 Explicit average noise level

Description: The explicit average noise level refers to the background noise observed by the
instrument when there is no additional noise or signal. The input port of the instrument is connected to a
50 matcher. The normalized noise value observed when the input attenuation value is set to 0 dB is the
measured value of the average noise level.

16.2.7.1 Testing Equipment

50Ω matcher

16.2.7.2 Test steps

50Ω matcher

RF Analyzer

Figure 16-12 Settings for Test of Explicit Average Noise Level

a) Connect the 50 matcher to the radio frequency input port of the instrument according to Figure
16-12.
Explicit average noise; the preamplifier is on (2 MHz-10 MHz)

230 / 248
 4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Technical indicators and testing methods
b) Set the instrument as follows:
Starting frequency ....................................................................................................... 2MHz
Ending frequency ...................................................................................................... 10MHz
Reference level ....................................................................................................... -50 dBm
Mkr .................................................................................................................. all marker Off
Resolution Bandwidth .............................................................................................. 100kHz
Video Bandwidth ....................................................................................................... 30 kHz
Video type ............................................................................................................ Logarithm
Preamplifier .................................................................................................................... On
Detection type ..............................................................................................................Mean

c) Press [Cursor] -> [Noise cursor off on] -> [Peak] -> [Maximum].
d) Press [Bandwidth] -> [Averaging on off] -> ―5‖ -> [Confirm]; wait until ―averaging 5/5‖ is shown on the
left side of the screen.
e) Read the peak value of the marker as the explicit average noise level of the 2 MHz to 10 MHz
frequency band in the case that the preamplifier is on, and record it in the corresponding test item of
the Record Sheet of 4957B RF Analyzer. Turn off the noise cursor and the averaging function.
Explicit average noise, the preamplifier is on (10 MHz-3 GHz)
f) Set the start frequency of the instrument to 10 MHz, the stop frequency to 3 GHz, and make the
others unchanged.
g) Repeat the steps c) to d).
h) h) Read the peak value of the marker as the explicit average noise level of the 10 MHz to 3 GHz
frequency band in the case that the preamplifier is on, and record it in the corresponding test item of
the Record Sheet of 4957B RF Analyzer. Turn off the noise cursor and the averaging function.
Explicit average noise; the preamplifier is on (3 GHz ~ 6.5 GHz)
i) Set the start frequency of the instrument to 3 GHz, the stop frequency to 6.5 GHz; and make the
others unchanged.
j) Repeat the steps c) to d).
k) Read the peak value of the marker as the explicit average noise level of the 3 GHz to 6.5 GHz
frequency band in the case that the preamplifier is on, and record it in the corresponding test item of
the Record Sheet of 4957B RF RF Analyzer. Turn off the noise cursor and the averaging
function.
Explicit average noise; the preamplifier is off (2 MHz-10 MHz)
l) Set the start frequency of the instrument to 2 MHz, the stop frequency to 10 MHz, the reference
level to -20dBm, the preamplifier to be off; and make the others unchanged.
m) Repeat the steps c) to d).
n) Read the peak value of the marker as the explicit average noise level of the 2 MHz to 10 MHz
frequency band in the case that the preamplifier is off; record the value in the corresponding test
item of the Record Sheet of 4957B RF Analyzer. Turn off the noise cursor and the averaging
function.
Explicit average noise; the preamplifier is off (10 MHz ~ 3 GHz)
o) Set the start frequency of the instrument to 10 MHz, the stop frequency to 3 GHz, the reference
level to -20dBm, the preamplifier to be off; and make the others unchanged.
p) Repeat the steps c) to d).

231 / 248
4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Technical indicators and testing methods
q) Read the peak value of the marker as the explicit average noise level of the 10 MHz to 3 GHz
frequency band in the case that the preamplifier is off; record the value in the corresponding test
item of the Record Sheet of 4957B RF Analyzer. Turn off the noise cursor and the averaging
function.
Explicit average noise; the preamplifier is off (3 GHz ~ 6.5 GHz)
r) Set the start frequency of the instrument to 3 GHz, the stop frequency to 6.5 GHz, the reference
level to -20dBm, the preamplifier to be off; and make the others unchanged.
s) Repeat the steps c) to d).
t) Read the peak value of the marker as the explicit average noise level of the 3 GHz to 6.5 GHz
frequency band in the case that the preamplifier is off; record the value in the corresponding test
item of the Record Sheet of 4957B RF Analyzer. Turn off the noise cursor and the averaging
function.

16.2.8 Second harmonic distortion

Description: When a signal is input to a nonlinear device (such as a mixer and amplifier, etc.), the
nonlinear device will generate the harmonics of the input signal, and the unwanted second harmonic
component attached to the signal is called For second harmonic distortion.
The composite signal generator provides a signal to the instrument to measure the second harmonic
distortion via a low-pass filter. The low pass filter removes any harmonic distortion from the signal source.
The composite signal generator is locked to the 10 MHz reference of the instrument.

16.2.8.1 Testing Equipment

Composite Signal Generator ........................................................................................... 1464A/1461

One 1.0 GHz low-pass filter
One 3.0 GHz low-pass filter
One 3.5 mm (f)-3.5 mm (f) adapter
One BNC (m-m) cable
1 piece of 3.5 mm(m-m) cable

16.2.8.2 Test steps

BNC
10MHz IN
10 MHz output

Signal Generator
Adapte
Low-pass filter
3.5mm cable RF Analyzer

Adapter Adapter
Figure 16-13 Settings of Second Harmonic Distortion Test
a) Connect the test instrument as shown in Figure 16-13. The instrument provides a 10 MHz frequency
reference for the composite signal generator and selects a 1 GHz low-pass filter.
b) Set the frequency of the signal generator to 900 MHz, the amplitude to -30dBm, and the radio

232 / 248
 4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Technical indicators and testing methods
frequency output is on.
c) Set the RF analyzer as follows (other items remain the default settings of the system):
Center frequency .............................................................................................................. 900 MHz
Span ......................................................................................................................................... 10kHz
Reference Level .................................................................................................................... -30 dBm

d) Press 【Peak】 on the instrument. Adjust the power level of the signal generator so that the reading
of the RF analyzer is -30dBm0.1dB.
e) Press 【Mkr】[Delta Mode] to set the center frequency to 1.8 GHz.
f) Press 【Peak】 after the instrument has completed a new sweep. Record the difference marker
reading in the item of 0.9 GHz second harmonic distortion of the Record Sheet of 4957B RF
Analyzer.
g) Connect the test instrument as shown in Figure 14, and use the 3.0 GHz low-pass filter.
h) Set the frequency of the signal generator to 2.5 GHz, and the amplitude to -30dBm.
i) Set the instrument as follows (other items remain the default settings of the system):
Center frequency ................................................................................................................... 3 GHz
Span ......................................................................................................................................... 10kHz
Amplitude .............................................................................................................................. -30dBm
Mkr ................................................................................................................................. all marker Off
j) Press 【Peak】 on the instrument. Adjust the power level of the signal generator so that the reading
of the RF analyzer is -30dBm0.1dB.
k) Press 【Mkr】[Delta Mode] to set the center frequency to 5 GHz.
l) Wait for the new sweep to complete, then Press 【Peak】. Record the difference marker reading in
the item of 2.5 GHz second harmonic distortion of the Record Sheet of 4957B RF Analyzer.

16.2.9 Mirror, multiple and out-of-band responses

Description: During frequency mixing, two input signals can generate the same IF signal with that of the
LO signal with the same frequency, with one signal frequency one IF lower than the LO and another
signal frequency one IF higher than the LO. In this case, one of the signal is called the mirror frequency
of the other. Each frequency of the LO has a mirror frequency of corresponding input signal, with the
difference of two IFs between the signal and frequency of the mirror frequency.
Test image, multiple and out-of-band responses on all frequency bands. The signal is applied to the
input port of the instrument for reference amplitude measurement. Then tune composite signal generator
to a frequency that causes a mirror, multiple or out-of-band response, and measure and record the
amplitude displayed on the instrument.

16.2.9.1 Testing Equipment

Composite Signal Generator ........................................................................................... 1464A/1461

Test cable and adapter

233 / 248
4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Technical indicators and testing methods

16.2.9.2 Test steps

Figure 16-14 Settings of Mirror, Multiple and Out-of-band Responses

BNC cable
10MHz IN

Adapter
10 MHz output

Signal Generator
Adapter

Cables
RF Analyzer

a) Connect the test equipment as shown in Figure 16-14. The instrument is used to provide reference
frequencies for the composite signal generator.
b) Set the frequency of the signal generator to 2 GHz and the power to -10dBm.
c) Set the instrument as follows:
Center frequency .................................................................................................................... 2GHz
Span ......................................................................................................................................... 10kHz
Reference Level .................................................................................................................... -10 dBm
Resolution Bandwidth................................................................................................................ 10 Hz
Video bandwidth ...................................................................................................................... 10 Hz

d) Adjust the output power level of the composite signal generator, enabling the signal peak to be
close to the reference level of the instrument.
e) On the instrument, press 【Peak】【Mkr】[Delta mode].
f) Set the signal generator to each frequency point of mirror, multiple and out-of-band response
corresponding to 2 GHz listed in the test item of the Record Sheet of 4957B RF Analyzer. Set the
reference level of the instrument to -40dBm, press 【Peak】, and record the difference marker
amplitude value as the response amplitude in the corresponding test item of the Record Sheet of
4957B RF Analyzer.

16.2.10 Residual response

Description: It refers to the discrete response displayed on the display when the instrument is not
connected to the input signal.

16.2.10.1 Testing Equipment

50 load matching

234 / 248
 4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Technical indicators and testing methods

16.2.10.2 Test steps

50matcher

RF Analyzer

Figure 16-15 Setting of Residual Response Test

Residual response, 10 MHz～6.5 GHz (Preamplifier On)
a) Connect the 50  matcher on the spectrum input port of the instrument according to Figure 16-15,
and set the instrument as follows:
Center frequency ..................................................................................................................... 65MHz
Frequency Stepping ............................................................................................................. 100MHz.
Span ...................................................................................................................................... 110MHz
Reference level...................................................................................................................... -50 dBm
Preamplifier ................................................................................................................................... On
Resolution bandwidth ............................................................................................................... 10kHz
Video bandwidth ......................................................................................................................... 3kHz

b) Turn on the limit line function, and set the upper limit line to -95dBm, and the noise level shall be at
least 5dB below the limit line. If not, it is necessary to decrease the resolution bandwidth and video
bandwidth so as to decrease the noise level.
c) Observe whether there is residual response on the noise baseline of the instrument. If yes, use the
marker to read out the residual response amplitude and record the measurement result. The test
should be such that the amplitude of the residual response signal is greater than the display
average noise level by more than 10 dB. If the residual response signal amplitude is small, the
resolution bandwidth should be further reduced to minimize the display average noise level.
d) Press 【Freq】 [Center Frequency] 【↑】 to change the center frequency. Repeat step 3 to check
the residual response of the frequency up to 6.5 GHz, record the measured maximum value in the
corresponding test item with the preamplifier on of the Record Sheet of 4957B RF Analyzer.
Residual response, 10 MHz～6.5 GHz (Preamplifier Off)
e) Set the instrument as follows:
Center frequency ..................................................................................................................... 65MHz
Frequency Stepping ............................................................................................................. 100MHz.
Span ...................................................................................................................................... 110MHz
Reference Level .................................................................................................................... -20 dBm
Preamplifier ................................................................................................................................... Off
Resolution bandwidth ............................................................................................................... 10kHz
Video bandwidth ......................................................................................................................... 3kHz

f) Turn on the limit line function, and set to -82dBm, and the noise level shall be at least 5dB below the

235 / 248
4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Technical indicators and testing methods
limit line. If not, it is necessary to decrease the resolution bandwidth and video bandwidth so as to
decrease the noise level.
g) Observe whether there is residual response on the noise baseline of the instrument. If yes, use the
marker to read out the residual response amplitude and record the measurement result. The test
should be such that the amplitude of the residual response signal is greater than the display
average noise level by more than 10 dB. If the residual response signal amplitude is small, the
resolution bandwidth should be further reduced to minimize the display average noise level.
h) Press 【Freq】 [Center Frequency] 【↑】 to change the center frequency. Repeat step h) to check
the residual response of the frequency up to 6.5 GHz, record the measured maximum value in the
corresponding test item with the preamplifier off of the Record Sheet of 4957B RF Analyzer.

16.2.11 Reference level

Description: The vertical scale position that has been calibrated on the instrument screen is used as the
reference of amplitude measurement. The reference level usually refers to the top scale line. Reference
level switching may cause a linkage of gain/attenuation. The error of reference level conversion is used
to assess the switching gain error of the instrument.
Note: If the error is large when the power meter performs a measurement at -60 dBm, you can directly
reduce the test result of -50 dBm by 10 dB, or connect a 10 dB attenuator that has been calibrated to the
input port of the instrument for test.

16.2.11.1 Testing Equipment

Signal generator .............................................................................................................. 1464A/1461

Power meter ........................................................................................................................ ML2437A
Power probe ....................................................................................................................... MA2445D
Power splitter .............................................................................................................................81313
Test cable and adapter

16.2.11.2 Test steps

BNC cable
10MHz IN
Power
Cables 10 MHz output
Probe

Adapter
Signal Generator

RF Analyzer

Power

Figure 16-16 Settings for Test of Reference Level Uncertainty and Scale Fidelity
a) Connect the power meter ML2437A to the power probe MA2445D, conduct zero calibration on them,
and set the calibration factor frequency to 50 MHz.
b) Connect the test equipment according to Figure 16-16. The instrument is used to provide

236 / 248
 4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Technical indicators and testing methods
reference frequencies for the composite signal generator. The output ends of the signal generator
are respectively connected to the instrument and the power probe via a power splitter.
c) 【↓】. If the maximum
Set【Amplitude】[Ref Level] on the instrument with the knob or the step key 【↑】
and minimum reference levels can be set to +30 dBm and -120 dBm respectively, the indicator of
reference level range meets the requirement, and mark in the corresponding result of the Record
Sheet of 4957B RF Analyzer as ―√‖, otherwise mark as ―x‖.
d) Set the output frequency of the composite signal generator to 50 MHz and adjust the output power
to make the power meter reading be -3 dBm 0.05dB.
e) Set the instrument as follows:
Center frequency .................................................................................................................... 50 MHz
Reference level......................................................................................................................... 0 dBm
Sweep width .............................................................................................................................. 1 kHz
Logarithmic scale dB/div ............................................................................................................. 1 dB
Resolution Bandwidth................................................................................................................ 10 Hz
f) On the instrument, press 【Peak】【Mkr】 [Delta mode ].
g) Adjust the output power of the signal generator to reduce the power meter reading by 10dB
0.02dB.
h) Set the reference level of the instrument to the reference level listed in the Record Sheet of 4957B
RF Analyzer, wait until the sweep is completed and then press 【Peak】.
i) Record the difference marker amplitude reading of the instrument , make the following
calculations (difference marker amplitude reading of the instrument – currently set reference level,
and record the calculated value as the uncertainty of current reference level in the corresponding
test item of the Record Sheet of 4957B RF Analyzer.
j) Repeat steps g) through i) to set the residual reference levels listed in the corresponding test items
of the Record Sheet of 4957B RF Analyzer.

16.2.12 Scale fidelity

Description: Scale fidelity is the error between the vertical scale and the theoretical value of the
instrument screen, which is used to assess the linearity of the analog-to-digital converter of the
instrument.
Test the fidelity at 10 dB/div, for which the resolution bandwidth is set to 10 Hz, and the initial amplitude
of the input signal is set at the 0 dBm reference level. When the signal amplitude is reduced, compare
the displayed signal amplitude with the reference level. The instrument provides a 10 MHz reference for
the signal generator.
Note: If the error is large when the power meter performs a measurement at -60 dBm, you can directly
reduce the test result of -50 dBm by 10dB, or connect a 10 dB attenuator that has been calibrated to the
input port of the instrument for test.

16.2.12.1 Testing Equipment

Signal generator .............................................................................................................. 1464A/1461

Power meter ........................................................................................................................ ML2437A
Power probe ....................................................................................................................... MA2445D
Power splitter .............................................................................................................................81313
237 / 248
4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Technical indicators and testing methods
Test cable and adapter

16.2.12.2 Test steps

BNC cable
10MHz IN
Power
2.4 mm 10 MHz output
Probe

Adapter
Signal Generator

RF Analyzer

Power Meter
Figure 16-17 Scale fidelity
a) Connect the power meter to the power probe and perform zero calibration; set the calibration factor
frequency to 50 MHz.
b) Connect the test equipment as shown in Figure 16-17. The instrument is used to provide reference
frequencies for the composite signal generator. The output ends of the signal source are
respectively connected to the instrument and the power probe via a power splitter.
c) Set the RF analyzer as follows (other items remain the default settings of the system):
Center frequency .................................................................................................................... 50 MHz
Reference level......................................................................................................................... 0 dBm
Mkr ................................................................................................................................................ Off
Sweep width .............................................................................................................................. 1 kHz
Resolution Bandwidth................................................................................................................ 10 Hz

d) Set the frequency of the signal generator to 50 MHz, the amplitude to 6 dBm, and the amplitude
step to 0.05 dB.
e) Press 【Peak】 on the instrument.
f) Adjust the output amplitude of the signal generator until the power meter reads 0 dBm  0.05 dB.
g) On the instrument, press 【Peak】【Mkr】 [Delta Mode].
h) Adjust the output signal amplitude of the signal emitter to reduce the power meter reading by 10 dB
 0.05 dB.
i) Make the following calculations (difference marker amplitude reading of the instrument - power
variation value of the signal source), record the calculation data in the corresponding test item of the
Record Sheet of 4957B RF Analyzer, and repeat steps h) to i).

16.2.13 Overall level uncertainty

Description: The overall level uncertainty means the difference between the power reading of the
composite signal generator tested on the power meter and the reading of the signal generator tested on
the instrument. Being affected by the front-end program-controlled step attenuator, this index is used to
respectively test the amplitude accuracy index of each frequency point when the attenuation is set to
different values and when the attenuation is 0 dB, so as to ensure the test comprehensiveness.

238 / 248
 4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Technical indicators and testing methods

16.2.13.1 Testing Equipment

Composite Signal Generator ........................................................................................... 1464A/1461

Power meter ........................................................................................................................ ML2437A
Power probe ....................................................................................................................... MA2445D
Power splitter .............................................................................................................................81313
Test cable and adapter

16.2.13.2 Test steps

BNC cable
10MHz IN
Power
Cables 10 MHz output
Probe

Adapter
Signal Generator

RF Analyzer

Power Meter
Figure 16-18 Test Settings for Overall Level Uncertainty
a) Connect the power meter to the power probe, and conduct zero calibration on them.
b) Connect the testing equipment as shown in Figure 16-18, and connect the SUM port of the power
splitter, the port PORT1 and the port PORT2 to the radio frequency input port of the instrument and
the power probe respectively.
c) After resetting the signal generator, set the frequency to 10 MHz and amplitude to -15dBm.
d) Set the instrument as follows:
Center frequency ................................................................................................................ 10 MHz
Sweep width ...................................................................................................................... 100 KHz
Reference Level .................................................................................................................... -10 dBm
Attenuation .................................................................................................................................. 0 dB
Resolution bandwidth ............................................................................................................. 1 kHz
Video bandwidth .................................................................................................................. 100 Hz

e) Adjust the output amplitude of the signal generator to make the power meter reading -25dBm.
f) f) Set the marker of the instrument to the peak value, read the level value L indicated by the
marker of the instrument and the test reading Lpower meter of the power meter, and calculate the
overall level uncertainty △L as follows:
L  L  L功率计
(8)
g) Record the calculated △L in the Record Sheet of 4957B RF Analyzer as the test results of the
overall level uncertainty.
239 / 248
4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Technical indicators and testing methods
h) Repeat step f) to test the overall level uncertainty index when the attenuation value of the internal
attenuator for the instrument is 10 dB and 20 dB.
i) Set the reference level of the instrument to 20dBm, and change the output power level of the signal
generator to make the power meter reading -5dBm.
j) Repeat step f) to test the overall level uncertainty index when the attenuation value of the attenuator
is 30 dB.
k) Change the frequency settings of the signal generator, the power meter and the instrument
according to the Record Sheet of 4957B RF Analyzer, and repeat steps e) to i) until the test for all
attenuations at all frequency points is completed.
Overall level uncertainty (frequency response test)
l) For the signal generator, set the frequency to 500 MHz and output power to -15dBm.
m) Set the calibration factor frequency of the power meter to be the same as that of the signal
generator, and adjust the output power level of the signal generator to make the power meter
reading close to -25dBm.
n) Set the center frequency of the instrument to 500 MHz, reference level to -10dBm, and attenuation
to 0dB, and repeat step f).
o) Change the frequency settings of the signal generator, the power meter, and the instrument
according to the Record Sheet of 4957B RF Analyzer, and repeat steps k) ~ m) for the test of all
frequency points with attenuation being reduced to 0dB.

16.2.14 Input attenuator

Description: The test switches uncertainty between the measured attenuations of the input attenuator
range within all bands. The reference input to the composite signal generator is provided by the 10 MHz
reference of the instrument. Switch the uncertainty by referring to the settings of the 0 dB attenuator.

16.2.14.1 Testing Equipment

Composite Signal Generator ........................................................................................... 1464A/1461

Test cable and adapter

16.2.14.2 Test steps

10MHz IN BNC cable

10 MHz output

Signal Generator
Adapter

Cables
RF Analyzer

Figure 16-19 Settings for Test of Input Attenuator Conversion Uncertainty

a) Connect the test equipment according to Figure 16-19, and the instrument is used to provide
reference frequencies for the composite signal generator.
b) Set the output power level of the signal generator to -13dBm and the output frequency to 50 MHz.

240 / 248
 4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Technical indicators and testing methods
c) Press 【Reset】 on the instrument to set as the spectrum analysis mode, and set it as follows:
Center frequency .................................................................................................................... 50 MHz
Sweep width .............................................................................................................................. 1 kHz
Reference Level .................................................................................................................... -10 dBm
Attenuation .................................................................................................................................. 0 dB
Resolution Bandwidth................................................................................................................ 10 Hz
Wait for the new sweep to complete, press 【Mkr】, [Peak], [ Delta Mode ], and take the attenuation value
of 0dB for the attenuator as a reference.
d) Set the instrument, press 【Amplitude】[Attenuation Auto Man], and set the attenuation value of the
attenuator according to the test table.
e) After the sweep is completed, press 【Peak】, the amplitude value of the current difference marker
is the attenuator switching error .
f) Repeat steps e) ~ f) until the attenuation values of all the attenuators in the table have been tested ,
and record the test results in the Record Sheet of 4957B RF Analyzer .

16.2.15 Input voltage standing wave ratio test

Description: The radio frequency input voltage standing wave ratio reflects the impedance matching
degree of the radio frequency receiving front end of the instrument. This indicator is mainly affected by
adapters, cables, attenuators, etc. The attenuation value of the attenuator is required to be greater than
or equal to 10dB during the test. The 4957B adopts the scheme of the sub-band switch combined with
electronic attenuator. Different electronic attenuators are used in the frequency bands of 9 kHz ~ 5.2
GHz and 5.2 GHz ~ 6.5 GHz. In order to avoid influence between each other, the instrument shall be set
to work in a suitable frequency range when testing the voltage standing wave ratio, so that only one
attenuator works in the test frequency band.

16.2.15.1 Testing Equipment

Handheld antenna feeder tester ............................................................................................. 3680B

A set of 20201A calibration kit (including OPEN, SHORT and LOAD)
One piece of N-type calibration cable

16.2.15.2 Test steps

Antenna feeder

N-type calibration

RF Analyzer

Figure 16-20 Input Port Voltage Standing Wave Test

a) Set the appropriate parameters such as the frequency range, the source output power, etc. of the
antenna feeder tester, and select the VSWR display mode.
Perform single-port measurement calibration (including OPEN, SHORT and LOAD calibration) on
the antenna feeder tester at the end of the calibration cable.
241 / 248
4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Technical indicators and testing methods
b) After completing the calibration, remove the calibration kit from the end of the calibration cable and
connect it to the spectrum radio frequency input port of the instrument, as shown in Figure 20.
c) Press the 【Reset】 key on the instrument, wait for restart and enter the spectrum analysis and
measurement interface, and set the frequency range of the complete machine to 10 MHz ~ 5.2 GHz
and 5.2 GHz ~ 6.5 GHz respectively.
d) Use the marker function to read out the maximum voltage standing wave ratio (VSWR) on the
antenna feeder tester.
e) Record the test result in the corresponding test item of Record Sheet of 4957B RF Analyzer.

242 / 248
 4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Appendix A Performance and Property Inspection Results
Appendix A Performance and Property Inspection Results
Appendix A Record Sheet of 4957B RF Analyzer
Instrument No.: Test Personnel:

Test Date: Test Condition:

Record Sheet of 4957B RF Analyzer

No. Item Unit Standard Requirement Results
Structure: Handheld
Appearance color: Black
Design and Structure The complete machine features neat and beautiful appearance, clear
text display on the panel, flexible key and knob operation, and
convenient and reliable connection of the connectors, and free of
obvious mechanical damage and stains
Spectrum measurement function
Measurement function of power kit

Function Audio frequency demodulation function

IQ capture function
Vector network analysis and measurement function

Cable and Antenna Analyzer

Vector voltmeter
USB Power Meter
IA
Analog demodulation analysis
Channel sweep
Options
Field Strength Meter
GPS function
Safety option
Directional analysis
Signal analysis
Signal generation
Vector network analysis performance indicator

Frequency range and 30kHz~6.5GHz

accuracy 1GHz： 1GHz±1000Hz
Frequencyresolution 2001MHz: 10
Power level / Large, small and manual setting

Port output power dBm Power range: -35 dBm ~ -5dBm10 MHz~6.5 GHz)
100MHz ±2.5
500MHz ±2.5
1.5GHz ±2.5
2.5GHz ±2.5
Power level accuracy
3.5GHz ±2.5
4.5GHz ±2.5
5.5GHz ±2.5
6.5GHz ±2.5

243 / 248
4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Appendix A Performance and Property Inspection Results
Record Sheet of 4957B RF Analyzer (continued 1)
No. Item Unit Standard Requirement Results
Test port 1
Effective directivity ≥40 300kHz~6.5GHz
Test port 2

Effective source Test port 1

≥33 300kHz~6.5GHz
matching Test port 2

Test port 1
Load matching ≥37 300kHz~6.5GHz
Test port 2
Test port 1
Reflected tracking ±0.06 300kHz~6.5GHz
Test port 2

Transmission Test port 1

±0.08 300kHz~6.5Hz
tracking Test port 2
Test port 1
Dynamic range ≥95dB 300kHz~6.5GHz
Test port 2

Spectrum analysis performance indicator

9kHz 9kHz±21Hz
Frequency range
6.5GHz 6.5GHz±21Hz
1.0GHz(bandwidth 500kHz): ±11.10
1.0 GHz (bandwidth 50 MHz): ±1.03
1.0 GHz(bandwidth 500 MHz)： ±10.30
3.0 GHz (bandwidth 500 kHz): ±12.70
3.0 GHz (bandwidth 50 MHz): ±1.03
Frequency reading 3.0 GHz(bandwidth 500 MHz)： ±10.30
accuracy 4.5 GHz (bandwidth 500 kHz): ±13.90
4.5 GHz (bandwidth 50 MHz): ±1.03
4.5 GHz(bandwidth 500 MHz)： ±10.30
6.0 GHz (bandwidth 500 kHz): ±15.10
6.0 GHz (bandwidth 50 MHz): ±1.03
6.0 GHz(bandwidth 500 MHz)： ±10.30
1kHz ±2.0%
10kHz ±2.0%
100kHz ±2.0%
Sweep width
1MHz ±2.0%
accuracy
10MHz ±2.0%
100MHz ±2.0%
1GHz ±2.0%
Range 10 μs ~ 600 s (zero sweep width)
1ms ±2.0%

Swp 10ms ±2.0%

Time Accuracy 100ms ±2.0%
1s ±2.0%
1s ±2.0%
Record Sheet of 4957B RF Analyzer (continued 2)

244 / 248
 4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Appendix A Performance and Property Inspection Results

No. Item Unit Standard Requirement Results

/ 10MHz ±10.0%
/ 3MHz ±10.0%
/ 1MHz ±10.0%
/ 300kHz ±10.0%
RBW Accuracy / 100kHz ±10.0%
/ 30kHz ±10.0%
/ 10kHz ±10.0%
/ 3kHz ±10.0%
/ 1kHz ±10.0%
+10kHz ≤-108
-10kHz ≤-108
+100kHz ≤-112
Sideband noise (carrier dBc/Hz -100kHz ≤-112
frequency 1GHz) +1MHz ≤-118
-1MHz ≤-118
+10MHz ≤-129
-10MHz ≤-129
2 MHz ~ 10 MHz (Preamplifier On) ≤-150
10 MHz ~ 3 GHz (Preamplifier On) ≤-160

Explicit average noise 3 GHz ~ 6.5 GHz (Preamplifier On) ≤-157

dBm
level
2 MHz ~ 10 MHz (Preamplifier Off) ≤-135

10 MHz ~ 3 GHz (Preamplifier Off) ≤-140

3 GHz ~ 6.5 GHz (Preamplifier Off) ≤-138
Second harmonic 0.9GHz <-65
dBc
distortion 2.5GHz <-65
Mirror, 2GHz Image frequency 2280.5 MHz <-65
multiple
3.5 GHz Image frequency 3780.5 MHz <-65
and dBc
out-of-band 5 GHz Image frequency 5280.5 MHz <-65
responses
10 MHz ~ 6.5 GHz (Preamplifier On) ≤-95
Residual response dBm
10 MHz ~ 6.5 GHz (Preamplifier Off) ≤-82
Logarithm scale: -120 dBm ~ +30 dBm, with step of 1
Range /
dB
/ 0 dBm Reference
dB -10 dBm ±1.20
Ref Level dB -20dBm ±1.20
Conversion
dB -30 dBm ±1.20
error
dB -40 dBm ±1.20
dB -50 dBm ±1.20
dB -60 dBm ±1.20

245 / 248
4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Appendix A Performance and Property Inspection Results
Record Sheet of 4957B RF Analyzer (continued 3)
No. Item Unit Standard Requirement Results

-10dBm ±1.00
-20dBm ±1.00
-30dBm ±1.00
Scale fidelity dB
-40dBm ±1.00
-50dBm ±1.00
-60dBm ±1.00
50 MHz (Attenuation 0 dB, input -25 dBm): ±1.80
50 MHz (Attenuation 10 dB, input -25 dBm): ±1.80
50 MHz (Attenuation 20 dB, input -25 dBm): ±1.80
50 MHz (Attenuation 30 dB, input -5 dBm): ±1.80
2000 MHz (Attenuation 0 dB, input -25 dBm): ±1.80
2000 MHz (Attenuation 10 dB, input -25 dBm): ±1.80
2000 MHz (Attenuation 20 dB, input -25 dBm): ±1.80
2000 MHz (Attenuation 30 dB, input -5 dBm): ±1.80
3000 MHz (Attenuation 0 dB, input -25 dBm): ±1.80
3000 MHz (Attenuation 10 dB, input -25 dBm): ±1.80
3000 MHz (Attenuation 20 dB, input -25 dBm): ±1.80
3000 MHz (Attenuation 30 dB, input -5 dBm): ±1.80
4000 MHz (Attenuation 0 dB, input -25 dBm): ±1.80
4000 MHz (Attenuation 10 dB, input -25 dBm): ±1.80
4000 MHz (Attenuation 20 dB, input -25 dBm): ±1.80
4000 MHz (Attenuation 30 dB, input -5 dBm): ±1.80
5000 MHz (Attenuation 0 dB, input -25 dBm): ±1.80
Overall level
dB 5000 MHz (Attenuation 10 dB, input -25 dBm): ±1.80
uncertainty
5000 MHz (Attenuation 20 dB, input -25 dBm): ±1.80
5000 MHz (Attenuation 30 dB, input -5 dBm): ±1.80
6000 MHz (Attenuation 0 dB, input -25 dBm): ±1.80
6000 MHz (Attenuation 10 dB, input -25 dBm): ±1.80
6000 MHz (Attenuation 20 dB, input -25 dBm): ±1.80
6000 MHz (Attenuation 30 dB, input -5 dBm): ±1.80
350 MHz (Attenuation0 dB, input -25 dBm): ±1.80
650 MHz (Attenuation0 dB, input -25 dBm): ±1.80
950 MHz (Attenuation0 dB, input -25 dBm): ±1.80
1250 MHz (Attenuation0 dB, input -25 dBm): ±1.80
1550 MHz (Attenuation0 dB, input -25 dBm): ±1.80
1850 MHz (Attenuation0 dB, input -25 dBm): ±1.80
2150 MHz (Attenuation0 dB, input -25 dBm): ±1.80
2450 MHz (Attenuation0 dB, input -25 dBm): ±1.80
2750 MHz (Attenuation0 dB, input -25 dBm): ±1.80
3050 MHz (Attenuation0 dB, input -25 dBm): ±1.80
3350 MHz (Attenuation0 dB, input -25 dBm): ±1.80

246 / 248
 4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Appendix A Performance and Property Inspection Results
Record Sheet of 4957B RF Analyzer (continued 4)
No. Item Unit Standard Requirement Results

3650 MHz (Attenuation0 dB, input -25 ±1.80

dBm):MHz (Attenuation0 dB, input -25
3850 ±1.80
dBm):MHz (Attenuation0 dB, input -25
4150 ±1.80
dBm):MHz (Attenuation0 dB, input -25
4450 ±1.80
dBm):MHz (Attenuation0 dB, input -25
4750 ±1.80
Overall level uncertainty dB dBm):MHz (Attenuation0 dB, input -25
5050 ±1.80
dBm):MHz (Attenuation0 dB, input -25
5350 ±1.80
dBm):MHz (Attenuation0 dB, input -25
5650 ±1.80
dBm):MHz (Attenuation0 dB, input -25
5850 ±1.80
dBm):MHz (Attenuation0 dB, input -25
6150 ±1.80
dBm):MHz (Attenuation0 dB, input -25
6450 ±1.80
Range / dBm):
0 ~ 30 dB, with step of 5 dB
/ Attenuation0 dB Reference /

dB Attenuation 5dB ±1.20

Conversion dB Attenuation 10dB ±1.20

uncertainty dB Attenuation 15dB ±1.20
(50 MHz) dB Attenuation 20dB ±1.20
dB Attenuation 25dB ±1.20
Attenuator dB Attenuation 30dB ±1.20
/ Attenuation0 dB Reference /
dB Attenuation 5dB ±1.20
Conversion dB Attenuation 10dB ±1.20
uncertainty dB Attenuation 15dB ±1.20
(6 GHz) dB Attenuation 20dB ±1.20
dB Attenuation 25dB ±1.20
dB Attenuation 30dB ±1.20
Input port voltage standing /
10 MHz ~ 6.5 GHz ≤2.00：1
wave ratio
Maximum safe input level / +27dBm (continuous wave, input attenuator is
Scale display / automatically
0.1 ~ 10 dB per
coupled)
graduation, with minimum step of
VBW / 0.1 dB (10 graduations
Bandwidth range: 1 Hz10
displayed)
MHz (with step of 1-3)
RF interface / N type adapter (female)
/ USB interface: Type A, two
Communication
/ USB interface: mini type, one
Interface
interface / LAN Interface: RJ45 type
Frequency / Reference input/output, BNC
reference / femaleantenna
GPS type interface: BNC
Other interface
/ female-type
External trigger input interface:
BNC female-type

247 / 248
4957B RF Analyzer User Manuals
Appendix A Performance and Property Inspection Results
Record Sheet of 4957B RF Analyzer (continued 5)
No. Item Unit Standard Requirement Results

/ Dielectric Strength requires AC

/ Voltage 242 V, leakage
1500V, 10mA/min; no current: ≤3.5 mA, 1min.
breakdown,
The insulation
noresistance
arcing. between the power input end
Safety and the casing should not be less than 100 MΩ under
The insulation
standard resistance
atmospheric betweenfor
conditions the power input end
testing.
/ and the casing should not be less than 2 MΩ in humid
environment.
1. ―√‖indicates normal function or meet the requirements; ―X‖ indicates that the function is abnormal or
Remarks does not meet the requirements;
2. "/" indicates that there is no such test item on this device.

Comprehensive judgment: Pass□ Fail□

248 / 248